UDC

NATIONAL STANDARD
OF THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
中华人民共和国国家标准
GB 50010−2010

Code for Design of Concrete Structures

混凝土结构设计规范

Issued on August 18, 2010 Implemented on July 1, 2011

Jointly Issued by the Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural Construction of the

People’s Republic of China and the General Administration of
Quality Supervision, Inspection and Quarantine of the People’s
Republic of China
 NATIONAL STANDARD

OF PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

中华人民共和国国家标准
Code for Design of Concrete Structures
混凝土结构设计规范
GB 50010-2010
Chief Development Department: Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural Development of the People’s
Republic of China

Approval Department: Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural Development of the People’s Republic
of China

Implementation Date: July 1, 2011

China Architecture & Building Press

中国建筑工业出版社

Beijing 2010
 NOTICE

This code is written in Chinese and English. The Chinese text shall be taken as the ruling one in
the event of any inconsistency between the Chinese text and the English text.

3
 Announcement of the Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural
Development of the People’s Republic of China

No.743

Announcement on Publishing the National Standard of “Code for Design of

Concrete Structures”

“Code for Design of Concrete Structures” has been approved as a national standard with a serial
number of GB 50010-2010, and it shall be implemented from July 1, 2011. Therein, Articles 3.1.7,
3.3.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 8.5.1, 10.1.1, 11.1.3, 11.2.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.12 and 11.7.14 are
compulsory provisions and must be enforced strictly. The former “Code for Design of Concrete
Structures” GB 50010-2002 shall be abolished simultaneously.

Authorized by the Standard Rating Research Institute of the Ministry of Housing and Urban-
Rural Development of the People’s Republic of China, this code is published and distributed by China
Architecture & Building Press.

Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural Development of the People’s Republic of China

August 18, 2010

4
 Foreword

According to the requirements of Document Jian Biao [2006] No.77 issued by the former
Ministry of Construction (MOC)—“Notice on Printing the Development and Revision Plan (First One)
of National Engineering Construction Standards in 2006”, China Academy of Building Research, in
conjunction with the organizations concerned, revised this code through extensive investigations and
studies by earnestly summarizing the experiences in actual practices and by referring to the relevant
international standards and foreign advanced standards as well as the relevant opinions.

The main contents of this code are: General, Terms and Symbols, General Requirements, Materials,
Structural Analysis, Ultimate Limit States, Serviceability Limit States, Detailing Requirements,
Fundamental Requirements for Structural Members, Prestressed Concrete Structural Members,
Seismic Design of Reinforced Concrete Structural Members and the relevant appendixes.

There have been some significant changes in this code in the following technical aspects: 1. The
provisions on the principles of structural scheme, design against progressive collapse of structures,
design of existing structures and design of unbounded prestressing were supplemented; 2. The
relevant provisions on the analysis of serviceability limit states were amended; 3. The ribbed steel
reinforcement of Grade 500MPa was added, and the steel reinforcement of Grade 235MPa was
replaced by plain round steel reinforcement of Grade 300MPa; 4. The relevant provisions on the
design of combined loaded members were supplemented, and the expression for the calculation of
shear and punching shear capacity were amended; 5. The relevant provisions on the cover thickness
and anchorage length of steel reinforcement as well as on the minimum ratio of reinforcement of
longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement were adjusted; 6. The relevant provisions on the
seismic design of two-way shear columns, coupling beams, shear walls and other boundary members
were supplemented and amended; 7. The relevant requirements of the seismic design of prestressed
concrete members and slab-column joints were supplemented and amended.

The provisions printed in bold type in this code are compulsory ones and must be enforced
strictly.

The Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural Development is in charge of the administration of this
code and the explanation of the compulsory provisions; the China Academy of Building Research is
responsible for the explanation of specific technical contents. The relevant opinions and advice,
whenever necessary, can be posted or passed on to the National Standard “Code for Design of
Concrete Structures” Administrative Group of China Academy of Building Research (address: No. 30,
Beisanhuan East Road, Beijing City, 100013, China).

Chief Development Organization of this code: China Academy of Building Research

Participating Development Organizations of this code:

Tsinghua University

Tongji University

Chongqing University

Tianjin University

Southeast University
5
 Zhengzhou University

Dalian University of Technology

Harbin Institute of Technology

Zhejiang University

Hunan University

Xi’an University of Architecture and Technology

Hohai University

National Center for Quality Supervision and Test of Construction Engineering

China Architecture Design and Research Group

Beijing Institute of Architectural Design

East China Architectural Design & Research Institute Co., Ltd.

China Southwest Architectural Design & Research Institute Co., Ltd.

Nanjing Architectural Design & Research Institute Co., Ltd.

China Aeronautical Project and Design Institute

China National Construction Steel Quality Supervision and Test Centre

China State Construction International Co. Ltd.

Beijing Yugou Co., Ltd.

Chief Drafting Staff of this code:
Zhao Jida, Xu Youlin, Huang Xiaokun, Tao Xuekang, Li
Yungui, Li Dongbin, Ye Lieping, Li Jie, Fu Jianping,
Wang Tiecheng, Liu Lixin, Qiu Hongxing, Di Xiaotan,
Wang Xiaofeng, Zhu Aiping, Song Yupu, Zheng Wenzhong,
Jin Weiliang, Liang Xingwen, Yi Weijian, Wu Shengxing,
Fan Zhong, Ke Changhua, Zhang Fengxin, Zuo Jiang,
Jia Jie, Wu Xiaobin, Zhu Jianguo, Jiang Qinjian,
Deng Mingsheng and Liu Gang

Chief Examining Staff of this code: Wu Xuemin, Xu Yongji, Bai Shengxiang, Li Mingshun,
Wang Dasui, Cheng Maokun, Kang Guyi, Mo Yong,
Wang Zhenhua, Hu Jiashun, Sun Huizhong, Chen Guoyi,
Geng Shujiang, Zhao Junli, Liu Qiongxiang, Lou Yu,
Zhang Yiping, Li Ting and Wu Yihong

6
 Contents

1 General................................................................................................................................ 1
2 Terms and Symbols..............................................................................................................2
2.1 Terms.......................................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 Symbols...................................................................................................................................... 4
3 General Requirements.........................................................................................................7
3.1 General.......................................................................................................................................7
3.2 Structural Scheme.....................................................................................................................8
3.3 Ultimate Limit States................................................................................................................ 8
3.4 Serviceability Limit States......................................................................................................10
3.5 Durability Requirements........................................................................................................ 12
3.6 Principles for Design Against Progressive Collapse.............................................................15
3.7 Principles for Design of Existing Structures.........................................................................16
4 Materials............................................................................................................................ 18
4.1 Concrete................................................................................................................................... 18
4.2 Steel Reinforcement................................................................................................................ 20
5 Structural Analysis............................................................................................................ 25
5.1 General.....................................................................................................................................25
5.2 Analysis Model.........................................................................................................................26
5.3 Elastic Analysis........................................................................................................................27
5.4 Plastic Internal Forces Redistribution Analysis................................................................... 28
5.5 Elastic-Plastic Analysis........................................................................................................... 28
5.6 Plastic Limit Analysis..............................................................................................................29
5.7 Indirect Action Effect Analysis.............................................................................................. 30
6 Ultimate Limit States......................................................................................................... 31
6.1 General.....................................................................................................................................31
6.2 Load-carrying Capacity of Normal Sections........................................................................ 31
6.3 Load-carryring Capacity of Inclined Sections..................................................................... 49
6.4 Load-carrying Capacity of Sections Subjected to Torsion.................................................. 58
6.5 Punching Shear Capacity....................................................................................................... 67
6.6 Local bearing Capacity...........................................................................................................70
6.7 Fatigue Analysis.......................................................................................................................73

7
7 Serviceability Limit States................................................................................................. 81
7.1 Crack control...........................................................................................................................81
7.2 Deflection of Flexural Members............................................................................................ 89
8 Detailing Requirements.....................................................................................................94
8.1 Expansion Joint....................................................................................................................... 94
8.2 Concrete Cover........................................................................................................................95
8.3 Anchorage of Steel Reinforcement........................................................................................ 96
8.4 Splices of Steel Reinforcement............................................................................................... 98
8.5 Minimum Ratio of Reinforcement for Longitudinal Load-carrying Steel Reinforcement
..........................................................................................................................................................101
9 Fundamental Requirements for Structural Members................................................... 103
9.1 Slabs........................................................................................................................................103
9.2 Beams..................................................................................................................................... 106
9.3 Columns, Joints and Brackets..............................................................................................113
9.4 Walls....................................................................................................................................... 121
9.5 Composite Members............................................................................................................. 123
9.6 Precast Concrete Structures.................................................................................................124
9.7 Embedded Parts and Connecting Pieces.............................................................................126
10 Prestressed Concrete Structural Members................................................................... 130
10.1 General.................................................................................................................................130
10.2 Calculation of Prestress Losses.......................................................................................... 139
10.3 Detailing of Prestressed Concrete Members.....................................................................144
11 Seismic Design of Reinforced Concrete Structural Members..................................... 150
11.1 General................................................................................................................................. 150
11.2 Materials.............................................................................................................................. 153
11.3 Frame Beams....................................................................................................................... 154
11.4 Frame Columns and Columns Supporting Structural Transfer Member..................... 157
11.5 Columns of Hinged Bent.....................................................................................................166
11.6 Joints of Frame.................................................................................................................... 168
11.7 Shear Walls and Coupling Beams......................................................................................172
11.8 Prestressed Concrete Structural Members....................................................................... 184
11.9 Slab-column Joints.............................................................................................................. 185
Appendix A Nominal Diameter, Cross-sectional area and Theoretical Self-weight of Steel
Reinforcement....................................................................................................................... 188
8
Appendix B Approximate Coefficient Method for Second Order Effect of Sway Structure
................................................................................................................................................189
Appendix C Constitutive Relations for Steel Reinforcement and Concrete and the Rule of
Multi-axial Strength for Concrete............................................................................................ 1
Appendix D Design of Plain Concrete Structural Members.............................................. 13
Appendix E Calculation for Flexual and Axial Capacity of Circular, Annular and
Arbitrary Cross Sections......................................................................................................... 17
Appendix F Design Value of Equivalent Concentrated Reaction Used for Calculation of
Slab-column Joints..................................................................................................................23
Appendix G Deep Flexural Members.................................................................................. 28
Appendix H Composite Beam and Slab Without Shores.................................................... 34
Appendix J Prestress losses of Curved Post-tensioned-Tendons Due to Anchorage
Seating and Tendon Shortening............................................................................................. 40
Appendix K Time-dependent Losses of Prestress................................................................45
Explanation of Wording in This Code....................................................................................48
List of Quoted Standards.........................................................................................................49

9
 1 General

1.0.1 This code was formulated with a view to implementing the national technical and economic
policies in the design of concrete structures, achieving safety, applicability and economy and
guaranteeing quality.

1.0.2 This code is applicable to the design of buildings and other general structures made by
reinforced concrete, prestressed concrete and plain concrete. But it is not applicable to the design of
structures using light self-weight aggregate concrete and special concrete.

1.0.3 This code was formulated based on the principle of the current national standards “Unified
Standard for Reliability Design of Engineering Structures” (GB 50153) and “Unified Standard
Reliability Design of Building Structures” (GB 50068). This code gives the basic requirements for the
design of concrete structures.

1.0.4 In addition to this code, the design of concrete structures shall also comply with those
stipulations specified in the relevant current national standards.

1
 2 Terms and Symbols

2.1 Terms

2.1.1 Concrete structure

The structure that is made mainly by concrete, including plain concrete structure, reinforced
concrete structure and prestressed concrete structure, etc..

2.1.2 Plain concrete structure

The concrete structure that has no reinforcement or no load-carrying reinforcement.

2.1.3 Steel rebar

A generic term for non-prestressing reinforcement used in concrete structural members.

2.1.4 Prestressing tendon

A generic term for prestressing steel wires, strands and deformed steel rebars used in concrete
structural members.

2.1.5 Reinforced concrete structure

The concrete structure that is provided with load-carrying reinforcement.

2.1.6 Prestressed concrete structure

The concrete structure that is provided with load-carrying prestressing tendons. The prestress is
introduced through stretching or other methods.

2.1.7 Cast-in-situ concrete structure

The concrete structure that is built by erecting form and integrally casting at its permanent
location.

2.1.8 Precast concrete structure

The concrete structure that is formed by assembling and connecting precast concrete members or
parts.

2.1.9 Assembled monolithic concrete structure

The concrete structure that is assembled by connecting precast concrete members or parts with
steel reinforcement, connectors or prestressing force and is finished by casting concrete at connecting
spots to form an integeral structure that responds to loads as one unit.

2.1.10 Composite member

The structural member that is produced by combining precast concrete members (or existing
concrete structural members) and cast-in-situ concrete but so interconnected that the combined
components act together as a single member and respond to loads as one unit.

2.1.11 Deep flexural member

The flexural member having span to height ratio less than 5.

2
2.1.12 Deep beam

The simply-supported single-span beam having span to height ratio less than 2, or multi-span
continuous beam having span to height ratio less than 2.5.

2.1.13 Pretensioned prestressed concrete structure

The concrete structure that is built by tensioning prestressing tendons on pedestal first and then
pouring concrete. The tendons and/or bars are then released from the pedestal and the prestress is
introduced into concrete through bonding action.

2.1.14 Post-tensioned prestressed concrete structure

The concrete structure in which the prestressing tendons are not tensioned until the concrete has
reached the required strength. The stretched prestressing tendons are anchored on the concrete to
establish prestress.

2.1.15 Unbonded prestressed concrete structure

One type of the post-tensioned prestressed concrete structures, using unbonded prestressing
tendons that can slide relative to concrete.

2.1.16 Bonded prestressed concrete structure

The concrete structure in which the prestress is established by grouting or by directly contacting
with concrete to form the mutual bonding between prestressing tendons and concrete.

2.1.17 Structural joint

A generic term for gaps dividing a concrete structure according to the requirements of structural
design.

2.1.18 Concrete cover

Concrete ranging from the outer edge of reinforcement to the surface of concrete member with a
function to protect the reinforcement.

2.1.19 Anchorage length

A length that is required for reinforcement to provide design stresses through bonding action
between the surface of the reinforcement and concrete, or via bearing action between the folded end
of the reinforcement and concrete.

2.1.20 Splice of reinforcement

A structural form realizing the transfer of internal forces between reinforcement by such methods
as binding and lapping, mechanical connecting and welding.

2.1.21 Ratio of reinforcement

The ratio of the reinforcement areas (or volumes) to the specified cross-sectional area (or volume)
of a concrete member.

2.1.22 Shear span ratio

The ratio of the section bending moment to the shear force multiplied by effective depth.

3
2.1.23 Transverse reinforcement

Stirrup or indirect reinforcement perpendicular to longitudinal reinforcement.

2.2 Symbols

2.2.1 Material properties

Ec——Elastic modulus of concrete;

Es——Elastic modulus of steel reinforcement;

C30——Strength grade of concrete having a characteristic value of 30N/mm2 for the cube
compressive strength;

HRB500——Ordinary hot rolled ribbed steel rebar with a strength level of 500MPa;

HRBF400——Fine grain hot rolled ribbed steel rebar with a strength level of 400MPa;

RRB400——Remained heat treatment ribbed steel rebar with a strength level of 400MPa;

HPB300——Hot rolled plain round steel rebar with a strength level of 300MPa;

Ordinary hot rolled ribbed steel rebar with a strength level of 400MPa and having
HRB400E——
relatively high seismic performance;

Characteristic value and design value of the axial compressive strength of concrete,
fck, fc——
respectively;

Characteristic value and design value of the axial tensile strength of concrete,
ftk, ft——
respectively;

fyk, fpyk——Characteristic values of the yield strength for steel rebars and prestressing tendons,
respectively;

fstk, fptk——Characteristic values of the ultimate strength for steel rebars and prestressing
tendons, respectively;

fy, f y ——Design values of the tensile strength and compressive strength for steel rebars,
respectively;

fpy, f py ——Design values of tensile strength and compressive strength for prestressing tendons,
respectively;
fyv——Design value of tensile strength for transverse reinforcement;

δgt——Total percentage elongation of reinforcement at the maximum force, also referred to

as uniform percentage elongation.

2.2.2 Actions and action effects

N——Design value of axial force;

Nk, Nq——Values of axial forces calculated in accordance with the characteristic combination
and the quasi-permanent combination of loads, respectively;

Nu0——Design value of the axial compression or axial tension load-carrying capacity of

4
 member section;
Np0——Prestressing force applied to prestressed concrete where prestress in the normal
direction of the concrete is equal to zero;

M——Design value of bending moment;

Mk, Mq——Values of bending moment calculated in accordance with the characteristic

combination and the quasi-permanent combination of loads, respectively;

Mu——Design value of the flexural capacity for the normal section of a member;

Mcr——Cracking bending moment value for the normal section of a flexural member;

T——Design value of torsional moment;

V——Design value of shear force;

Fl——Design value of localised force or concentrated reaction;

σs, σp——Stresses in longitudinal reinforcement and in prestressing tendon respectively, in the

calculation of load-carrying capacity for normal section;

σpe——Effective prestress of prestressing tendon;

σl,  l ——Losses of prestress at the corresponding stages for prestressing tendon in tension
zone and compression zone, respectively;

τ——Shear stress of concrete;

ωmax——The maximum crack width calculated according to quasi-permanent loads

combination or characteristic loads combination, and taking into account effects of
long term action.

2.2.3 Geometric parameters

b——Width of rectangular section, or web width of T-shaped or I-shaped sections;

c——Thickness of concrete cover;

d——Nominal diameter of steel reinforcement (hereinafter referred to as “diameter”) or

diameter of circular section;

h——Depth of section;

h0——Effective depth of section;

lab, la——Basic anchorage length, and anchorage length of longitudinal tensile reinforcement,
respectively;

l0——Effective span or length;

s——Spacing of transverse reinforcement, spacing of spiral reinforcement or spacing of

stirrups in the longitudinal direction of a member;

x——Depth of concrete compression zone;

5
 A——Cross-sectional area of a member;

As, As ——Cross-sectional areas of longitudinal steel rebars in tension zone and compression
zone, respectively;

Ap, Ap ——Cross-sectional areas of longitudinal prestressing tendons in tension zone and
compression zone, respectively;

Al——Local compression area of concrete;

Acor——Core cross-sectional area of concrete surrounded by stirrups, spiral reinforcement or

reinforcement mesh;

B——Section rigidity of a flexural member;

I——Moment of inertia of section;

W——Elastic section modulus with respect to the extreme fiber in tension zone of section;

Wt——Plastic torsional section modulus.

2.2.4 Calculation coefficients and miscellaneous

αE——Ratio of the elastic modulus of steel reinforcement to the elastic modulus of concrete;

γ——Plastic coefficient for section modulus of concrete members;

η——Amplifying coefficient for eccentricity of axial force considering second order effect;

λ——Ratio of shear span to effective depth for calculated section, namely M/(Vh0);

ρ——Reinforcement ratio for longitudinal reinforcement;

ρv——Volumetric reinforcement ratio for indirect reinforcement or stirrup;

 ——Diameter of rebar,  20 represents the rebar having a diameter of 20mm.

6
 3 General Requirements

3.1 General

3.1.1 The design of concrete structures shall include the following contents:

1 Design of structural scheme, including the structure selection, member layout and force
transfer route;

2 Action and effects of action analysis;

3 Limit states design of the structure;

4 Detailing and connection measures of structures and members;

5 Durability and construction requirements;

6 Special performance design of such structure meeting special requirements.

3.1.2 This code adopts the probability-based limit states design method, the degree of reliability of
structural members is measured by the reliability index, and the design is carried out by adopting the
design expressions of partial factors.

3.1.3 The limit states design of concrete structures shall include:

1 Ultimate limit states: A structure or a structural member reaches the maximum load-carrying
capacity and appears the fatigue failure or undue deformation unsuitable for loading continually or
has progressive collapse due to the local failure of structure;

2 Serviceability limit states: A structure or a structural member reaches a certain specified limit
value of serviceability or a certain specified state of durability.

3.1.4 The direct action (load) on a structure shall be determined in accordance with the current
national standard “Load Code for the Design of Building Structures” (GB 50009) and the relevant
standards; the seismic action shall be determined in accordance with the current national standard
“Code for Seismic Design of Buildings” (GB 50011).

The indirect action and accidental action shall be determined in accordance with the relevant
standards or the specific conditions.

Structural members directly bearing crane loads shall take the dynamic factor of crane loads into
account. For fabrication, transportation and installation of precast members, the corresponding
dynamic factors shall be taken into account. For cast-in-situ structures, the loads during the
construction stage shall be taken into account if necessary.

3.1.5 The safety class and design working life of concrete structures shall meet the current national
standard “Unified Standard for Reliability Design of Engineering Structures” (GB 50153).

The safety class of different structural members in a concrete structure should be the same as the
safety class of the whole structure. The safety class of parts of the structural member may be adjusted
properly according to their importance. For important members and critical force transfer positions in
the structure, the safety class should be elevated appropriately.

3.1.6 The design of concrete structures shall take the technical level of construction and the
7
feasibility of practical engineering condition into account. For concrete structures with special
functions, the corresponding construction requirements shall be proposed.

3.1.7 The design shall explicate the purposes of the structures. The purposes and the aplication
circumstances of the structures shall not be modified within the design working life without
technical evaluation or design permission.

3.2 Structural Scheme

3.2.1 The design scheme of concrete structures shall meet the following requirements:

1 Reasonable structural system, member form and layout shall be selected;

2 The plan and elevation of the structure should be arranged regularly, the mass and rigidity of
all parts should be uniform and continuous;

3 The force transfer path of the structure shall be simple and definite, and vertical members
should be continuous and aligned;

4 The statically indeterminte structure should be adopted; important members and crucial force
transfer positions shall have additional redundant constraints or have several load transfer paths;

5 Measures should be taken to reduce the effects of accidental actions.

3.2.2 The design of structural joints in concrete structures shall meet the following requirements:

1 The position and structural form of structural joints shall be determined reasonably in
accordance with the load-carrying characteristics, architectural scale and shape, and service
requirements of the structure;

2 The number of structural joints should be controlled, and effective measures shall be taken to
reduce the adverse impacts of joints on the service function;

3 The temporary structural joints during construction stage may be arranged as required.

3.2.3 The connection of structural members shall meet the following requirements:

1 The load-carrying capacity of the connecting part shall ensure the force transfer between the
connected members;

2 When the concrete members are connected with those made of other materials, reliable
measures shall be taken;

3 The impact caused by the deformation of concrete member on connecting joints and adjacent
structures or members shall be considered.

3.2.4 The design of concrete structures shall meet the requirements on material saving, ease of
construction, reducing energy consumption and protecting environment.

3.3 Ultimate Limit States

3.3.1 The ultimate limit states design of concrete structures shall include the following contents:

1 The calculation of load-carrying capacity (including instability) shall be carried out for

8
structural members;

2 Fatigue analysis shall be carried out for members undergoing repeated loads;

3 When seismic design is required, the calculation of seismic capacity shall be carried out;

4 The analysis of structural overturning, sliding or floating shall be carried out if necessary;

5 Regarding the important structures that may suffer from accidental actions and may cause
serious consequences if collapsing, the design against progressive collapse should be carried out.

3.3.2 For persistent design situation, transient design situation and seismic design situation, if
expressed in the form of internal force, the following design expressions shall be adopted for
ultimate limit states design of the structural members:

γ0S≤R (3.3.2-1)

R=R(fc, fs, ak, …)/γRd (3.3.2-2)

Where γ0——The significance coefficient of structure: under the persistent design situation
and transient design situation, this coefficient shall not be less than 1.1 for the
structural members having the safety grade of Class I ; it shall not be less than
1.0 for the structural members having the safety grade of Class II; and it shall
not be less than 0.9 for the structural members having the safety grade of Class
III; under the seismic design situation, this coefficient shall be 1.0;

S——The design value of the effect for combination of actions at ultimate limit states:
it shall be calculated according to the basic combination of actions under the
persistent design situation and transient design situation; and it shall be
calculated according to the seismic combination of actions under seismic design
situation;

R——The design value of resistance of structural member;

R(·)——The function of resistance of structural member;

γRd——The uncertainty coefficient of the resistance model of structural member: it is

taken as 1.0 for static design, and taken as values larger than 1.0 according to
specific conditions for the structural members with large uncertainty; in the
seismic design, γRd shall be replaced by the seismic adjustment coefficient of
load-carrying capacity γRE;

fc, fs——The design values of the strength for concrete and steel reinforcement
respectively, which shall be taken as the values in accordance with Article 4.1.4
and Article 4.2.3 of this code;

ak——The characteristic value of geometric parameter. If the variation of the

geometric parameter has significant adverse impact on the structural behavior,
ak may be increased or decreased by an additional value.

Note: γ0S in Expression (3.3.2-1) is the design value of internal force and is expressed by N, M, V, T in chapters of this code.

3.3.3 For the two-dimensional and three-dimensional concrete structural members, if the analysis is
carried out according to the elastic or elastic-plastic method and the expression is in the form of stress,

9
the concrete stress may be equivalently substituted into the design value of internal force in the zone
and be calculated according to Article 3.3.2 of this code; or the design may be carried out by directly
adopting the multi-axial strength criterion.

3.3.4 Where the ultimate limit states design of the structure under accidental actions is carried out,
the design value S in Expression (3.3.2-1) shall be calculated according to the accidental combination
and the significance coefficient of structure (γ0) shall be taken as a value no less than 1.0; the design
values of strength of concrete and steel reinforcement (fc and fs) in Expression (3.3.2-2) shall be
replaced by the characteristic values of strength (fck and fyk) (or fpyk).

Where progressive collapse analysis of structure is carried out, the function of load-carrying
capacity of structural member shall be determined according to the principles stated in Section 3.6 of
this code.

3.3.5 The ultimate limit states design of existing structures shall be carried out according to the
following requirements:

1 Where ultimate limit states analysis is required for conducting safety reassessment, changing
service purpose or extending the service life of existing structures, it should meet the requirements
specified in Article 3.3.2 of this code;

2 Where existing structures are redesigned for the purpose of renovation, extension or
consolidation, the calculation of ultimate limit states shall meet the requirements specified in Section
3.7 of this code.

3.4 Serviceability Limit States

3.4.1 On the basis of the functions and appearance requirements of the concrete structural members,
the serviceability limit states shall be checked according to the following provisions:

1 For members requiring deformation control, the deformation shall be checked;

2 For members that are not allowed to crack, the tensile stress of concrete shall be checked;

3 For members that are allowed to crack, the width of cracks shall be checked;

4 For floor system having comfort requirements, the vertical natural vibration frequency shall
be checked.

3.4.2 For serviceability limit states, reinforced concrete members and prestressed concrete members
shall be checked respectively according to the quasi-permanent combination or characteristic
combination of loads, and taking into account the influence of long-term actions, by adopting the
following design expression:

S≤C (3.4.2)

Where S——The design value of the effect of load combination for serviceability limit states;

C——The limit value of the specified deformation, stress, crack width or natural vibration
frequency when the structural member meets the serviceability requirements.

3.4.3 The maximum deflection of reinforced concrete flexural member shall be calculated according
to the quasi-permanent combination of loads; the maximum deflection of prestressed concrete flexural

10
member shall be calculated according to the characteristic combination of loads; the influence of
long-term action of loads shall be considered in both calculations; the calculated values shall not
exceed the deflection limit values specified in Table 3.4.3.

Table 3.4.3 Deflection Limit Values of Flexural Members

Member type Limit value of deflection

Manual-operate crane l0/500

Crane girder
Electric-operate crane l0/600

If l0<7m l0/200(l0/250)

Roof, floor and stair members If 7m≤l0≤9m l0/250(l0/300)

If l0>9m l0/300(l0/400)

Note: 1 l0 in this Table is the effective span of members; to calculate the limit value of deflection of cantilever members, its effective
span l0 shall be adopted as two times the actual cantilever length;

2 Values in parentheses in this Table are applicable to members that have comparatively high requirement on deflection in
application;

3 If the member is cambered before fabrication and it is allowed in application, the camber value shall be deducted from the
calculated deflection value during the deflection analysis; for prestressed concrete members, the inverted camber value
caused by jacking force may be also be deducted;

4 The camber value during the fabrication of member and the inverted camber value caused by jacking force should not
exceed the calculated deflection value of the member under the action of corresponding load combination.

3.4.4 The control of force-induced cracks for normal section of structural member shall be divided
into three levels, and the classification and requirements of the control level shall meet the following
provisions:

Level 1——For members on which cracks are strictly prohibited, if the calculation is in
accordance with the characteristic combination of loads, tensile stress shall not occur at the extreme
fiber in tension zone of concrete.

Level 2——For members on which cracks are generally prohibited, if the calculation is in
accordance with the characteristic combination of loads, tensile stress at the extreme fiber in tension
zone of concrete shall not be larger than the characteristic value of concrete tensile strength.

Level 3——For members on which cracks are allowed: as for reinforced concrete members, if
the calculation is in accordance with the quasi-permanent combination of loads and considering the
influence of long-term actions of loads, the maximum crack width of the member shall not exceed the
limit values of maximum crack width as specified in Table 3.4.5 of this code. As for prestressed
concrete members, if the calculation is in accordance with the characteristic combination of loads and
considering the influence of long-term actions of loads, the maximum crack width of the member
shall not exceed the limit values of maximum crack width as specified in Article 3.4.5 of this code; as
for the prestressed concrete members of Environmental Category II-a, the calculation shall also be in
accordance with the quasi-permanent combination of loads and the concrete tensile stress at the
extreme fiber in tension zone of the member shall not be larger than the characteristic value of the
concrete tensile strength.

3.4.5 The different crack control levels and the limit values of maximum crack width ωlim of
structural members shall be selected from Table 3.4.5 according to the structure type and the
11
environmental categories specified in Article 3.5.2 of this code.
Table 3.4.5 Crack Control Levels and Limit Values of Maximum Crack Width (mm) of Structural Members

Reinforced concrete structure Prestressed concrete structure

Environmental category
Crack control level ωlim Crack control level ωlim
I 0.30 (0.40) 0.20
Level 3
II-a 0.10
Level 3
II-b 0.20 Level 2 —

III-a and III-b Level 1 —

Note: 1 For flexural members of Environmental Category I in such areas where the annual average relative humidity is less than
60%, the limit value for the maximum crack width may be taken as the values in parentheses;

2 Under Category I environment, the limit value for the maximum crack width of reinforced concrete roof truss, bracket and
crane girder requiring fatigue analysis shall be taken as 0.20mm; and for reinforced concrete roof beam and joist, the limit
value shall be taken as 0.30mm;

3 Under Category I environment, the prestressed concrete roof truss, bracket and two-way slab system shall be checked
according to the crack control level 2; under the Category I environment, the prestressed concrete roof beam, joist and
one-way slab shall be checked according to the requirements for Category II-a environment as given in this Table; under the
Category I and II-a environments, the prestressed concrete crane girder requiring the checking of fatigue shall be checked
according to the members with crack control level no less than Level 2;

4 The crack control levels and the limit values of maximum crack width for prestressed concrete members are only applicable
to the checking of normal section; the checking of the crack control of inclined section of prestressed concrete members
shall meet the relevant requirements stated in Chapter 7 of this code;

5 For chimneys, silos and structures under liquid pressure, the crack control requirements shall meet the relevant provisions of
special standards;

6 For structural members under Category IV and V environments, the crack control requirements shall meet the relevant
provisions of special standards;

7 The limit values of the maximum crack width in this Table are used for the checking of maximum crack width caused by the
action of loads.

3.4.6 For concrete floor systems, the vertical natural vibration frequency shall be checked according
to the requirements of their service functions and should meet the following requirements:

1 The vertical natural vibration frequency of residential buildings and apartments should not be
less than 5Hz;

2 The vertical natural vibration frequency of office buildings and hotels should not be less than
4Hz;

3 The vertical natural vibration frequency of large-span public buildings should not be less than
3Hz.

3.5 Durability Requirements

3.5.1 The durability of concrete structures shall be designed in accordance with the design working
life and environmental categories, and the durability design shall include the following contents:

12
 1 The environmental category in which the structure is located shall be determined;

2 The basic requirements on the durability of concrete materials shall be proposed;

3 The thickness of concrete cover for steel reinforcement in members shall be determined;

4 The technical measures for durability taken under different ambient conditions;

5 The inspection and maintenance requirements for structures in service shall be proposed.

Note: As for the temporary concrete structures, the requirements for durability of concrete may not be considered.

3.5.2 The category of exposure environment of concrete structure shall be divided according to the
requirements of Table 3.5.2.

Table 3.5.2 Environmental Categories for Concrete Structures

Environmental category Condition

Dry indoor environment;

I
Submersion environment of non-aggressive static water
Indoor humid environment;
Open-air environment of non-severe cold and non-cold areas;
Environment in non-severe cold and non-cold areas, directly contacting with non-aggressive water or
II-a
soil;
Environment below the frost lines in severe cold and cold areas, directly contacting with non-
aggressive water or soil
Alternate wetting and drying environment;
Environment with frequently varying water levels;
II-b Open-air environment of the severe cold and cold areas;
Environments above the frost lines in severe cold and cold areas, directly contacting with non-aggressive
water or soil
Environment in regions with varying water levels in winter in the severe cold and cold areas;
III-a Environment affected by deicing salt;
Sea wind environment
Environment of salty soil;
III-b Environment under the action of deicing salt;
Seacoast environment

IV Sea water environment

V Environment affected by human action or natural corrosive substance

Note: 1 The indoor humid environment refers to the environment in which the member surface is at the dew or wet state frequently;

2 The division of severe cold and cold areas shall meet the relevant provisions of the current national standard “Thermal
Design Code for Civil Building” (GB 50176).

3 The seacoast environment and sea wind environment should be determined by investigations and engineering experiences
based on local circumstances, in consideration of the influence of the prevailing wind direction and windward and leeward
positions of the structure;

4 The environment affected by deicing salt refers to the environment that is affected by the mist of deicing salt; the
environment under the action of deicing salt refers to the environment that is splashed by deicing salt solution and buildings
in areas where deicing salt is used, such as in car wash and parking structures.

13
 5 Exposure environment of concrete structures refers to the environment that surrounds surfaces of concrete structures.

3.5.3 For concrete structures with design working life of 50 years, the concrete materials should be
in accordance with Table 3.5.3.

Table 3.5.3 Basic Requirements on Durability of Structural Concrete Materials

Environmental Maximum water-cement Minimum strength Maximum chloride ion content Maximum alkali content
category ratio grade (%) (kg/m3)

I 0.60 C20 0.30 Unlimited

II-a 0.55 C25 0.20

II-b 0.50 (0.55) C30 (C25) 0.15

3.0
III-a 0.45 (0.50) C35 (C30) 0.15

III-b 0.40 0.40 0.10

Note: 1 Chloride ion content refers to the percentage of chloride ions in the total amount of cementitous materials;

2 The maximum chloride ion content in concrete for prestressed member is 0.06%; the minimum concrete strength grade
should be increased by two grades according to the table;

3 Requirements on the water-cement ratio and minimum strength grade of concrete for plain concrete members may be
reduced appropriately;

4 If reliable engineering experience is available, the minimum concrete strength grade in the environmental category II may be
reduced by one grade;

5 The concrete in the Category II-b and III-a environments of severe cold and cold areas shall be used with air entraining
agent and may adopt relevant parameters in the parentheses;

6 Where the non-alkali activated aggregate is applied, the alkali content in the concrete may not be limited.

3.5.4 Concrete structures and members shall also employ the following technical measures for the
durability:

1 The prestressing tendons in prestressed concrete structures shall be taken with such measures
as surface protection, duct grouting and increasing the thickness of concrete cover according to
specific conditions. The exposed anchored end shall be taken with effective measures, such as anchor
seal and concrete surface treatment;

2 For concrete structures with requirements on impermeability, the impermeability grade of

concrete shall meet the requirements of relevant standards;

3 In the humid environment in severe cold and cold areas, the structural concrete shall meet the
requirements on freezing resistance, and the resistance class to freezing-thawing of concrete shall
meet the requirements of relevant standards;

4 Cantilever members in Category II and III environment should adopt the structural form of
cantilever beam-slab or may be added with protective coating on upper surfaces;

5 For structural members in Category II and III environments, surfaces of metal elements such
as embedded parts, hooks and connecting pieces, shall have reliable rust prevention measures; as for
the exposed metal anchorage devices of post-tensioning prestressed concrete, protection requirements
are detailed in Article 10.3.13 of this code;

14
 6 Concrete structural members in Category III environment may adopt corrosion inhibitor,
epoxy coated steel reinforcement or other steel reinforcement having corrosion resistance; they may
alternatively employ cathodic protection, or use replaceable parts.

3.5.5 In Category I environment, concrete structures with design working life up to 100 years shall
meet the following requirements:

1 The minimum strength grade of concrete used in reinforced concrete structures and
prestressed concrete structures is C30 and C40 respectively;

2 The maximum chloride ion content in concrete is 0.06%;

3 The non-alkali activated aggregate should be used. If alkali activated aggregate is used, the
maximum alkali content in concrete shall be 3.0kg/m3;

4 The thickness of concrete cover shall meet Article 8.2.1 of this code; where effective surface
protection measures are taken, the thickness of concrete cover may be reduced appropriately.

3.5.6 In Category II and III environment, concrete structures with design working life up to 100
years shall employ special effective measures.

3.5.7 For concrete structures in Category IV and V environment, the durability requirements shall
meet those specified in the relevant standards.

3.5.8 Concrete structures shall also meet the following requirements within their design working
life:

1 Periodical inspection and maintenance system shall be established;

2 Replaceable concrete members in design shall be replaced as specified;

3 Protective coating for surface of members shall be maintained or replaced as specified;

4 Visible durability defects of structures, if any, shall be treated timely.

3.6 Principles for Design Against Progressive Collapse

3.6.1 The design of preventing the progressive collapse of concrete structures should meet the
following requirements:

1 Measures should be taken to reduce the effects of accidental actions;

2 Measures should be taken to protect important members and key force transfer position from
directly undergoing accidental actions;

3 Redundant constraints should be added and alternative force transfer paths shall be arranged
in the zones where the structure is susceptible to the effects of accidental actions;

4 The load-carrying capacity and deformability of important structural members and key force
transfer positions in emergency evacuation exits, shelters etc. should be reinforced;

5 Steel reinforcement should be continuous in horizontal and vertical members and reliably
anchored with adjacent members;

6 Structural joints should be arranged to control the scope of possible progressive collapse.
15
3.6.2 The design against progressive collapse of important structures may adopt the following
methods:

1 Local reinforcement method: Enhance the safety margin of vertical important members and
crucial force transfer parts that may be damaged because of accidental actions. Alternatively, the
design may be carried out directly based on the accidental actions.

2 Member tying method: if the local vertical member of the structure is out of service, the
load-carrying capacity may be checked according to the beam-tie model, suspension cable-tie model
and cantilever-tie model respectively based on the specific conditions, in order to maintain the
stability of overall structure.

3 Member dismantling method: the main loaded members of the structure are dismantled
according to certain rules and the ultimate load-carrying capacity of the residual structural system
shall be checked; the design may also be carried out by adopting the overall process analysis of
collapse.

3.6.3 To check the progressive collapse of the structure under accidental actions, the dynamic factor
caused by the collapse impact at the corresponding position of this structure should be considered in
the actions. In the calculation of the function of resistance, the concrete strength shall be taken as the
characteristic value of strength fck; the strength of steel rebars shall be taken as the characteristic value
of ultimate strength fstk, the strength of prestressing tendon shall be taken as the characteristic value of
ultimate strength fptk with the consideration of the influence of anchorage device. The influence of the
collapse of structure due to the accidental actions on the geometric parameters of this structure should
be taken into account. If necessary, the strengthening and brittleness of the material properties under
dynamic actions also shall be considered, and the corresponding characteristic values of strength shall
be taken.

3.7 Principles for Design of Existing Structures

3.7.1 The existing structures shall be evaluated, checked or redesigned with a view to extending
service life, changing service functions, renovation, extension or consolidation and restoration, etc..

3.7.2 To evaluate the safety, applicability, durability and disaster resistance of the existing structures,
the requirements of the principles stated in the current national standard “Unified Standard for
Reliability Design of Engineering Structures” (GB 50153) as well as the following requirements shall
be met:

1 The design scheme of existing structure shall be determined according to the evaluation
result, service requirements and continuous service life;

2 For the existing structures, if their service functions are changed or their service life is
extended, the analysis of ultimate limit states should meet the relevant provisions of this code;

3 Where the existing structures are redesigned for purpose of renovation, extension or
consolidation, the calculation of ultimate limit states shall meet this code and the relevant standards;

4 For existing structures, the analysis of serviceability limit states and the detailing
requirements should meet those specified in this code;

5 If necessary, the purpose of use may be adjusted correspondingly, and the requirements for

16
restriction of service shall be proposed.

3.7.3 The design of existing structures shall meet the following requirements:

1 The structural scheme shall be optimized to guarantee the integrity of the structure;

2 The loads may be determined according to the current codes and may also be adjusted
appropriately according to the purpose of use;

3 The design values of strength of concrete and steel reinforcement in the existing structure
shall be determined by test values; where the properties of materials meet the requirements of the
original design, the strength may also take the values as specified in the original design;

4 The design shall take into account the actual geometric dimensions, sectional reinforcement,
connection detailing and imperfections of the existing structural members; if they meet the
requirements of the original design, values may be taken according the requirements of the original
design;

5 The load carrying history of the existing structure and the influence of the construction
conditions shall be taken into consideration; the composite members formed in two-phase may be
designed according to Section 9.5 of this code.

17
 4 Materials

4.1 Concrete

4.1.1 The strength grade of concrete shall be determined according to the characteristic value of
cube compressive strength. The characteristic value of cube compressive strength refers to the
compressive strength value with a 95% guarantee rate measured by the standard test method on
150mm-side-long cube specimen that is cast and cured for 28 days or an age specified in the design
according to the standard test.

4.1.2 The strength grade of concrete for plain concrete structures shall not be less than C15 and that
of reinforced concrete structures shall not be less than C20; if the steel reinforcement of or above
strength grade 400MPa are used, the concrete strength grade shall not be less than C25.

The strength grade of concrete for prestressed concrete structures should not be less than C40
and shall not be less than C30.

The strength grade of concrete for reinforced concrete members bearing repeated loads shall not
be less than C30.

4.1.3 The characteristic value of axial compressive strength (fck) of concrete shall be selected
according to Table 4.1.3-1; the characteristic value of axial tensile strength (ftk) shall be selected
according to Table 4.1.3-2.
Table 4.1.3-1 Characteristic Values of the Axial Compressive Strength of Concrete (N/mm2)

Concrete strength grade

Strength
C15 C20 C25 C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60 C65 C70 C75 C80

fck 10.0 13.4 16.7 20.1 23.4 26.8 29.6 32.4 35.5 38.5 41.5 44.5 47.4 50.2

Table 4.1.3-2 Characteristic Values of the Axial Tensile Strength of Concrete (N/mm2)

Concrete strength grade

Strength
C15 C20 C25 C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60 C65 C70 C75 C80

ftk 1.27 1.54 1.78 2.01 2.20 2.39 2.51 2.64 2.74 2.85 2.93 2.99 3.05 3.11

4.1.4 The design value of axial compressive strength (fc) of concrete shall be selected according
to Table 4.1.4-1; the design value of axial tensile strength (ft) shall be selected according to Table
4.1.4-2.

Table 4.1.4-1 Design Value of the Axial Compressive Strength of Concrete (N/mm2)

Concrete strength grade

Strength
C15 C20 C25 C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60 C65 C70 C75 C80

fc 7.2 9.6 11.9 14.3 16.7 19.1 21.1 23.1 25.3 27.5 29.7 31.8 33.8 35.9

Table 4.1.4-2 Design Value of the Axial Tensile Strength of Concrete (N/mm2)

Concrete strength grade

Strength
C15 C20 C25 C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60 C65 C70 C75 C80

ft 0.91 1.10 1.27 1.43 1.57 1.71 1.80 1.89 1.96 2.04 2.09 2.14 2.18 2.22

18
4.1.5 The elastic modulus of concrete (Ec) in compression or in tension should be selected according
to Table 4.1.5.

The shear modulus of concrete (Gc) may be adopted as 40% of the values of corresponding
elastic modulus.

The Poisson’s ratio of concrete (υc) may be adopted as 0.2.

Table 4.1.5 Elastic Modulus of Concrete (×104N/mm2)

Concrete strength grade C15 C20 C25 C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60 C65 C70 C75 C80

Ec 2.20 2.55 2.80 3.00 3.15 3.25 3.35 3.45 3.55 3.60 3.65 3.70 3.75 3.80

Note: 1 Where reliable test basis is available, the elastic modulus may be determined according to the actual measured data;

2 Where the concrete is mixed with a large amount of admixtures, the elastic modulus of concrete may be determined
according to the actual measured data based on the specified age.

4.1.6 The design values of the axial compressive fatigue strength and axial tensile fatigue strength of
concrete, namely f cf and f t f , shall be determined by multiplying the design values of strength listed in
Table 4.1.4-1 and Table 4.1.4-2 with a correction coefficient γρ of fatigue strength, respectively. The
correction coefficient γρ for the compressive or tensile fatigue strength of concrete shall be selected
respectively according to Table 4.1.6-1 and Table 4.1.6-2 based on the fatigue stress ratio  cf ; if the
concrete is under the action of tensile-compressive fatigue stress, the correction coefficient γρ of
fatigue strength shall be taken as 0.60.

The fatigue stress ratio  cf shall be calculated according to the following expression:

 c,f min
 cf  (4.1.6)
 c,f max

Where  c,f min ,  c,f max ——The minimum and maximum stresses of concrete at the same fiber of the
section in fatigue analysis of members respectively.

Table 4.1.6-1 Correction Coefficient γp of Concrete Compressive Fatigue Strength

 cf 0   cf  0.1 0.1   cf  0.2 0.2   cf  0.3 0.3   cf  0.4 0.4   cf  0.5  cf  0.5
γρ 0.68 0.74 0.80 0.86 0.93 1.00

Table 4.1.6-1 Correction Coefficient γp of Concrete Tensile Fatigue Strength

 cf 0   cf  0.1 0.1   cf  0.2 0.2   cf  0.3 0.3   cf  0.4 0.4   cf  0.5

γρ 0.63 0.66 0.69 0.72 0.74

 f
c 0.5    0.6
f
c 0.6    0.7
f
c 0.7    0.8
f
c   0.8
f
c —

γρ 0.76 0.80 0.90 1.00 —

Note: For concrete members carrying fatigue loads directly, if they are steam cured, the curing temperature should not exceed 60℃.

4.1.7 The fatigue deformation modulus of concrete Ecf shall be selected according to Table 4.1.7.

Table 4.1.7 Fatigue Deformation Modulus of Concrete (×104N/mm2)

19
 Strength grade C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60 C65 C70 C75 C80
f
E c 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90

4.1.8 If the temperature is within the range from 0℃ to 100℃, the thermal parameters of concrete
may be taken as the following values:

Linear expansion coefficient ac: 1×10 5/℃; －

Coefficient of thermal conductivity λ: 10.6kJ/(m · h ·℃);

Specific heat capacity c: 0.96kJ/(kg ·℃).

4.2 Steel Reinforcement

4.2.1 The steel reinforcement in concrete structures shall be selected according to the following
provisions:

1 The longitudinal load-carrying steel rebars should adopt the HRB400, HRB500, HRBF400
and HRBF500 steel reinforcement and may also adopt the HPB300, HRB335, HRBF335 and RRB400
steel reinforcement;

2 The longitudinal load-carrying steel rebars for beam and column shall adopt HRB400,
HRB500, HRBF400 and HRBF500 steel reinforcement;

3 Stirrups should adopt HRB400, HRBF400, HPB300, HRB500 and HRBF500 steel
reinforcement and may also adopt HRB335 and HRBF335 steel reinforcement;

4 The prestressing tendons should adopt prestressing steel wires, steel strands and prestressed
deformed steel reinforcement.

4.2.2 The guarantee probability for the characteristic value of strength of steel reinforcement
shall not be less than 95%.

The characteristic value of yield strength (fyk) and the characteristic value of ultimate
strength (fstk) of steel rebars shall be selected according to Table 4.2.2-1; the characteristic
values of yield strength (fpyk) and characteristic values of ultimate strength (fptk) of prestressing
steel wires, steel strands and prestressed deformed steel reinforcement shall be selected according
to Table 4.2.2-2.

Table 4.2.2-1 Characteristic Values of Strength of Steel Rebars (N/mm2)

Nominal diameter Characteristic value of yield strength Characteristic value of ultimate strength
Grade Symbol
d (mm) fyk fstk

HPB300 Φ 6~22 300 420

HRB335
6~50 335 455
HRBF335
HRB400
HRBF400 6~50 400 540
RRB400
HRB500
6~50 500 630
HRBF500

Table 4.2.2-2 Characteristic Values of Strength of Prestressing tendons (N/mm2)

20
 Nominal diameter Characteristic value of Characteristic value of
Type Symbol
d (mm) yield strength fpyk ultimate strength fptk

620 800
Medium-strength Plain ΦPM
5, 7, 9 780 970
prestressing steel wire Spiral rib ΦHM
980 1270

785 980
Prestressed deformed
Deformed ΦT 18, 25, 32, 40, 50 930 1080
steel reinforcement
1080 1230

— 1570
5
Plain Φ P
— 1860
Stress-relieved steel
7 — 1570
wire
Spiral rib ΦH — 1470
9
— 1570

— 1570
1×3
8.6, 10.8, 12.9 — 1860
(three-wire)
— 1960

Steel strand ΦS — 1720

1×7 9.5, 12.7, 15.2, 17.8 — 1860

(seven-wire) — 1960

21.6 — 1860

Note: Where the steel strands with characteristic value of ultimate strength of 1960N/mm2 are used as the post-tensioned
prestressed reinforcement, reliable engineering experiences shall be available.

4.2.3 The design values of tensile strength and compressive strength of steel rebars, namely fy
and f y , shall be selected according to Table 4.2.3-1; the design values of tensile strength and
compressive strength of prestressing tendons, namely fpy and f py , shall be selected according to
Table 4.2.3-2.

If different types of steel reinforcement are used in one member, each type of steel
reinforcement shall adopt its own design strength. The design tensile strength (fyv) of transverse
steel reinforcement shall be selected according to the fy values given in the table; if fyv is used in
calculation of shear, torsion or punching shear capacity, it shall be taken as 360N/mm2 when it is
larger than 360N/mm2.

Table 4.2.3-1 Design Values of Strength of Steel Rebars (N/mm2)

Grade Design value of tensile strength fy Design value of compressive strength f y

HPB300 270 270

HRB335, HRBF335 300 300

HRB400, HRBF400, RRB400 360 360

HRB500, HRBF500 435 410

Table 4.2.3-2 Design Values of Strength of Prestressing Tendons (N/mm2)

21
 Characteristic value of ultimate Design value of tensile Design value of compressive
Type
strength fptk strength fpy 
strength f py

800 510
Medium-strength prestressing
970 650 410
steel wire
1270 810

1470 1040

Stress-relieved steel wire 1570 1110 410

1860 1320

1570 1110

1720 1220
Steel strand 390
1860 1320

1960 1390

980 650
Prestressed deformed steel
1080 770 410
reinforcement
1230 900

Note: Where the characteristic value of strength of prestressing tendon does not conform to Table 4.2.3-2, the design value of
strength shall be converted by corresponding ratio.

4.2.4 The total percentage elongation δgt of steel rebars and prestressing tendons at the maximum
force shall not be less than the values specified in Table 4.2.4.
Table 4.2.4 Limit Values for Total Percentage Elongation of Steel Rebars and Prestressing Tendons at the Maximum
Force

Steel rebar
Type Prestressing tendon
HPB300 HRB335, HRBF335, HRB400, HRBF400, HRB500, HRBF500 RRB400

δgt (%) 10.0 7.5 5.0 3.5

4.2.5 The elastic modulus Es of steel rebar and prestressing tendon shall be selected according to
Table 4.2.5.
Table 4.2.5 Elastic Modulus of Steel Reinforcement (×105N/mm2)

Grade or type Elastic modulus Es

HPB300 steel reinforcement 2.10

HRB335, HRB400 and HRB500 steel reinforcement

HRBF335, HRBF400 and HRBF500 steel reinforcement
2.00
RRB400 steel reinforcement
Prestressed deformed steel reinforcement

Stress-relieved steel wire and medium-strength prestressing steel wire 2.05

Steel strand 1.95

Note: If necessary, the measured elastic modulus may be adopted.

The limit values f y and f py for the fatigue stress amplitude of steel rebars and prestressing
f f
4.2.6
tendons shall be taken respectively from Table 4.2.6-1 and Table 4.2.6-2 by linear interpolation based
on the fatigue stress ratio  s and  p of steel reinforcement.
f f

Table 4.2.6-1 Limit Values for Fatigue Stress Amplitude of Steel Rebars (N/mm2)
22
 Limit value for fatigue stress amplitude f yf
Fatigue stress ratio  sf
HRB335 HRB400

0 175 175

0.1 162 162

0.2 154 156

0.3 144 149

0.4 131 137

0.5 115 123

0.6 97 106

0.7 77 85

0.8 54 60

0.9 28 31

Note: If the longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement are connected by flash butt welding, the limit value for the fatigue stress amplitude
of steel reinforcement at the joint shall be the listed values in the table multiplied by 0.8.

Table 4.2.6-2 Limit Values for Fatigue Stress Amplitude of Prestressing Tendons (N/mm2)

Fatigue stress ratio  pf Steel strand fptk=1570 Stress-relieved steel wire fptk=1570

0.7 144 240

0.8 118 168

0.9 70 88

Note: 1 If  pf is no less than 0.9, there is no need of fatigue analysis for prestressing tendons;

2 If sufficient basis is available, the limit value of fatigue stress amplitude specified in the table may be adjusted appropriately.

The fatigue stress ratio  s of steel rebars shall be calculated as the following expression:
f

 s,f min
 sf  (4.2.6-1)
 s,f max

Where  s,f min ,  s,f max ——The minimum and maximum stresses of steel reinforcement at the same
layer in fatigue analysis of members.

The fatigue stress ratio  p of prestressing tendon shall be calculated as the following expression:
f

 p,f min
 pf  (4.2.6-2)
 p,f max

Where  p,f min ,  p,f max——The minimum and maximum stresses of prestressing tendons at the same
layer in fatigue analysis of members.

4.2.7 Steel reinforcement in the members may be arranged in the form of bundled bars. The number
of bundled steel reinforcement in diameter of 28mm or less shall not exceed 3; the numer of bundled
steel reinforcement in diameter of 32mm should be 2; and the steel reinforcement in diameter of
36mm or above shall not be bundled. The bundled bars shall be treated as a single rebar, and the
diameter of this rebar shall be determined in accordance with the principle of equivalent
cross-sectional area.
23
4.2.8 When the steel reinforcement are replaced, in addition to the load-carrying capacity of
members, the total percentage elongation at maximum force, the analysis of crack width and the
seismic provisions as stated in the design, the requirements on minimum ratio of reinforcement,
spacing of bars, cover thickness, anchorage length of steel reinforcement, joint area percentage and
lap splice length shall also be met.

4.2.9 If prefabricated steel welded-meshes or cages are used as reinforcement in members, they
shall comply with the relevant current national standards.

4.2.10 The nominal cross-sectional area and theoretical self-weight of steel rebars and prestressing
tendons with various nominal diameters shall be taken as the values specified in Appendix A of this
code.

24
 5 Structural Analysis

5.1 General

5.1.1 Concrete structures shall be analyzed on the basis of overall action effects. If necessary, more
detailed analysis shall be carried out for the parts undergoing special load conditions.

5.1.2 If there are different load conditions during different stages of construction and service period,
the structural analysis shall be carried out individually, and the most unfavorable action combination
shall be identified.

Corresponding structural analysis shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the
current relevant national standards if structures are susceptible to accidental actions such as fire,
hurricane, explosion and impact.

5.1.3 The model of the structural analysis shall meet the following requirements:

1 The calculation diagrams, geometric dimensions, calculation parameters, boundary conditions,

properties of structural materials and detailing measures adopted for the structural analysis shall agree
with the actual work conditions;

2 The possible actions and action combinations, initial stress and deformation conditions of the
structure shall agree with the actual state of the structure;

3 All kinds of approximate assumption and simplification adopted in the structural analysis
shall be relied on theoretical and experimental evidence or be verified through engineering practice;
the accuracy of calculated results shall meet the requirements of the engineering design.

5.1.4 The structural analysis shall meet the following requirements:

1 Satisfy mechanical equilibrium conditions;

2 Satisfy deformation compatibility conditions in varying degrees, including constraint

conditions of joints and boundary;

3 Adopt reasonable material constitutive relation or the load-deformation relation of member

unit.

5.1.5 In structural analysis, the following analysis methods shall be selected according to structural
types, material properties and structural characteristics:

1 Elastic analysis method;

2 Analysis method on plastic redistribution of internal forces;

3 Elastic-plastic analysis method;

4 Plastic limit analysis method;

5 Test analysis method.

5.1.6 The calculation software adopted for the structural analysis shall be assessed and verified, and
the technical conditions shall meet the requirements of this code and current relevant national
standards.
25
 The analysis results shall be judged and checked, and shall be applied to the engineering design
only after the confirmation of the reasonableness and effectiveness.

5.2 Analysis Model

5.2.1 Global structural analysis should be carried out for concrete structures based on three
dimension system. The influence of deformations resulted from flexure, axial force, shear and torsion
on internal forces should be considered.

The simplification analysis shall meet the following requirements:

1 The three dimensional structure with regular shape may be analyzed respectively by
resolving into plane structures along axes of columns or walls. But the interactive effect between the
plane structures shall be considered;

2 If the axial, shear and torsional deformations of members have little influence on the analysis
of internal force, they may be excluded from consideration.

5.2.2 The calculation diagrams of the concrete structure should be determined according to the
following methods:

1 The axes of one-dimension members such as beams, columns and rods should be the lines
connecting section geometric centers ; the middle axle surfaces of two-dimension members such as
walls and slabs should take the planes or curved surfaces composed by section center lines;

2 The connecting parts of beam-column joints, columns and foundation in cast-in-situ structure
and assembled monolithic structure may be deemed as rigid connection; the ends of the non-integral
cast secondary beam and the ends of slab may be approximately deemed as hinged connection;

3 The effective span or height of beams and columns may be determined according to the clear
distance or central distance of supporting ends and shall be corrected according to the connecting
rigidity of joints or the position of reactions;

4 If the rigidity of connection parts is far larger than the rigidity of members, the parts may be
treated as rigid zone in the computational model.

5.2.3 In global structural analysis, for cast-in-situ structures or assembled monolithic structures, the
floor slabs in their own planes may be assumed as infinitely rigid. If the floor slabs have relatively
large openings or may have obvious in-plane local deformation, the influence of in-plane rigidity shall
be considered in structural analysis.

5.2.4 For cast-in-situ floor slabs and assembled monolithic floor slabs, the effect of slab acting as
the flange of beam on the rigidity and load-carrying capacity of the beam should be considered. The
effective flange width bf in compression zone of the beam may use the minimum value listed in
Table 5.2.4 regarding the corresponding situation; it also may be approximately considered by
adopting the beam rigidity enhancement coefficient method, and the rigidity enhancement coefficient
shall be determined according to the relative scale of the effective flange dimension and section
dimensions of the beam.
Table 5.2.4 Effective Flange Width bf of Flexural Member in Compression Zone

26
 T-shaped or I-shaped section Inverted L-shaped section
Situation
Ribbed beam (slab) Isolated beam Ribbed beam (slab)

1 Considered as effective span l0 l0/3 l0/3 l0/6

2 Considered as beam (rib) clear distance sn b+sn — b+sn/2

hf /h0≥0.1 — b+12 hf —

Considered as flange
3 0.1> hf /h0≥0.05 b+12 hf b+6 hf b+5 hf
height hf
hf /h0<0.05 b+12 hf b b+5 hf

Note: 1 b in this Table refers to web thickness of the beam;

2 If transverse ribs are arranged in the span of ribbed beams and their spacing is less than the spacing of longitudinal ribs, the
requirements of Situation 3 in this Table may not be considered;

3 For haunched T-shaped, I-shaped and inverted L-shaped sections, if the haunched height hh in the compression zone is not
less than hf and the haunched length bh is not larger than 3hh, the effective width of flange may be increased by 2bh (for

T-shaped or I-shaped sections) and bh (for inverted L-shaped sections) respectively as per the requirements of Situation 3 in
this Table.

4 If the flange of the isolated beam in the compression zone under loads may have cracks along the direction of longitudinal
ribs by calculation, the effective width of the flange shall be the web width b.

5.2.5 If the interaction between the base and structure has an evident impact on the internal force
and deformation of the structure, the effect of the interaction should be considered in structural
analysis.

5.3 Elastic Analysis

5.3.1 The elastic analysis method may be used in the analysis of action effects in serviceability limit
states and ultimate limit states.

5.3.2 The rigidity of structural members may be determined according to the following principles:

1 The elastic modulus of concrete may be adopted according to Table 4.1.5;

2 The moment of inertia of section may be calculated according to the gross section of
uniformly graded concrete;

3 For haunched members, the influence of section change shall be considered in the structural
analysis;

4 The section rigidity of members under various load conditions should be reduced
appropriately considering the effects of crack and creep of concrete.

5.3.3 The elastic analysis on concrete structures should use structural mechanics or elastic
mechanics analysis methods. The proper simplification analysis method may be adopted for the
structure with regular shape according to the type and characteristic of the action.

5.3.4 If the second order effect of the structure may evidently increase the action effect, the adverse
impact of the second order effect shall be considered in structural analysis.

The second order effect of gravity of the concrete structure may be calculated with the finite
element analysis method or the simplified method specified in Appendix B of this code. The impact of

27
concrete cracking on the rigidity of concrete members should be considered if the finite element
analysis method is adopted.

5.3.5 If the displacement of boundary supports has a relatively significant impact on internal forces
and deformations of two-way slabs, the influence of vertical deformation and torsion of boundary
supports should be considered in the analysis.

5.4 Plastic Internal Forces Redistribution Analysis

5.4.1 The plastic internal forces redistribution analysis method may be adopted for concrete
continuous beams and continuous one-way slabs.

For cast-in-situ beams and two-way slabs in frame and frame-shear wall structures under
gravity load, after obtaining the internal forces by elastic analysis, the bending moment amplitude at
supports or joints may be modulated appropriately and the moment amplitude at mid-span may be
determined correspondingly.

5.4.2 For structures and members designed by plastic internal forces redistribution analysis method,
the reinforcement shall be selected in accordance with the requirements in Article 4.2.4 of this code.
The requirements of serviceability limit states shall be satisfied, and the effective detailing measures
shall be taken.

The plastic internal forces redistribution analysis method shall not be employed for members
directly carrying dynamic loads, structures not allowed to have cracks, or structures located in Class
IIIa and IIIb environmental conditions.

5.4.3 The modulated amplitude of hogging moment at edges of supports or joints of reinforced
concrete beams should not be larger than 25%; the relative depth of compression zone for beam ends
shall not exceed 0.35 and should not be less than 0.10 after moment modulation.

The modulated amplitude of hogging moment for reinforced concrete slabs should not be larger
than 20%.

The modulated amplitude of bending moment for prestressed concrete beams shall meet the
requirements in Article 10.1.8 of this code.

5.4.4 For concrete structural members under compatibility torsion, the influence of redistribution of
internal forces should be considered for the torsional moment of supporting beams restricted by
adjacent members.

For supporting beams considering the internal forces redistribution, the load-carrying capacity
shall be calculated as bending, shear and torsional members.

Note: Other design methods may be adopted if reliable evidence is available.

5.5 Elastic-Plastic Analysis

5.5.1 For important structures or structures under complex actions, the elastic-plastic analysis
method should be adopted to analyze the structures globally or locally. The elastic-plastic analysis
should be complied with the following principles:

1 The shape, dimension, boundary conditions, material properties and reinforcement of the
28
structure shall be pre-established;

2 The material properties should use mean values and should be determined by tests or by the
requirements in Appendix C of this code;

3 The adverse impact of the geometrical nonlinearity of the structure should be considered;

4 If the analysis result is used for the load capacity design, the resistance of the structure should
be adjusted properly by considering the uncertainty coefficient of the resistance model.

5.5.2 The static or dynamic analysis methods may be adopted for the elastic-plastic analysis of
concrete structures according to actual conditions. The computational model of basic members of
structures should be determined according to the following principles:

1 Bar members such as beams, columns and rods may be reduced to one-dimension elements.
Fiber bundle model or plastic hinge model should be adopted in analysis;

2 Walls and slabs may be reduced to two-dimension elements. Membrane elements, plane
elements or shell elements should be adopted in analysis.

3 If more detailed analysis is required for complex concrete structures, mass concrete structures,
joints or certain local regions in structures, three-dimensional block elements should be adopted.

5.5.3 The load-deformation constitutive relations of members, sections or every type of computational
elements should agree with actual conditions. The bond-slip constitutive relations between steel
reinforcement and concrete should be taken into account if detailed analysis is carried out for some
members or joints with large deformation.

The constitutive relation of steel reinforcement and concrete materials should be determined by
test analysis. Alternatively it may be adopted as specified in Appendix C of this code.

5.6 Plastic Limit Analysis

5.6.1 For concrete structures not carrying multi-cycled load actions, provided that the plastic
deformation capacity is adequate, the load-carrying capacity may be calculated by adopting the
analysis method of plastic limit theory, and meanwhile the requirements of serviceability shall be
satisfied.

5.6.2 The plastic limit analysis calculation of the overall structure shall meet the following
requirements:

1 For conditions that the structural failure mechanism may be predicted, the ultimate
load-carrying capacity of the structure may be analyzed by adopting the plastic limit theory according
to the assumed plastic yielding mechanism of the structure;

2 For conditions that the structural failure mechanism is difficult to predict, the ultimate
load-carrying capacity of the structure may be determined by adopting static or dynamic
elastic-plastic analysis methods;

3 For structural members or parts directly carrying accidental actions, the influence of the
dynamic effect shall be considered according to dynamic characteristics of the accidental action.

5.6.3 For two-way rectangular slabs supported at edges carrying uniformly distributed loads, the

29
analysis and design of ultimate limit states may be carried out by adopting such plastic limit analysis
methods as yield line or strip methods.

5.7 Indirect Action Effect Analysis

5.7.1 If the action effect induced by such indirect actions of concrete as contraction, creeping and
temperature variation in the structure may impair the safety or normal use of the structure, the indirect
action effect analysis should be carried out, and corresponding detailing measures and construction
measures shall be taken.

5.7.2 For the indirect action effect analysis on the concrete structure, the elastic-plastic analysis
method given in Section 5.5 of this code may be adopted; alternatively the approximate analysis may
be carried out according to the elastic method by considering the impact of cracks and creeping on the
member rigidity.

30
 6 Ultimate Limit States

6.1 General

6.1.1 This chapter is applicable to the ultimate limit states design of reinforced concrete members
and prestressed concrete members; the design of plain concrete structural members shall comply with
the requirements in Appendix D of this code.

The load-carrying capacity calculation of deep flexural members, brackets and composite members
shall meet the relevant requirements in Chapter 9 of this code.

6.1.2 For two-dimensional or three-dimensional non-linear structural members, after obtaining the
design stress distribution of the members via elastic or elastic-plastic analysis method, the amount of
reinforcement may be determined by projecting the resultant force of the principal design tensile stress
into the direction of reinforcement, while the steel reinforcement arrangement shall be determined by
the distribution zones of principal tensile stresses, and shall meet the corresponding detailing
requirements; where the concrete is in compression state, the combined action of the compressive
steel reinforcement and the concrete shall be considered, and the allocation of compressive steel
reinforcement shall meet the detailing requirements.

6.1.3 When analyzing the ultimate limit states of concrete structural members in the expression of
stress, the following requirements shall be met:

1 The strength of concrete and reinforcement shall be determined according to the design
condition and the design objectives of member performance.

2 The stress in reinforcement shall not exceed the strength of reinforcement.

3 The stress in concrete shall not exceed the strength of concrete; strength and checking of the
concrete under multi-axial stress condition may be carried out according to the relevant requirements
specified in Appendix C.4 of this code.

6.2 Load-carrying Capacity of Normal Sections

(I) General Requirements for Calculation of Normal Section Load-carrying Capacity

6.2.1 The load-carrying capacity of normal section shall be calculated according to the following
fundamental assumptions:

1 Strained section remains plane.

2 Tensile strength of concrete is disregarded.

3 The relation curve of compressive stress and strain in concrete shall be taken according to the
following provisions:

If εc≤ε0

   n 
 c  f c 1  1  c   (6.2.1-1)
   0  
31
 If ε0<εc≤εcu

σc=fc (6.2.1-2)

1
n  2 ( f cu, k  50) (6.2.1-3)
60
5
ε0=0.002+0.5(fcu, k－50)×10
－
(6.2.1-4)
5
εcu=0.0033－(fcu, k－50)×10
－
(6.2.1-5)

Where σc——The compressive stress in concrete when compressive strain in concrete is εc;

fc——The design value of concrete axial compressive strength, the value is recommended
in Table 4.1.4-1 of this code;

ε0——The compressive strain in concrete when compressive stress in concrete reaches fc; if
ε0<0.002, taking ε0 as 0.002;

εcu——The ultimate compressive strain of concrete normal section; if under non-uniform

compression and the value calculated via eq. (6.2.1-5) is greater than 0.0033, taking
εcu as 0.0033; if under axial compression, taking εcu as ε0;

fcu,k——The characteristic value of cube concrete compressive strength, determined

according to Article 4.1.1 of this code;

n——A coefficient, taken as 2.0 if the calculated value of n is greater than 2.0.

4 The ultimate tensile strain of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement is to be taken as 0.01.

5 The stress of the longitudinal steel reinforcement is calculated as the product of the strain
and the elastic modulus of steel reinforcement, but the value shall be in accordance with the following
requirements:

 f y   si  f y (6.2.1-6)

 p0i  f py   pi  f py (6.2.1-7)

Where σsi, σpi——The stresses in longitudinal steel rebars, prestressing tendons at the ith layer
respectively, the tensile stress is taken as positive value and the compressive stress
is taken as negative value;

σp0i——The stress of prestressing tendons, where the normal stress of concrete at the
centroid of the ith layer longitudinal prestressing tendons equals to zero,
calculated according to Expression (10.1.6-3) or Expression (10.1.6-6);

fy, fpy——The design tensile strength of steel rebars and prestressing tendons respectively,
adopted according to Table 4.2.3-1 and Table 4.2.3-2;

f y, f py ——The design compressive strength of steel rebars and prestressing tendons
respectively, adopted according to Table 4.2.3-1 and Table 4.2.3-2.

6.2.2 In determining the position of neutral axis, for two-way flexural members, the action planes of
internal and external bending moments shall coincide mutually; for two-way eccentrically loaded
32
members, the application point of axial force, the point of the resultant force of concrete and
compressive steel reinforcement, and the point of the resultant force of tension reinforcement shall be
in a straight line. If the above-mentioned conditions are not met, the influence of torsion shall also be
considered.

6.2.3 For eccentric compression member with symmetrical section in the action plane of bending
M1
moment, when the ratio M2
of end bending moments about the same principal axis is not greater than

0.9, and the axial compression ratio is not greater than 0.9, the influence of additional bending
moment induced by the compression on the deflected member may not be considered if the
slenderness ratio of the member meet the requirements of Expression (6.2.3); otherwise the influence
shall be considered with respect to the two principal axes of section respectively, according to Article
6.2.4 of this code.

lc / i  34  12( M 1 / M 2 ) (6.2.3)

Where M1, M2——The design bending moments about the same principal axis at two ends of the
eccentric compression member, determined by the elastic structural analysis
considering the effect of sway; the end having a relatively larger absolute value
is to be M2, otherwise it is to be M1; if the member is in single curvature,
M1/M2 shall be taken as positive value, otherwise the negative value shall be
used;

lc——The effective length of members, it may be approximately deemed as the

distance between the upper and lower supporting points in the direction of
corresponding principal axis of the eccentric compression members;

i——The sectional radius of gyration in the eccentric direction.

6.2.4 Except for bent structural columns, the design bending moment at the critical section of
eccentric compression members, after considering the second order effect of axial compression force
on the members, shall be calculated according to the following expression:

M  Cm ns M 2 (6.2.4-1)

M1
Cm  0.7  0.3 (6.2.4-2)
M2

2
1  lc 
 ns  1    c (6.2.4-3)
1300( M 2 / N  ea ) / h0  h 

0 .5 f c A
c  (6.2.4-4)
N
If Cmηns<1.0, taking Cmηn as 1.0; For shear wall and core-tube wall, Cmηns may be taken as 1.0.

Where Cm——The adjustment coefficient of eccentricity on the end section of members; if Cm<0.7,
taking Cm as 0.7;
33
 ηns——The amplified coefficient of bending moment;

N——The design value of axial compressive force corresponding to design value of

bending moment M2;

ea——The additional eccentricity, determined according to Article 6.2.5 of this code;

ζc——The section curvature correction coefficient, if the calculated value >1.0, ζc=1.0
shall be taken;

h——The depth of section; for annular section, the external diameter shall be adopted; for
circular section, the diameter shall be adopted;

h0——The effective depth of section; for annular section, taking h0=r2+rs; for circular
section, taking h0=r+rs; where r, r2 and rs shall be determined according to Article
E.0.3 and Article E.0.4 of this code;

A——The cross-sectional area of members.

6.2.5 In the calculation of normal section load-carrying capacity of eccentric compression members,
the additional eccentricity ea of axial compressive force in the direction of eccentricity shall be taken
into account, which shall be the greater value between 20mm and 1/30 of the maximum sectional
dimension in the direction of eccentricity.

6.2.6 The stress diagram of the concrete in compression zone may be simplified as an equivalent
rectangular stress diagram, in the calculation of normal section load-carrying capacity of flexural
members and the eccentrically loaded members.

The depth x of compression zone in the rectangular stress diagram may be calculated by
multiplying a coefficient β1 to the depth of neutral axis which is determined by an assumption that
strained section remains plane. If the concrete strength grade does not exceed C50, β1 shall be 0.80; if
the concrete strength grade is C80, β1 shall be 0.74. If the concrete strength grade is between C50 and
C80, its value shall be determined by linear interpolation method.

The stress value of the rectangular stress diagram may be calculated by multiplying a coefficient
α1 to the design axial compressive strength fc of concrete. If the concrete strength grade is not greater
than C50, α1 shall be 1.0; if the concrete strength grade is C80, α1 shall be 0.94. If the concrete
strength grade is between C50 and C80, α1 shall be determined by linear interpolation method.

6.2.7 If the yielding of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement and the failure of concrete in
compression zone occurr simultaneously, the relative depth of limiting compression zone (ξb) shall be
calculated according to the following expression:

1 Reinforced concrete members

For steel rebars with yield point

1
b  (6.2.7-1)
fy
1
Es cu

For steel rebars without yield point

34
 1
b  (6.2.7-2)
0.002 fy
1 
 cu Es cu

2 Prestressed concrete members

1
b  (6.2.7-3)
0.002 f py   p 0
1 
 cu Es cu

Where ξb——Relative depth of limiting compression zone, calculated as xb/h0;

xb——The depth of limiting compression zone;

h0——The effective depth of section: the distance from the point of the resultant force of
longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement to the extreme compression fiber of section;

Es——The elastic modulus of steel reinforcement, adopted according to Table 4.2.5 of this
code;

σp0——The stress in prestressing tendons if normal stress of concrete at the point for
resultant force of longitudinal prestressing tendons in tension zone is equal to zero,
calculated according to Expression (10.1.6-3) or Expression (10.1.6-6);

εcu——The ultimate compressive strain of the concrete under non-uniform compression,

calculated according to Expression (6.2.1-5) of this code;

β1——The coefficient, calculated according to Article 6.2.6 of this code.

Note: If the steel reinforcement, with different types or different prestressed values, is allocated in the sectional tension zone, the
relative depth of limiting compression zone of flexural members shall be calculated respectively; whichever value is smaller
shall be taken.

6.2.8 The stress of longitudinal steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with the following
requirements:

1 The stress of longitudinal steel reinforcement should be calculated according to the following
expressions:

Steel rebars

 1h0i 
 si  Es cu   1 (6.2.8-1)
 x 

Prestressing tendons

 1h0i 
 pi  Es cu   1   p 0 i (6.2.8-2)
 x 

2 The stress of longitudinal steel reinforcement may also be calculated according to the
following approximate expressions:
35
 Steel rebars

fy  x 
 si    1  (6.2.8-3)
 b  1  h0i 

Prestressing tendons

f py   p 0i  x 
 pi    1    p 0i (6.2.8-4)
 b  1  h0i 

3 The stress of longitudinal steel reinforcement calculated according to Expression (6.2.8-1)~

Expression (6.2.8-4), shall meet the relevant requirements specified in Clause 5 of Article 6.2.1 of this
code.

Where h0i——The distance from the centroid of the ith layer longitudinal steel reinforcement
section to the extreme fiber in compression zone of the section;

x——The depth of the equivalent rectangular stress diagram in concrete compression zone;

σsi, σpi——The stresses of the longitudinal steel rebars, prestressing tendons at the ith layer
respectively, tensile stress is taken as positive value and compressive stress is taken
as negative value;

σp0i——The stress of prestressing tendons, calculated according to Expression (10.1.6-3) or

Expression (10.1.6-6) of this code, if the normal stress of concrete at the centroid of
the ith layer longitudinal prestressing tendons section is equal to zero.

6.2.9 The normal section load-carrying capacity of rectangular, I-shaped and T-shaped section
members may be calculated according to the provisions of this section; the normal section
load-carrying capacity of arbitrary, circular and annular sectional members may be calculated
according to the requirements specified in Appendix E of this code.

(II) Calculation of Normal Section Flexural Capacity

6.2.10 For flexural members having rectangular section or inverted T-shaped section with the flange
in tension, the normal section flexural capacity shall meet the following requirement (Figure 6.2.10):

 x
M  1 f c bx  h0    f yAs ( h0  as )  ( p0
  f py ) Ap ( h0  a p ) (6.2.10-1)
 2

Depth of concrete compression zone shall be determined according to the following expression:

1 f cbx  f y As  f yAs  f py Ap  ( p0
  f py ) Ap (6.2.10-2)

36
 Figure 6.2.10 Calculation of Normal Section Flexural Capacity for Flexural Members with Rectangular Section

Depth of concrete compression zone shall meet the following conditions:

x   b h0 (6.2.10-3)

x  2a (6.2.10-4)

Where M——The design value of bending moment;

α1——A coefficient, calculated according to the provisions in Article 6.2.6 of this code;

fc——The design value of axial compressive strength of concrete, adopted according to

Table 4.1.4-1 of this code;

As , As ——The cross-sectional areas of longitudinal steel rebars in tension and compression
zones, respectively;

Ap , Ap ——The cross-sectional areas of longitudinal prestressing tendons in tension and

compression zones, respectively;

 p0
 ——The stress of prestressing tendons, at which the normal stress of concrete is equal to
zero at the point of resultant force of longitudinal prestressing tendons in
compression zone;

b——The width of rectangular section, or the web width of inverted T-shaped section;

h0——The effective depth of section;

a s , a p ——The distances from the point of resultant force of longitudinal steel rebars or
prestressing tendons in compression zone to the extreme fiber in compression zone of
the section;

a'——The distance from the point of resultant force of all longitudinal steel reinforcement
in compression zone to the extreme fiber in compression zone of the section; if
longitudinal prestressing tendons are not arranged in compression zone or the stress
of longitudinal prestressing tendons ( p0
  f py ) in compression zone is tensile, a' in
Expression (6.2.10-4) shall be replaced by a s .

6.2.11 For T-shaped or I-shaped section flexural members with flange situated at compression zone
(Figure 6.2.10), the calculation of the normal section flexural capacity shall meet the following
37
requirements:

( a ) x  hf ( b ) x  hf

Figure 6.2.11 Location of the Depth of Compression Zone of I-shaped Section Flexural Members

1 If meeting the following conditions, the normal section flexural capacity shall be calculated
as rectangular section with width of bf ;

f y As  f py Ap  1 f cbfhf  f yAs  ( p0
  f py ) Ap (6.2.11-1)

2 If not meeting the conditions in Expression (6.2.11-1), it shall be calculated according to the
following expression:

 x  h 
M  1 f c bx  h0    1 f c (bf  b)hf  h0  f   f yAs ( h0  as )  ( p0
  f py ) Ap ( h0  a p )
 2  2
(6.2.11-2)

The depth of concrete compression zone shall be determined according to the following
expression:

1 f c [bx  (bf  b)hf ]  f y As  f yAs  f py Ap  ( p 0  f py ) Ap (6.2.11-3)

Where hf ——The depth of flange in compression zone of T-shaped, I-shaped section;

bf ——The effective width of flange in compression zone of T-shaped or I-shaped section,
shall be determined according to the provisions specified in Article 6.2.12 of this
code.

In the calculation of T-shaped, I-shaped section flexural members using the above expression, the
depth of concrete compression zone shall also conform to the requirements specified in Expression
(6.2.10-3) and Expression (6.2.10-4) of this code.

6.2.12 For flexural members with T-shaped, I-shaped or inverted L-shaped section, the effective
width bf of flange situated in compression zone may taken as the minimum value calculated
according to the conditions listed in Table 5.2.4 of this code.

6.2.13 The calculation of the normal section flexural capacity of flexural members shall meet the
requirements specified in Expression (6.2.10-3) of this code. If the cross-sectional area of the
longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement, distributed according to detailing requirements or the
requirements of serviceability limit states, is larger than the reinforcement area required by flexural
38
capacity, the depth of concrete compression zone x shall be calculated according to Expression
(6.2.10-2) or Expression (6.2.11-3) of this code, only the cross-sectional area of the longitudinal
tensile steel reinforcement required by conditions of flexural capacity may be counted.

6.2.14 Where the longitudinal ordinary compressive steel reinforcement are counted in calculation,
the conditions in Expression (6.2.10-4) of this code shall be met; if the conditions are not met, the
normal section flexural capacity shall meet the following requirements:

M  f py Ap (h  ap  as )  f y As (h  as  as )  ( p0
  f py ) Ap (ap  as ) (6.2.14)

Where as, ap——The distances from longitudinal steel rebars, prestressing tendons in the tension
zone respectively to the extreme fiber in tension zone.

(III) Calculation of Normal Section Compression Capacity

6.2.15 For reinforced concrete axial compression members, if the stirrups are provided according to
the provisions in Section 9.3 of this code, the normal section compression capacity shall meet the
following requirements (Figure 6.2.15):

N  0.9 ( f c A  f y As ) (6.2.15)

Where N——The design value of axial compressive force;

φ——The stability coefficient of reinforced concrete members, adopted according to Table

6.2.15;

fc——The design value of concrete axial compressive strength, adopted according to Table
4.1.4-1 of this code;

A——The cross-sectional area of members;

As ——The cross-sectional area of all longitudinal steel rebars.

If the reinforcement ratio of longitudinal steel rebars is greater than 3%, A in Expression (6.2.15)
shall be replaced by ( A  As).
Table 6.2.15 Stability Coefficient of Reinforced Concrete Axial Compression Member

l0/b ≤8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

l0/d ≤7 8.5 10.5 12 14 15.5 17 19 21 22.5 24

l0/i ≤28 35 42 48 55 62 69 76 83 90 97

φ 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.92 0.87 0.81 0.75 0.70 0.65 0.60 0.56

l0/b 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50

l0/d 26 28 29.5 31 33 34.5 36.5 38 40 41.5 43

l0/i 104 111 118 125 132 139 146 153 160 167 174

φ 0.52 0.48 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.32 0.29 0.26 0.23 0.21 0.19

Note: 1 l0 denotes the effective length of the member, that of reinforced concrete column may be determined according to Article
6.2.20 of this code;

2 b denotes the short-side size of rectangular section, d denotes the diameter of circular section, i denotes the minimum radius

39
 of gyration of section.

Figure 6.2.15 Reinforced Concrete Axial Compression Member Provided with Stirrups

6.2.16 For reinforced concrete axial compression members, if the spiral or welded ring indirect steel
reinforcement are provided according to the provisions in Article 9.3.2 of this code, the normal
section compression capacity shall meet the following requirements (Figure 6.2.16):

N  0.9( f c Acor  f yAs  2f yv Ass0 ) (6.2.16-1)

d cor Ass1
Ass0  (6.2.16-2)
s

Figure 6.2.16 Reinforced Concrete Axial Compression Member provided with Spiral Indirect Steel Reinforcement

Where fyv——The design value of tensile strength of indirect steel reinforcement, adopted according
to Article 4.2.3 of this code;

Acor——The area of core section of member, the cross-sectional area of concrete within
inner surface range of indirect steel reinforcement shall be taken;

Ass0——The transformed cross-sectional area of spiral or welded ring indirect steel

reinforcement;

dcor——The diameter of core section of the member, the distance between inner surface
range of indirect steel reinforcement shall be taken;

Ass1——The cross-sectional area of single spiral or welded ring single indirect steel
reinforcement;

s——The spacing of indirect steel reinforcement along the direction of member axis;

α——The reduction coefficient for the limitation of indirect steel reinforcement to the

40
 concrete: a=1.0 if the concrete strength grade does not exceed C50; if the concrete
strength grade is C80, a=0.85; the values between C50 and C80 shall be determined
according to linear interpolation method.

Note: 1 The design value of member compression capacity calculated according to Expression (6.2.16-1) shall not be greater than
1.5 times of that calculated according to Expression (6.2.15) of this code;

2 If any one of the following cases is encountered, the influence of the indirect steel reinforcement shall not be counted.
Instead, the calculation shall be carried out according to Article 6.2.15 of this code:

1) If l0/d>12;

2) If the compression capacity calculated according to Expression (6.2.16-1) is less than that calculated according to
Expression (6.2.15) of this code;

3) If the transformed cross-sectional area Ass0 of the indirect steel reinforcement is less than 25% of the gross
cross-sectional area of the longitudinal steel rebars.

6.2.17 The normal section compression capacity of the rectangular section eccentric compression
members shall meet the following requirements (Figure 6.2.17):

Figure 6.2.17 Calculation of Normal Section Compression Capacity of Eccentric Compression Member with
Rectangular Section
1—centroid axis of section

N  1 f cbx  f yAs   s As  ( p0
  f py ) Ap   p Ap (6.2.17-1)

 x
Ne  1 f c bx  h0    f yAs ( h0  as )  ( p0
  f py ) Ap ( h0  a p ) (6.2.17-2)
 2

h
e  ei  a (6.2.17-3)
2

ei  e0  ea (6.2.17-4)

Where e——The distance from the acting point of axial compressive force to the resultant force of
longitudinal steel rebars or prestressed tension tendons.

σs, σp——The stresses of longitudinal steel rebars and prestressing tendons respectively at the

41
 tension side or smaller compression side;

ei——The initial eccentricity;

a——The distance from the resultant force of longitudinal tensile steel rebars and
prestressed tensile tendons to the near edge of section;

e0——The eccentricity of axial compressive force with respect to centroid of section e0=M/N,
if the second order effect needs to be considered, M denotes the design value of
bending moment determined according to Article 5.3.4, Article 6.2.4 of this code;

ea——The additional eccentricity, determined according to Article 6.2.5 of this code.

If the calculation is carried out in accordance with the above provisions, the following
requirements shall also be met:

1 σs and σp may be determined according to the following cases:

1) If ξ≤ξb,, which denotes the large eccentric compression members, taking σs=fy and σp=fpy,
where ξ is the relative depth of compression zone, ξ=x/h0;

2) If ξ>ξb, which denotes the small eccentric compression members, σs and σp shall be
calculated according to Article 6.2.8 of this code.

2 If longitudinal compressive steel rebars are counted in calculation, the depth of compression
zone shall meet the conditions in Expression (6.2.10-4) of this code; if the conditions are not met, the
normal section compression capacity may be calculated according to Article 6.2.14 of this code, and
M in Expression (6.2.14) of this code shall be replaced by Nes , where es denotes the distance from
the acting point of axial compressive force to the resultant force of longitudinal steel rebars in the
compression zone; the initial eccentricity shall be determined according to the requirement of
Expression (6.2.17-4).

3 For small eccentric compression members with rectangular section and unsymmetric
reinforcement, if N>fcbh, the analysis shall also be carried out according to the following expressions:

 h
Ne  f cbh  h0    f yAs (h0  as )  ( p0  f py ) Ap (h0  ap ) (6.2.17-5)
 2

h
e   a  (e0  ea ) (6.2.17-6)
2

Where e'——The distance from the acting point of axial compressive force to the point of resultant
force for the longitudinal steel rebars and prestressing tendons in compression zone;

h0 ——The distance from the acting point of the resultant force of the longitudinal
compressive steel reinforcement to the far-side of section.

4 For small eccentric compression members with rectangular section and symmetric
reinforcement ( As  As ) , the cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel rebars may also be calculated
according to the following approximate expression:

42
 Ne   (1  0.5 )1 f cbh02
As  (6.2.17-7)
f y(h0  as )

Where the relative depth of compression zone ξ may be calculated according to the following
expression:

N   b1 f cbh0
  b (6.2.17-8)
Ne  0.431 f cbh02
 1 f cbh0
( 1   b )(h0  as )

6.2.18 For eccentric compression members with I-shaped section, the effective width bf of flange
situated in compression zone shall be determined in accordance with Article 6.2.12 of this code; the
normal section compression capacity shall meet the following requirements:

1 If the depth of compression zone x≤ bf , the calculation shall be carried out according to a
rectangular section with the width as the effective compression flange width bf .

2 If the depth of compression zone x> bf (Figure 6.2.18), the following requirements shall be
met:

Figure 6.2.18 Calculation of Normal Section Compression Capacity for Eccentric Compression Member with
I-shaped Section
1—centroid axis of section

N  1 f c [bx  (bf  b)hf ]  f yAs   s As  ( p0

  f py ) Ap   p Ap (6.2.18-1)

  x  h  
Ne  1 f c bx h0    (b'f  b)h 'f  h0  f   f yAs( h0  as )  ( p0
  f py ) Ap ( h0  a p )
  2   2  
(6.2.18-2)

The reinforcement stresses σs and σp in the expression, and whether the action of longitudinal
compressive steel rebars are to be considered, shall all be determined according to the relevant
requirements in Article 6.2.17 of this code.

3 If x>(h－hf), the effect of compression portion in smaller side of flange shall be considered in
the calculation of normal section compression capacity; meanwhile, the effective width bf for the
compression portion shall be determined in accordance with Article 6.2.12 of this code.
43
 4 For small eccentric compression member with unsymmetric reinforcement, if N> fcA, the
checking shall be carried out according to the following expressions:

  h  h   h 
Ne  f c bh h0    (b f  b)h f  h0  f   (bf  b)hf  f  a 
  2  2 2 

 f y As (h0  as )  ( p0  f py ) Ap (h0  ap ) (6.2.18-3)

e  y  a  (e0  ea ) (6.2.18-4)

Where y'——The distance from centroid of section to compression side closer to the axial
compressive force; if the section is symmetrical, taking y'=h/2.

Note: For the T-shaped section with flange at the side closer to the axial compressive force, bf may be taken as b; for the inverted
T-shaped section with flange at the side farther to the axial compressive force, bf may be taken as b.

6.2.19 For eccentric compression members (Figure 6.2.19) of reinforced concrete with rectangular,
T-shaped or I-shaped section and longitudinal steel rebars provided uniformly along the web of
section, the normal section compression capacity should meet the following requirements:

N  1 f c [bh0  (bf  b)hf ]  f yAs   s As  N sw (6.2.19-1)

  h  
Ne  1 f c  (1  0.5 )bh02  (bf  b)hf  h0  f   f yAs ( h0  as )  M sw (6.2.19-2)
  2 

   1 
N sw  1   f yw Asw (6.2.19-3)
 0.51 

    1  
2

M sw  0.5     f yw Asw hsw (6.2.19-4)

  1  

Where Asw——The cross-sectional area of all longitudinal steel rebars provided uniformly along
the web of section;

fyw——The design strength of longitudinal steel rebars provided uniformly along the web
of section, adopted according to Table 4.2.3-1 of this code;

Nsw——The axial compressive force undertaken by longitudinal steel rebars provided

uniformly along the web of section, if ξ>β1, ξ=β1 is taken in the calculation;

Msw——The moment for the internal force of longitudinal steel rebars uniformly provided
along the section web about the centroid of As, if ξ>β1, ξ=β1;

ω——The ratio of the range of uniformly provided longitudinal steel rebars (hsw) to the
effective depth of section (h0), where hsw should be calculated as h0－ as .

44
 Figure6.2.19 I-shaped Section with Steel Reinforcement Uniformly provided along Web of Section

The stress σs in steel rebar As at the tension side or smaller compression side, whether
considering the effects of the compressive steel rebars and the compression portion of flange at
smaller compression side or not in the calculation, shall be determined according to the relevant
requirements in Article 6.2.17 and Article 6.2.18 of this code.

Note: This Article is applicable to the condition that the number of longitudinal steel rebars provided uniformly along the web of
section at each side is not less than 4.

6.2.20 The effective length l0 of axial compression and eccentric compression column may be
determined according to the following requirements:

1 The effective length l0 of the bent columns of single-storey building with rigid roof, open-air
crane columns and trestle columns may be taken according to Table 6.2.20-1.

Table 6.2.20-1 Effective length of Bent Column of Single-storey Building with Rigid Roof, Open-air Crane
Column and Trestle Column

l0

Type of column Vertical bent direction

Bent direction
With column bracing Without column bracing

Single-span 1.5H 1.0H 1.2H

Building column with crane
Double-span and multi-span 1.25H 1.0H 1.2H

Upper column 2.0Hu 1.25Hu 1.5Hu

Building column without crane
Lower column 1.0 Hl 0.8 Hl 1.0Hl

Open-air crane column and trestle column 2.0 Hl 1.0 Hl —

Note: 1 H in this Table denotes the overall height of the column calculated from the foundation top; Hl denotes the height of the
lower part of the column calculated from foundation top to either the bottom of percast crane girder, or the top of
cast-in-situ crane girder; Hu denotes the height of the upper part of the column calculated from the bottom of precast crane
girder or the top of cast-in-situ crane girder;

2 For building column with crane, if the crane load is neglected in the calculation, the effective length may be adopted
according to the effective length of building column without crane, whereas the effective length of upper column may still
be adopted according to the building column with crane;

3 For the upper column of building column with crane, its effective length in the direction of bent is only applicable to the
condition of Hu/Hl≥0.3; if Hu/Hl<0.3, the effective length of 2.5Hu should be adopted.

45
 2 In general multistoried buildings whose frame structure is made-up with rigid-connected
beams and columns, the effective length of column in each storey may be adopted according to
provisions of Table 6.2.20-2.

Table 6.2.20-2 Effective Length of Column in Each Storey of Frame Structure

Type of floor Category of column l0

Ground floor column 1.0H

Cast-in-situ floor
Columns in rest stories 1.25H

Ground floor column 1.25H

Precast floor
Columns in rest stories 1.5H

Note: H in this Table denotes the height of ground floor column from foundation top to the first floor top.

6.2.21 For reinforced concrete members with doubly symmetric section under two-way eccentric
compression (Figure 6.2.21), the compression capacity of normal section may be calculated by either
of the following two methods:

1 The calculation is carried out according to the method specified in Appendix E of this code;
where Mx and My in Expression (E.0.1-7) and Expression (E.0.1-8) of Appendix E shall respectively
be replaced by Neix and Neiy, where the initial eccentricity shall be calculated according to the
following expressions:

Figure 6.2.21 Section of Two-way Eccentric Compression Member

1—acting point of axial compressive force; 2—compression zone.

eix=e0x+eax (6.2.21-1)

eiy=e0p+eay (6.2.21-2)

Where e0x, e0y——The eccentricities of axial compressive force with respect to the y axis and x
axis respectively crossing the centroid of section, namely M0x/N, M0y/N;

M0x, M0y——The design bending moments of axial compressive force in x axis and y axis
direction respectively, determined according to Article 5.3.4 and Article 6.2.4 of
this code;

eax, eay——The additional eccentricities in x axis and y axis direction respectively,

determined according to Article 6.2.5 of this code;
46
 2 The calculation shall be carried out according to the following approximate expression:

1
N (6.2.21-3)
1 1 1
 
N ux N uy N u0

Where Nu0——The design sectional axial compression capacity of members;

Nux——The design eccentric compression capacity of members calculated according to all

longitudinal steel rebars, after the axial compressive force acting on x axis and
considering the corresponding calculated eccentricity eix;

Nuy——The design eccentric compression capacity of members calculated according to all

longitudinal steel rebars, after the axial compressive force acting on y axis and
considering the corresponding calculated eccentricity eiy .

The design sectional axial compression capacity of members (Nu0) may be calculated according to
Expression (6.2.15) of this code, whereas the equal-sign shall be used instead, and N shall be replaced
by Nu0, and the stability coefficient φ and coefficient 0.9 shall be neglected

The design eccentric compression capacity of members (Nux) may be calculated according to the
following conditions:

1) If the longitudinal steel rebars are provided along the two opposite sides of the section,
Nux may be calculated according to Article 6.2.17 or Article 6.2.18 of this code, whereas
the equal-sign shall be used and N shall be replaced by Nux.

2) If the longitudinal steel rebars are provided uniformly along the web of section, Nux may
be calculated according to Article 6.2.19 of this code, whereas the equal-sign shall be
used and N shall be replaced by Nux.

The design eccentric compression capacity of members (Nuy) may be calculated adopting the
same method as that of Nux.

(IV) Calculation of Normal Section Tension Capacity

6.2.22 The normal section tension capacity of axial tension member shall meet the following
requirements:

N≤fyAs+fpyAp (6.2.22)

Where N——The design value of axial tensile force;

As, Ap——The gross cross-sectional areas of longitudinal steel rebars and prestressing tendons.

6.2.23 The normal section tension capacity of eccentric tension members with rectangular section
shall meet the following requirements:

1 Small eccentric tension member

If the axial tensile force acts between the points of resultant forces of As and Ap as well as that of
As and Ap (Figure 6.2.23a):

47
 Ne  f y As (h0  as )  f py Ap (h0  ap ) (6.2.23-1)

Ne  f y As (h0  as )  f py Ap (h0  ap ) (6.2.23-2)

2 Large eccentric tension member

If the axial tensile force does not act between the points of resultant forces of As and Ap and that
of As and Ap (Figure 6.2.23b):

N  f y As  f py Ap  f yAs  ( p0
  f py ) Ap  1 f c bx (6.2.23-3)

 x
Ne  1 f c bx  h0    f yAs ( h0  as )  ( p0
  f py ) Ap ( h0  a p ) (6.2.23-4)
 2

In this case, the depth of concrete compression zone shall meet the requirements in Expression
(6.2.10-3) of this code. If the longitudinal compressive steel rebar is counted in the calculation, the
condition in Expression (6.2.10-4) of this code shall also be met; otherwise, it may be calculated
according to Expression (6.2.23-2).

3 For eccentric tension members with rectangular section reinforced symmetrically, its tension
capacity may be calculated according to Expression (6.2.23-2) regardless of the large or small
eccentric tension condition.

(a) Small eccentric tension member

(b) Large eccentric tension member

Figure 6.2.23 Calculation on Normal Section Tension Capacity of Eccentric Tension Member with Rectangular
Section
48
6.2.24 For eccentric tension members with rectangular, T-shaped or I-shaped section having
longitudinal steel rebars allocated uniformly along the web of section, the normal section tension
capacity shall meet the requirement in Expression (6.2.25-1), where the design value of normal
section flexural capacity (Mu) may be calculated according to Expression (6.2.19-1) and Expression
(6.2.19-2), whereas the equal-sign shall be used instead and N, Nei shall be replaced by 0 and Mu
respectively.

6.2.25 For two-way eccentric tension members with rectangular section reinforced symmetrically, the
tension capacity of normal section shall meet the following requirements:

1
N (6.2.25-1)
1 e
 0
N u0 M u

Where Nu0——The design axial tension capacity of members;

e0——The distance from the acting point of axial tensile force to the centroid of section;

Mu——The design value of normal section flexural capacity calculated according to the
bending moment plane crossing the acting point of axial tensile force.

The design axial tension capacity of members (Nu0) is calculated according to Expression
(6.2.22), whereas the equal-sign shall be used and N shall be replaced by Nu0. The design value Mu in
Expression (6.2.25-1) may be calculated according to the relevant requirements in Section 6.2 (I) of
this code.

Alternatively, e0/Mu in Expression (6.2.25-1) may be calculated according to the following

expression:

2 2
e0  e   e0 y 
  0x     (6.2.25-2)
Mu M 
 M ux   uy 

Where e0x, e0y——The eccentricities of axial tensile force to the y axis, x axis of section centroid
respectively;

Mux, Muy——The design values of normal section flexural capacity in x axis, y axis direction
respectively, calculated according to the provisions in Section 6.2 (II) of this
code.

6.3 Load-carryring Capacity of Inclined Sections

6.3.1 The shear section of flexural members with rectangular, T-shaped or I-shaped section shall
meet the following conditions:

If hw/b≤4

V≤0.25βcfcbh0 (6.3.1-1)

If hw/b≥6

V≤0.2βcfcbh0 (6.3.1-2)

49
 If 4<hw/b<6, V is determined according to the linear interpolation method.

Where V——The design value of maximum shear force on the inclined section of the member;

βc——The influence coefficient of concrete strength: if the concrete strength grade does not
exceed C50, takes βc as 1.0; if the concrete strength grade is C80, takes βc as 0.8; the
value between C50 and C80 shall be determined according to the linear interpolation
method;

b——The width of rectangular section, the web width of T-shaped section or I-shaped
section;

h0——The effective depth of section;

hw——The web depth of section: for rectangular section, taken as the effective depth; for
T-shaped section, calculated as the value of effective depth minus flange depth; for
I-shaped section, taken as the net depth of web.
Note: 1 For simply-supported flexural members with T-shaped or I-shaped section, where practical experience is available, the
coefficient in Expression (6.3.1-1) may be changed to 0.3;

2 For members with inclined tension side, where practical experience is available, the controlling criteria for shear section
may be appropriately reduced.

6.3.2 In the calculation of shear capacity of inclined section, the calculation section for design shear
force shall be determined according to the following requirements:

1 Section at the edge of support (section 1-1 in Figure 6.3.2 a, b);

2 Section at the bent-initiation point of bent-up steel reinforcement in tension zone(section 2-2
and 3-3 in Figure 6.3.2a);

(a) Bent-up steel reinforcement (b) Stirrup

Figure 6.3.2 Calculation Section of Design Shear Force for Inclined Section Shear Capacity
1-1: inclined section at the edge of support; 2-2, 3-3: inclined section at the bent-initiation point of bent-up steel reinforcement in the
tension zone; 4-4: inclined section at which the cross-sectional area or spacing of stirrup is changed

3 The section at which the cross-sectional area or spacing of stirrup is changed (section 4-4 in
Figure 6.3.2b);

4 The section at which the sectional dimension is changed.

Note: 1 The section where the depth of beam begins to change, concentrated load is present, or section in other unfavorable situation
shall also be considered for the flexural members with inclined tension side.

2 The spacing of stirrups and distance from the bent initiation point of front row (with respect to support) to the bent end point
of next row, shall meet the structural requirements in Article 9.2.8 and Article 9.2.9 of this code.

50
6.3.3 For ordinary slab-type flexural members without providing stirrups and bent-up steel
reinforcement, the shear capacity of inclined section shall meet the following requirements:

V  0.7  h f t bh0 (6.3.3-1)

1/ 4
 800 
 h    (6.3.3-2)
 h0 

Where βh——The influence coefficient of section depth: if h0<800mm, taking h0=800mm; if

h0>2000mm, taking h0=2000mm.

6.3.4 If only stirrups are provided, the inclined section shear capacity of flexural members with
rectangular T-shaped or I-shaped section shall meet the following requirements:

V  Vcs  Vp (6.3.4-1)

Asv
Vcs   cv f t bh0  f yv h0 (6.3.4-2)
s

Vp  0.05 N p0 (6.3.4-3)

Where Vcs——The design value of shear capacity for concrete and stirrup on the inclined section
of members;

Vp——The design value of shear capacity increased by jacking force;

αcv——The shear capacity coefficient of concrete on inclined section; for general flexural
members, taking αcv=0.7; for an isolated beam subjected to concentrated load
(including the condition that the member is under a variety of loads and the shear
force at the support section or joint edge induced by the concentrated load accounts
1.75
for over 75% of the total shear force), taking αcv= ; λ denotes the shear span
 1
ratio and may be calculated as a/h0; if λ<1.5, taking λ=1.5; if λ>3, taking λ=3; the
distance from the acting point of the concentrated load to the support section or
joint edge shall be used for a;

Asv——The gross cross-sectional area of each stirrup leg allocated in the same section,
namely nAsvl, where n denotes the number of stirrup legs in the same section, Asvl
denotes the cross-sectional area of single-leg stirrup;

s——The stirrup spacing along the length direction of member;

fyv——The design value of tensile strength of stirrup, adopted according to Article 4.2.3 of
this code;

Np0——The jacking force where the concrete normal prestress on calculated section equals
to zero, calculated according to Article 10.1.13 of this code; if Np0>0.3fcA0, taking
Np0=0.3fcA0, where A0 denotes the transformed cross-sectional area of members.

Note: 1 For the condition that the sectional bending moment induced by jacking force Np0 is in the same direction as the external
51
 bending moment, as well as for the prestressed concrete continuous beam and the prestressed concrete simply supported beam
where crack is allowed, Vp shall be 0;

2 For pretension prestressed concrete members, in the calculation of jacking force Np0, the influence of transfer length of
prestressing tendon shall be taken into consideration in accordance with Article 7.1.9 of this code.

6.3.5 If stirrups and bent-up steel reinforcement are provided, the inclined section shear capacity of
flexural members with rectangular, T-shaped or I-shaped section shall meet the following
requirements:

V  Vcs  Vp  0.8 f yv Asb sin  s  0.8 f py Apb sin  p (6.3.5)

Where V——The design shear force at the bent-initiation point of steel reinforcement, adopted
according to Article 6.3.6 of this code;

Vp——The design shear capacity of member increased by jacking force, calculated

according to Expression (6.3.4-3) of this code; in the calculation of Np0, the effect of
prestressed bent-up reinforcement may not be considered;

Asb, Apb——The cross-sectional areas of bent-up steel rebars and bent-up prestressing tendons in
the same plane respectively;

as, ap——The angles between the tangent line of bent-up steel rebars and bent-up prestressing
tendons respectively on the inclined section and the longitudinal axis of member.

6.3.6 In the calculation of bent-up steel reinforcement, the design value of section shear force may
be adopted according to the following requirements (Figure 6.3.2a):

1 In the calculation of the bent-up steel reinforcement in the first row (with respect to support),
the shear force at the edge of support shall be taken;

2 In the calculation of bent-up steel reinforcement in each subsequent row, the shear force at
the bent-initiation point of bent-up steel reinforcement in one row ahead (with respect to support)
shall be taken.

6.3.7 For ordinary flexural members with rectangular, T-shaped or I-shaped section, if complying
with the following requirements, the shear capacity of inclined section may not be calculated, and the
detailing requirements of stirrup shall meet those specified in Article 9.2.9 of this code.

V  cv f t bh0  0.05N p0 (6.3.7)

Where αcv——Shear capacity coefficient of sectional concrete, adopted according to Article 6.3.4
of this code.

6.3.8 For flexural members of rectangular, T-shaped or I-shaped section with inclined tension side,
the inclined section shear capacity shall meet the following requirements (Figure 6.3.8):

52
Figure 6.3.8 Calculation of the Shear Capacity on Inclined Section of Flexural Members with Inclined Tension Side

V  Vcs  Vsp  0.8 f y Asb sin  s (6.3.8-1)

M  0.8( f yv Asv zsv  f y Asb zsb )

Vsp  tan  (6.3.8-2)
z  c tan 

Where M——The design value of bending moment at the end of compression zone on inclined
section of members;

Vcs——The design shear capacity of concrete and stirrup on inclined sections of members,
calculated according to Expression (6.3.4-2) of this code, where the effective depth
of vertical section h0 is adopted at the starting point of tension zone on inclined
section;

Vsp——The projection in vertical direction for the design value of resultant force of
longitudinal non-prestressing and prestressing tensile steel reinforcement with
inclined tension side in member section: for reinforced concrete flexural members,
its value shall not be greater than fyAssinβ; for prestressed concrete flexural members,
its value shall not be greater than (fpyAp+ fyAs)sinβ, and shall not be less than
σpeApsinβ;

zsv——The distance from the resultant force of stirrups to the resultant force in compression
zone of inclined section;

zsb——The distance from the resultant force of bent-up steel rebars in the same bent-up
plane to the resultant force in compression zone of inclined section;

z——The distance from the horizontal component of the resultant force of longitudinal
tensile steel reinforcement at the starting point of tension zone in inclined section to
the resultant force in compression zone of inclined section, approximately calculated
as 0.9h0;

β——The inclination of the inclined longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement at the starting
point of tension zone of inclined section;

c——The horizontal projection length of inclined section, approximately taken as h0.

53
 Note: At the position where the section depth of beam begins to change, the shear capacity of inclined section shall be calculated
according to the relevant expression for beam with constant section depth and with varying section depth. Stirrups and bent-up
steel reinforcement shall be provided according to the unfavorable case.

6.3.9 The flexural capacity of the inclined section of flexural members shall meet the following
requirements (Figure 6.3.9):

M  ( f y As  f py Ap ) z  f y Asb zsb  f py Apb z pb  f yv Asv zsv (6.3.9-1)

Where, the horizontal projection length of inclined section shall be determined according to the
following condition:

V  f y Asb sin  s  f py Apb sin  p  f yv Asv (6.3.9-2)

Where V——The design shear force at the end of compression zone of inclined section;

z——The distance from the resultant force of longitudinal tensile steel rebars and
prestressing tendons to the resultant force in compression zone, approximately
calculated as 0.9h0;

zsb, zpb——The distances from the resultant force of bent-up steel rebars, bent-up prestressing
tendons in the same bent-up plane to the resultant force in compression zone of
inclined section, respectively;

zsv——The distance from the resultant force of stirrups in the same inclined section to the
resultant force in compression zone of inclined section.

In the calculation of flexural capacity for the inclined section at anchorage zone of pretension
prestressed concrete member, fpy in the expression shall be determined according to the following
requirements: the design tensile strength of longitudinal prestressed reinforcement in the anchorage
zone shall be zero at the starting point of anchorage, and shall be fpy at the end point of anchorage. The
value between the two points shall be determined by linear interpolation. The anchorage length of
longitudinal prestressed reinforcement la shall be determined according to Article 8.3.1 of this code.

Figure 6.3.9 Calculation of Flexural Capacity on Inclined Section of Flexural Members

6.3.10 If the longitudinal steel reinforcement and stirrups are provided for flexural members and

54
comply with the detailing requirements in Article 8.3.1~Article 8.3.5, Article 9.2.2~Article 9.2.4,
Article 9.2.7~Article 9.2.9 of this code, the flexural capacity on inclined section of members may not
be calculated.

6.3.11 For reinforced concrete eccentric compression members and eccentric tension members with
rectangular, T-shaped or I-shaped sections, the shear section shall meet the requirements of Article
6.3.1 of this code.

6.3.12 For reinforced concrete eccentric compression members with rectangular, T-shaped or
I-shaped sections, the inclined section shear capacity shall meet the following requirements:

1.75 A
V f t bh0  f yv sv h0  0.07 N (6.3.12)
 1 s
Where λ——The ratio of shear span to effective depth of the calculated eccentric compression
member section, calculated as M / (Vh0);

N——The design value of axial compressive force corresponding to the design shear force
V; if N>0.3fcA, taking N=0.3fcA, where A denotes the cross-sectional area of member.

The shear span ratio of calculated section λ shall be adopted according to the following
requirements:

1 For columns in frame structures, if the contraflexure points of columns are within the range
of storey height, Hn/ (2h0) may be taken. If λ<1, taking λ=1; if λ>3, taking λ=3. Here, M denotes the
design bending moment in calculated section, corresponding to design shear force V, Hn is the net
height of column.

2 For other eccentric compression members, If carrying uniformly distributed load, taking
λ=1.5; if carrying the concentrated load as specified in Article 6.3.4 of this code, taking λ=a/h0 , and if
λ<1.5, taking λ=1.5; if λ>3, taking λ=3.

6.3.13 For reinforced concrete eccentric compression member with rectangular T-shaped or I-shaped
section, if satisfying the following requirements, the shear capacity of inclined section may not be
calculated, and the detailing requirements for stirrups shall comply with Article 9.3.2 of this code.

1.75
V f bh  0.07 N (6.3.13)
 1 t 0
Where: the shear span ratio λ and axial compressive force design value N shall be determined
according to Article 6.3.12 of this code.

6.3.14 For the reinforced concrete eccentric tension member with rectangular, T-shaped or I-shaped
section, the shear capacity of inclined section shall meet the following requirements:

1.75 A
V f t bh0  f yv sv h0  0.2 N (6.3.14)
 1 s
Where N——The design axial tensile force corresponding to the design shear force V;

λ——The shear span ratio of calculated section, determined according to Article 6.3.12 of
this code.

55
 Asv
If the calculated value at the right hand side of Expression (6.3.14) is less than f yv h0 ,
s
Asv A
V= f yv h0 and the value of f yv sv h0 shall not be less than 0.36ftbh0.
s s
6.3.15 For reinforced concrete flexural members, eccentric compression and tension members with
circular section, the section limit condition and shear capacity on inclined section may be calculated
according to Article 6.3.1~Article 6.3.14 of this code; whereas the section width b and effective depth
of section h0 in the relevant expression shall be substituted by 1.76r and 1.6r respectivey, where, r
denotes the radius of circular section. The calculated cross-sectional area of stirrups shall be used as
the area of the circular stirrup.

6.3.16 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under two-way shear, the
shear section shall comply with the following requirements:

Vx  0.25 c f cbh0 cos  (6.3.16-1)

Vy  0.25 c f cbh0 sin  (6.3.16-2)

Where Vx——The design shear force in x direction, with corresponding effective depth of section
h0 and section width b;

Vy——The design shear force in y direction, with corresponding effective depth of section
b0 and section width h;

θ——The angle between the x axis and the acting direction of the inclined design shear
force V, θ= arctan (Vy/Vx).

6.3.17 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under two-way shear, the
shear capacity on inclined section shall meet the following requirements:

Vux
Vx  (6.3.17-1)
2
 V tan  
1   ux 
 V 
 uy 

Vuy
Vy  (6.3.17-2)
2
 Vuy 
1   
 Vux tan  

The design shear capacity Vux and Vuy of inclined section in x axis and y axis direction shall be
calculated according to the following expressions:

1.75 A
Vux  f t bh0  f yv svx h0  0.07 N (6.3.17-3)
x  1 s

1.75 A
Vuy  f t hb0  f yv svy b0  0.07 N (6.3.17-4)
y  1 s
56
Where λx, λy——The calculated shear span ratios in x axis, y axis direction of frame columns,
respectively, determined according to Article 6.3.12 of this code;

Asvx, Asvy——The sum of cross-sectional areas for legs of stirrups parallel to x axis and y axis in
the same section, respectively;

N——The design axial compressive force corresponding to the inclined design shear
force V; if N>0.3fcA, taking N=0.3fcA, where A denotes the cross-sectional area of
members.

In the calculation of sectional stirrup, Vux/Vuy=1 may be approximately adopted in Expression

(6.3.17-1) and Expression (6.3.17-2).

6.3.18 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under two-way shear, if the
following requirements are met, the shear capacity on inclined section may not be calculated, and the
detailing requirements for stirrups shall meet Article 9.3.2 of this code.

 1.75 
Vx   f t bh0  0.07 N  cos  (6.3.18-1)
 x  1 

 1.75 
Vy   f t hb0  0.07 N  sin  (6.3.18-2)
  1 
 y 

6.3.19 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under two-way shear, if the
angle θ between the acting direction of inclined design shear force V and x axis is in the range of
0°~10° or 80°~90°, the sectional load-carrying capacity may be calculated only according to the
single-direction shear member.

6.3.20 The shear section of reinforced concrete shear wall shalls meet the following condition:

V  0.25 c f cbh0 (6.3.20)

6.3.21 The shear capacity on inclined section of reinforced concrete shear walls under eccentric
compression shall meet the following requirements:

1 A A
V (0.5 f t bh0  0.13 N w )  f yv sh h0 (6.3.21)
  0 .5 A sv

Where N——The design axial compressive force corresponding to the design shear force V; if
N>0.2fcbh, taking N=0.2fcbh;

A——The cross-sectional area of shear wall;

Aw——The sectional web area of T-shaped, I-shaped section shear wall; for shear wall with
rectangular section, A is used instead;

Ash——The gross cross-sectional area of horizontally distributed steel reinforcement

provided in the same section;

sv——The vertical spacing of horizontally distributed steel reinforcement;

57
 λ——The shear span ratio of calculated section, taking λ=M/(Vh0); if λ<1.5, taking λ=1.5;
if λ>2.2, taking λ=2.2, where M denotes the design bending moment corresponding
to the design shear force V; if the distance from the calculated section to the bottom
of the wall is less than h0/2, λ may be calculated according to the bending moment
and the shear force at the height of h0/2 to the bottom of the wall.

If the design shear force V is not greater than the first item at the right hand side of Expression
(6.3.21), the horizontally distributed steel reinforcement may be provided according to the detailing
requirements in Article 9.4.2, Article 9.4.4 and Article 9.4.6 of this code.

6.3.22 The shear capacity on inclined section of reinforced concrete shear wall under eccentric
tension shall meet the following requirement:

1 A A
V (0.5 f t bh0  0.13 N w )  f yv sh h0 (6.3.22)
  0 .5 A sv

Ash
If the calculated value of the right side in the above Expression is less than f yv h0 , V=
sv

Ash
f yv h0 .
sv

Where N——The design axial tensile force corresponding to the design shear force V;

λ——The shear span ratio of calculated section, adopted according to Article 6.3.21 of this
code.

6.3.23 The shear section of lintel at opening of shear wall shall meet the requirements in Article
6.3.1 of this code, the shear capacity of inclined section shall meet the following requirements:

Asv
V  0.7 f t bh0  f yv h0 (6.3.23)
s

6.4 Load-carrying Capacity of Sections Subjected to Torsion

6.4.1 Under the combined action of bending moment, shear force and torsional moment, for
concrete members with rectangular section where hw/b is no larger than 6, or with T-shaped, I-shaped
section and box section where hw/tw is no larger than 6 (Figure 6.4.1), the section shall meet the
following conditions:

If hw/b (or hw/tw) is not larger than 4

V T
  0.25 c f c (6.4.1-1)
bh0 0.8Wt

If hw/b (or hw/tw) is equal to 6

V T
  0.2  c f c (6.4.1-2)
bh0 0.8Wt
58
 If hw/b (or hw/tw) is larger than 4 but not larger than 6, it shall be determined according to linear
interpolation method.

Where T——The design value of torsional moment;

b——The width of rectangular section, the web width of T-shaped or I-shaped section, or
the total side wall thickness 2tw for box section;

Wt——The torsional plastic section modulus of torsional members, calculated according to

Article 6.4.3 of this code;

hw——The web depth of section: for rectangular section, hw takes the effective depth h0; for
T-shaped section, hw takes the effective depth minus the height of flange; for
I-shaped or box section, hw takes the net height of web;

tw——The wall thickness of box section, its value shall not be less than bh/7, where bh
represents the width of box section.

Note: If hw/b is larger than 6 or hw/tw is larger than 6, the requirements on the sectional dimension of torsional members and the
calculation of the load-carrying capacity of torsional section shall meet the specific provisions.

(a) Rectangular section (b) T-shaped section and I-shaped section (c) Box section

Figure 6.4.1 Sections of Torsional Members

1—acting plane of the bending moment and shear force

6.4.2 For members under the combined action of bending moment, shear force and torsional
moment, if the following requirements are met, it may not be required to calculate the shear and
torsion capacity. However, it shall be provided with constructional longitudinal steel reinforcement
and stirrups in accordance with Article 9.2.5, 9.2.9 and 9.2.10 of this code.

V T N p0
  0.7 f t  0.05 (6.4.2-1)
bh0 Wt bh0

V T N
or   0.7 f t  0.07 (6.4.2-2)
bh0 Wt bh0

Where Np0——The jacking force at which the normal prestress of concrete on the calculated
section is equal to zero, calculated according to Article 10.1.13 of this code; if Np0
is larger than 0.3fcA0, takes Np0 as 0.3fcA0, where A0 represents the area of the

59
 transformed section of member;

N——The design value of axial compressive force corresponding to the design values V
and T of shear force and torsional moment, if N is larger than 0.3fcA, takes N as
0.3fcA, where A represents the cross-sectional area of the member.

6.4.3 For torsional members, their torsional plastic section modulus may be calculated according to
the following requirements:

1 Rectangular section

b2
Wt  (3h  b) (6.4.3-1)
6

Where b, h——The sizes of short side and long side of the rectangular section, respectively.

2 T-shaped or I-shaped section

Wt  Wtw  Wtf  Wtf (6.4.3-2)

The torsional plastic section modulus Wtw, Wtf and Wtf for web, compression flange and tension
flange of rectangular section may be calculated according to the following requirements:

1) Web

b2
Wtw  (3h  b) (6.4.3-3)
6

2) Compression flange

hf2
Wtf  (bf  b) (6.4.3-4)
2

3) Tension flange

hf2
Wtf  (bf  b) (6.4.3-5)
2

Where b, h——The web width and the section depth, respectively;

bf , bf——The flange widths of the compression zone and the tension zone of the section,
respectively;

hf , hf——The flange heights of the compression zone and the tension zone of the section,
respectively.

The flange widths adopted in calculation shall also meet the requirements that bf is not larger
than b+6 hf and bf is not larger than b+6hf.

3 Box section
60
 bh2 (b  2t w ) 2
Wt  (3hh  bh )  h [3hw  (bh  2t w )] (6.4.3-6)
6 6

Where bh, hb——The sizes of short side and long side of the box section, respectively.

6.4.4 The torsional load-carrying capacity of the pure torsional members with rectangular section
shall meet the following requirements:

Ast1 Acor
T  0.35 f tWt  1.2  f yv (6.4.4-1)
s

f y Astl s
  (6.4.4-2)
f yv Astl ucor

For the prestressed concrete pure torsional members with eccentricity ep0 no larger than h/6, if
N p0
the calculated ζ value is not less than 1.7, ζ shall take 1.7, and the influence item 0.05 Wt of
A0
jacking force may be added on the right hand side of Expression (6.4.4-1), where the value of Np0
shall meet Article 6.4.2 of this code.

Where ζ——The ratio of the strength between the torsional longitudinal steel rebars and the
reinforcement of stirrups, the ζ value shall not be less than 0.6; if ζ is larger than 1.7, ζ
shall be taken as 1.7;

Astl——The cross-sectional area of all longitudinal steel rebars arranged symmetrically;

Astl——The cross-sectional area of single-leg of stirrups provided along the perimeter of

section;

fyv——The design value of tensile strength of torsional stirrups, adopted according to Article
4.2.3 of this code;

Acor——The core portion area of the section, calculated as bcorhcor, where bcor and hcor
represent the short side and the long side of the section core portion within inner
surface of stirrups;

ucor——The core portion perimeter of the section, calculated as 2(bcor+hcor).

Note: If ζ is less than 1.7 or ep0 is larger than h/6, the influence item of the jacking force shall not be considered, and ζ shall be
calculated according to the reinforced concrete pure torsional members.

6.4.5 For pure torsional members with T-shaped or I-shaped section, the section may be divided into
several rectangular sections, and the calculation of torsional load-carrying capacity shall be carried
out according to Article 6.4.4 of this code. The design value of torsional moment of each rectangular
section may be calculated according to the following requirements:

1 Web

Wtw
Tw  T (6.4.5-1)
Wt
61
 2 Compression flange

Wtf
Tf  T (6.4.5-2)
Wt

3 Tension flange

Wtf
Tf  T (6.4.5-3)
Wt

Where Tw——The design value of torsional moment carried by web;

Tf , Tf——The design values of torsional moment carried by the compression flange and tension
flange respectively.

6.4.6 The torsional load-carrying capacity of the reinforced concrete pure torsional members with
box section shall meet the following requirements:

Astl Acor
T  0.35 h f tWt  1.2  f yv (6.4.6-1)
s

 h  2.5t w / bh (6.4.6-2)

Where αh——The influence coefficient of the wall thickness of box section, if larger than 1.0, αh is
taken as 1.0.

ζ——The same as Article 6.4.4 of this code.

6.4.7 For reinforced concrete members with rectangular section under the combined action of axial
compressive force and torsional moment, the torsional load-carrying capacity shall meet the following
requirements:

 N A A
T   0.35 f t  0.07 Wt  1.2  f yv stl cor (6.4.7)
 A s

Where N——The design value of the axial compressive force corresponding to the design value of
the torsional moment, if N is larger than 0.3fcA, N takes 0.3fcA;

ζ——The same as Article 6.4.4 of this code.

6.4.8 For the shear and torsional members with rectangular section under the combined action of
shear force and torsional moment, the shear and torsional load-carrying capacity shall meet the
following requirements:

1 General shear and torsional members

1) Shear capacity

Asv
V  (1.5   t )(0.7 f t bh0  0.05 N p 0 )  f yv h0 (6.4.8-1)
s

62
 1.5
t  (6.4.8-2)
VWt
1  0.5
Tbh0

Where Asv——The cross-sectional area of stirrups required by the shear capacity;

βt——The reduction coefficient of the torsional load-carrying capacity of concrete for

general shear and torsional members: if less than 0.5, βt is taken as 0.5; if larger
than 1.0, βt is taken as 1.0.

2) Torsional load-carrying capacity

N p0 Astl Acor
T   t (0.35 f t  0.05 )Wt  1.2  f yv (6.4.8-3)
A0 s

Where ζ——The same as Article 6.4.4 of this code.

2 Independent shear and torsional members under the action of concentrated load

1) Shear capacity

 1.75  A
V  (1.5   t ) f t bh0  0.05 N p 0   f yv sv h0 (6.4.8-4)
  1  s

1.5
t  (6.4.8-5)
VWt
1  0.2(  1)
Tbh0

Where λ——The shear span ratio of the calculated section, adopted according to Article 6.3.4 of
this code;

βt——The reduction coefficient of torsional load-carrying capacity of concrete under the

action of concentrated load: if βt is less than 0.5, βt takes 0.5; if βt is larger than 1.0; βt
takes 1.0.

2) Torsional load-carrying capacity

The torsional load-carrying capacity shall also be calculated in accordance with Expression
(6.4.8-3), while βt in the expression shall be calculated in accordance with Expression (6.4.8-5).

6.4.9 The shear and torsional load-carrying capacity of shear and torsional members with T-shaped
or I-shaped section shall meet the following requirements:

1 The shear capacity may be calculated according to Expression (6.4.8-1) and Expression
(6.4.8-2) or Expression (6.4.8-4) and Expression (6.4.8-5) of this code, but T and Wt in the expression
shall be respectively replaced by Tw and Wtw;

2 The torsional load-carrying capacity may be calculated by dividing the section into several
rectangular sections according to Article 6.4.5 of this code. The web section may be calculated
according to Expression (6.4.8-3) and Expression (6.4.8-2) or Expression (6.4.8-3) and Expression
63
(6.4.8-5) of this code, but T and Wt in the expression shall be replaced by Tw and Wtw; the compression
flange and tension flange sections may be calculated according to Article 6.4.4 of this code, but T and
Wt shall also be replaced by Tf and Wtf or Tf and Wtf.

6.4.10 The shear and torsional load-carrying capacity of reinforced concrete shear and torsional
members with box section shall be calculated according to requirements:

1 General shear and torsional members

1) Shear capacity

Asv
V  0.7(1.5   t ) f t bh0  f yv h0 (6.4.10-1)
s
2) Torsional load-carrying capacity

Astl Acor
T  0.35 h  t f tWt  1.2  f yv (6.4.10-2)
s
Where βt——Calculated according to Expression (6.4.8-2) of this code, but Wt in the expression
shall be replaced by ahWt;

αh——Determined according to Article 6.4.6 of this code;

ζ——Determined according to Article 6.4.4 of this code.

2 Independent shear and torsional members under the action of concentrated load

1) Shear capacity

1.75 A
V  (1.5   t ) f t bh0  f yv sv h0 (6.4.10-3)
 1 s
Where βt——Calculated according to Expression (6.4.8-5) of this code, but Wt in the expression
shall be replaced by αhWt.

2) Torsional load-carrying capacity

The torsional load-carrying capacity shall also be calculated according to Expression (6.4.10-2)
of this code, while βt in the expression shall be calculated according to Expression (6.4.8-5) of this
code.

6.4.11 For reinforced concrete members with rectangular section under the combined action of axial
tensile force and torsional moment, the torsional load-carrying capacity shall be calculated according
to requirements:

 N A A
T   0.35 f t  0.2 Wt  1.2  f yv stl cor (6.4.11)
 A s

Where ζ——Determined according to Article 6.4.4 of this code;

Astl——The single-leg cross-sectional area of stirrups that are provided along the perimeter of
section in the torsion calculation;

Astl——The cross-sectional area of all longitudinal steel rebars arranged symmetrical against
64
 torsion;

N——The design value of axial tensile force corresponding to the design value of torsional
moment, if larger than 1.75 ftA, N is taken as ftA;

Acor——The area of the core portion of section, which shall be taken as bcorhcor, where bcor and
hcor represent the short side and long side of the core portion of section that are within
the inner surface of stirrups;

ucor——The perimeter of the core portion of section, taken as 2(bcor+hcor).

6.4.12 For shear and torsional flexural members with rectangular, T-shaped, I-shaped and box
section under the combined action of bending moment, shear force and torsional moment, the
calculation of load-carrying capacity may be carried out according to the following requirements:

1 If V is not larger than 0.35ftbh0 or V is not larger than 0.875ftbh0/(λ+1), only the normal
section flexural capacity of flexural member and the torsion load-carrying capacity of the pure
torsional members may be calculated;

2 If T is not larger than 0.175ftWt or T is not larger than 0.175ahftWt, only the normal section
flexural capacity of flexural member and the shear capacity of inclined section may be checked and
calculated.

6.4.13 For flexural shear torsional members with rectangular, T-shaped, I-shaped and box section,
the cross-sectional area of their longitudinal steel reinforcement shall be determined by calculation
according to the normal section flexural capacity of flexural member and torsional load-carrying
capacity of shear and torsional member; and the longitudinal steel reinforcement shall be provided at
the corresponding position. The cross-sectional area of stirrups shall be determined by calculation
according to the shear capacity and torsional load-carrying capacity of the shear and torsional member;
and the stirrups shall be provided at the corresponding position.

6.4.14 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under the combined action of
axial compressive force, bending moment, shear force and torsional moment, the shear and torsional
load-carrying capacity may be calculated according to the following requirements:

1 Shear capacity

 1.75  A
V  (1.5   t ) f t bh0  0.07 N   f yv sv h0 (6.4.14-1)
  1  s

2 Torsional load-carrying capacity

 N A A
T   t  0.35 f t  0.07 Wt  1.2  f yv stl cor (6.4.14-2)
 A s

Where λ——The shear span ratio of the calculated section, determined according to Article 6.3.12 of
this code;

βt——Calculated according to Article 6.4.8 of this code and complied with the relevant
requirements;

ζ——Adopted according to Article 6.4.4 of this code.

65
6.4.15 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under the combined action of
axial compressive force, bending moment, shear force and torsional moment, if T is not larger than
(0.175ft+0.035N/A)Wt, only the normal section load-carrying capacity and the inclined section shear
capacity of the eccentric compression members may be calculated.

6.4.16 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under the combined action of
axial compressive force, bending moment, shear force and torsional moment, the cross-sectional area
of the longitudinal steel rebars shall be calculated according to the normal section load-carrying
capacity of eccentric compression members and the torsional load-carrying capacity of shear and
torsional members, and the longitudinal steel rebars shall be provided at the corresponding position;
the cross-sectional area of stirrups shall be calculated according to the shear capacity and the torsional
load-carrying capacity of the shear and torsional members, and the stirrups shall be provided at the
corresponding position.

6.4.17 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under the combined action of
axial tensile force, bending moment, shear force and torsional moment, the shear and torsional
load-carrying capacity shall meet the following requirements:

1 Shear capacity

 1.75  A
V  (1.5   t ) f t bh0  0.2 N   f yv sv h0 (6.4.17-1)
  1  s

2 Torsional load-carrying capacity

 N A A
T   t  0.35 f t  0.2 Wt  1.2  f yv stl cor (6.4.17-2)
 A s

Asv
If the calculated value on the right hand side of Expression (6.4.17-1) is less than f yv h0 , it
s
Asv
takes f yv h0 ; if calculated value on the right hand side of Expression (6.4.17-2) is less than
s
Astl Acor A A
1.2  f yv , it takes 1.2  f yv stl cor .
s s
Where λ——The shear span ratio of the calculated section, determined according to Article 6.3.12
of this code;

Asv——The cross-sectional area of stirrups required by the shear capacity;

N——The design values of the axial tensile force corresponding to the design values V and
T of the shear force and torsional moment;

βt——Calculated according to Article 6.4.8 of this code and complied with the relevant
requirements;

ζ——Adopted according to Article 6.4.4 of this code.

6.4.18 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under the combined action of
axial tensile force, bending moment, shear force and torsional moment, if T≤(0.175ft－0.1N/A)Wt, only
the normal section load-carrying capacity and the inclined section shear capacity of eccentric tension
66
members may be calculated.

6.4.19 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under the combined action of
axial tensile force, bending moment, shear force and torsional moment, the cross-sectional area of the
longitudinal steel rebars shall be calculated according to the normal section load-carrying capacity of
eccentric tension members and the torsional load-carrying capacity of shear and torsional members,
and the longitudinal steel rebars shall be provided at the corresponding position; the cross-sectional
area of stirrups shall be calculated according to the shear capacity and the torsional load-carrying
capacity of the shear and torsional members, and the stirrups shall be provided at the corresponding
position.

6.5 Punching Shear Capacity

6.5.1 Under the action of localised force or concentrated reaction, the punching shear capacity of
slabs without stirrups or bent-up steel reinforcement shall meet the following requirement (Figure
6.5.1):

Fl  (0.7  h f t  0.25 pc, m )um h0 (6.5.1-1)

The coefficient η in Expression (6.5.1-1) shall be calculated in accordance with the following
two expressions and the smaller value shall be adopted:

1.2
1  0.4  (6.5.1-2)
s

 s h0
2  0.5  (6.5.1-3)
4u m

(a) Under the action of localised force (b) Under the action of concentrated reaction

Figure 6.5.1 Calculation for the Punching Shear Capacity of Slabs

1—inclined section of punching failure cone; 2—critical section;
3—perimeter of critical section; 4—base line of punching failure cone

Where Fl——The design value of localised force or concentrated reaction; for slab-column joints,
Fl is determend by the difference of compressions in the column between two
67
 storeies, from which the design loads carried by the slab within the range of
punching failure cone at the top of the column shall also be deducted; if unbalanced
moment is present, Fl shall be determined as specified in Article 6.5.6 of this code;

βh——The influence coefficient of section depth: if h is not larger than 800mm, taking βh as
1.0; if h is not less than 2000mm, taking βh as 0.9; if h is between 800mm and
2000mm, βh is calculated by linear interpolation;

σpc, m——The self-weighted mean value of effective compressive prestress of concrete in

terms of length in two directions on the perimeter of critical section; its value should
be controlled within the range of 1.0N/mm2~3.5N/mm2;

um——The perimeter of the critical section, taking the most unfavorable perimeter of the
vertical section of slab located at a distance of h0/2 from the periphery of acting area
of localised force or the concentrated reaction;

h0——The effective depth of section, taking the mean value of the effective section depths
in two reinforced directions;

η1——The influence coefficient of the acting area shape of localised forces or concentrated
reaction;

η2——The influence coefficient of the ratio between the critical sectional perimeter and the
effective depth of slab section;

βs——The aspect ratio (long side to short side) of rectangular acting area of localised force
or concentrated reaction, and βs should not be larger than 4; if βs is less than 2, βs
takes 2; for the round punching surface, βs takes 2;

αs——The influence coefficient of column position: for central columns, taking αs as 40;
for side columns, taking αs as 30; for corner columns, taking αs as 20.

6.5.2 If a slab has an opening and the distance from the opening to the edge of the acting area of
localised force or concentrated reaction is not larger than 6h0, the perimeter um of critial section used
in the calculation of punching shear capacity shall be deducted by the length between the two tangent
lines drawn from the center of the acting area to the outline of the opening (Figure 6.5.2).

Figure 6.5.2 Perimeter of the critical Section Adjacent to Opening

1—acting area of localised force or concentrated reaction; 2—perimeter of critical section;
3—opening; 4—length that shall be excluded
Note: If l1 in this figure is larger than l2, l2 shall be replaced by l1l2 .

6.5.3 Under the action of localised force or concentrated reaction, if the punching shear capacity of
a slab does not meet the requirement of Article 6.5.1 of this code and meanwhile the thickness of the
68
slab is subjected to restriction, stirrups or bent-up steel reinforcement may be arranged and shall be in
accordance with the detailing requirement specified in Article 9.1.11 of this code. In this case, the
punching shear section and the punching shear capacity shall meet the following requirements:

1 Punching shear section

Fl  1.2 f tum h0 (6.5.3-1)

2 Punching shear capacity reinforced by stirrups and bent-up steel reinforcement

Fl  (0.5 f t  0.25 pc, m )um h0  0.8 f yv Asvu  0.8 f y Asbu sin  (6.5.3-2)

Where fyv——The design tensile strength of stirrups, adopted according to the requirements of
Article 4.2.3 of this code;

Asvu——The gross cross-sectional area of stirrups intersecting the inclined section of punching
failure cone at 45°;

Asbu——The gross cross-sectional area of bent-up steel reinforcement intersecting the inclined
section of punching failure cone at 45°;

α——The angle between the bent-up steel reinforcement and the bottom surface of slab.

Note: If possible, other measures against punching shear such as shear studs, shaped steel shear cages may be employed.

6.5.4 For sections beyond the reinforced punching failure cone, the calculation of punching shear
capacity shall also be carried out according to Article 6.5.1 of this code. In this case, um shall take the
most unfavorable perimeter which is located at the position of 0.5h0 beyond the punching failure cone
having punching shear reinforcement.

6.5.5 For the stepped foundation of column with rectangular section, the punching shear capacity at
the junction of column and foundation as well as the changing steps shall meet the following
requirements (Figure 6.5.5):

Fl  0.7  h f t bm h0 (6.5.5-1)

Fl  ps A (6.5.5-2)

bt  bb
bm  (6.5.5-3)
2
Where h0——The effective depth of section at the junction of the column and foundation or the
step changing of foundation, taking the mean value of the effective section depths in
two reinforced directions;

ps——The design value of base reaction on the bottom foundation (foundation self-weight
and its upper soil self-weight may be excluded) calculated according to the basic
combination of load effects and considering the significance coefficient of structure,
if foundation is eccentrically pressed, ps may be taken as the design value of the
maximal base reaction;

69
 A——The area of polygon used for considering punching shear load (the shaded area
ABCDEF shown in Figure 6.5.5);

bt——The upper side length of inclined section on the most unfavorable side of the punching
failure cone: if calculating the punching shear capacity at the junction of column and
foundation, bt is to be the column width; if calculating the punching shear capacity at
the step changing part of foundation, bt is to be the upper step width;

bb——The lower side length of inclined section on the most unfavorable side of the punching
failure cone at the junction of column and foundation or the step changing part of
foundation, bt = bt+2h0.

(a) The junction of column and foundation (b) The step changing part of foundation

Figure 6.5.5 Location of Sections for the Calculation of Punching Shear Capacity of Stepped Foundation
1—inclined section on the most unfavorable side of the punching failure cone; 2—bottom surface line of the punching failure cone

6.5.6 Under the action of vertical load and horizontal load, in consideration that the shear stress on
the calculation section of slab-column joints transfers unbalanced bending moment, the design value
Fl of the concentrated reaction shall be replaced by the design value of equivalent concentrated
reaction Fl, eq, and Fl, eq may be calculated according to the requirements of Appendix F in this code.

6.6 Local bearing Capacity

6.6.1 For concrete structural members provided with indirect steel reinforcement, the sectional
dimension of the local bearing zone shall meet the following requirements:

Fl  1.35 c  l f c Al n (6.6.1-1)

Ab
l  (6.6.1-2)
Al

Where Fl——The design value of the local load or local pressure acting on the local bearing area;

70
 fc ——The design value of axial compressive strength of concrete; at the stage of checking
for stretching of post-tensioned prestressed concrete members, this design value may
be determined by linear interpolation based on the concrete cube compressive
strength value f cu in the corresponding stage specified in Table 4.1.4-1 of this code.

βc——The influence coefficient of concrete strength, adopted according to Article 6.3.1 of

this code;

βl——The strength enhancement coefficient of concrete under local bearing;

Al——The local bearing area of concrete;

Aln——The net local bearing area of concrete; for post-tensioned members, areas of ducts
and grooves shall be deducted from the local bearing area;

Ab——The calculation base area of local bearing, determined according to Article 6.6.2 of
this code.

6.6.2 The calculated base area of local bearing Ab may be determined by the principle that local
bearing area is concentric and symmetric to the calculated base area; generally, Ab may be adopted
according to Figure 6.6.2.

Figure 6.6.2 Calculated Base Area under Local Bearing

Al—local bearing area of concrete; Ab—calculation base area under local bearing

6.6.3 The local bearing capacity shall meet the following requirements, if grid or spiral indirect steel
reinforcement is provided (Figure 6.6.3),:

Fl  0.9( c l f c  2 v cor f yv ) Al n (6.6.3-1)

In the case of grid reinforcement (Figure 6.6.3a), the ratio between the cross-sectional areas of
steel reinforcement per unit length in two directions should not be larger than 1.5; meanwhile the
volumetric ratio of reinforcement ρv shall be calculated according to the following expression:

71
 (a) Grid reinforcement (b) Spiral reinforcement

Figure 6.6.3 Indirect Steel Reinforcement in Local bearing Zone

Al—local bearing area of concrete; Ab—calculation base area under local bearing;
Acor—concrete core area within the internal surface range of grid or spiral indirect steel reinforcement

n1 As1l1  n2 As 2l2
v  (6.6.3-2)
Acor s

In the case of spiral reinforcement (Figure 6.6.3b), the volumetric ratio of reinforcement ρv shall
be calculated according to the following expression:

4 Ass1
v  (6.6.3-3)
d cor s

Where βcor——The enhancement coefficient of local bearing capacity provided by indirect steel
reinforcement; the value may be calculated by Expression (6.6.1-2) in which Ab
shall be replaced by Acor; if Acor is larger than Ab, taking Ab as Acor ; if Acor is no
larger than 1.25 times of local bearing area of concrete Al, taking βcor as 1.0;

α——The reduction coefficient of constraint provided by indirect steel reinforcement to

concrete, adopted as specified in Article 6.2.16 of this code;

fyv——The design tensile strength of indirect steel reinforcement, adopted as specified in

Article 4.2.3 of this code;

Acor——The concrete core cross-sectional area within the inner surface of grid or spiral
indirect reinforcement; the value shall be greater than the local bearing area of
concrete Al; its gravity center shall be coincidence with the gravity center of Al; the
calculation of its value shall be based on the principle of concentric and
symmetrical;

ρv——The volumetric ratio of indirect reinforcement;

n1, As1——Number of steel reinforcement along the direction of l1 of grid reinforcement and
the cross-sectional area of single piece of steel reinforcement respectively;
72
 n2, As2——Number of steel reinforcement along the direction of l2 of grid reinforcement and
the cross-sectional area of single piece of steel reinforcement respectively;

Ass1——The cross-sectional area of single spiral indirect steel reinforcement

dcor——The diameter of concrete section within the inner surface of spiral indirect steel
reinforcement;

s——The spacing of grid or spiral indirect steel reinforcement; the value should be in a
range from 30mm to 80mm.

The indirect steel reinforcement shall be arranged within the range of height h as demonstrated in
Figure 6.6.3; the grid reinforcement shall not be less than 4 pieces, and the spiral reinforcement shall
not be less than 4 circles. For column joints, h shall not be less than 15d (d is the diameter of
longitudinal steel reinforcement in columns).

6.7 Fatigue Analysis

6.7.1 In fatigue stress analysis for the normal section of flexural members, the following basic
assumptions may be adopted:

1 Strained section remains plane;

2 The diagram of concrete normal stress in compression zone is to be triangle;

3 For reinforced concrete members, the tensile strength of concrete in tension zone is neglected;
tensile forces are all carried by longitudinal steel rebars; for prestressed concrete members in which
crack is not allowed, the diagram of concrete normal stress in compression zone is to be triangle;

4 Use transformed sections for the calculation.

6.7.2 In fatigue analysis, the characteristic values of loads shall be used; crane loads shall be
multiplied by the dynamic factor and shall satisfy current national standard “Load Code for the
Design of Building Structures” (GB 50009). For crane girders with spans not greater than 12m, the
load of the largest crane may be adopted.

6.7.3 In fatigue analysis of reinforced concrete flexural members, the concrete stress and the stress
amplitude of steel reinforcement at the following positions shall be calculated:

1 The stress at extreme fiber of concrete compression zone of normal section and the stress
amplitude in longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement;

2 The shear stress of concrete and the stress amplitude of stirrups at the neutral axis of section.

Note: Fatigue analysis may not be necessary for longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement.

6.7.4 Fatigue stress on normal section of reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete flexural
members shall meet the following requirements:

1 The concrete compressive stress at extreme fiber of compression zone

 cc,
f
max  f c
f
(6.7.4-1)

2 The concrete tensile stress at extreme fiber of tension zone for prestressed concrete members
73
  ct,f max  f t f (6.7.4-2)

3 The stress amplitude of longitudinal steel rebars in tension zone

 sfi  f yf (6.7.4-3)

4 The stress amplitude of longitudinal prestressing tendons in tension zone

 pf  f pyf (6.7.4-4)

Where  cc,
f
max ——The concrete compressive stress at extreme fiber of compression zone in
fatigue analysis, calculated by Expression (6.7.5-1);

 ct,f max ——The concrete tensile stress at extreme fiber of tension zone of prestressed
concrete section in fatigue analysis, calculated according to Article 6.7.11 of
this code;

 sif ——The stress amplitude of the ith layer of longitudinal steel reinforcement in
tension zone of section in fatigue analysis calculated by Expression (6.7.5-2);

 pf ——The stress amplitude of the outmost layer of longitudinal prestressing tendons

in tension zone of section in fatigue analysis calculated by Expression
(6.7.11-3) of this code;

f cf , f t f ——The design values of the axial compressive and tensile fatigue strength of
concrete respectively, determined in accordance with Article 4.1.6 of this code;

f yf ——Limit value of fatigue stress amplitude of steel reinforcement, adopted

according to Table 4.2.6-1 of this code;

f pyf ——Limit value of fatigue stress amplitude of prestressed tension tendons, adopted
according to Table 4.2.6-2 of this code.
Note: If the longitudinal tension rebars are of the same type of steel, only the stress amplitude of the outmost layer of steel
reinforcement may be checked.

6.7.5 The concrete compressive stress on normal section of reinforced concrete flexural members
and the stress amplitude of steel reinforcement shall be calculated according to the following
expressions:

1 The concrete compressive stress at extreme fiber of compression zone

f
M max x0
 cc,
f
max  f
(6.7.5-1)
I0

2 The stress amplitude of the longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement

 sfi   sfi , max   sfi , min (6.7.5-2)

74
 f
M min ( h0i  x0 )
 f
si , min  f
E (6.7.5-3)
I 0f

f
M max (h0i  x0 )
 sfi , max   Ef (6.7.5-4)
I 0f

f f
Where M max , M min ——The maximum and minimum bending moments respectively caused by the
corresponding load combination on the same section in fatigue analysis;

 sfi , min ,  sfi , max ——The stresses in the ith layer of longitudinal steel reinforcement in tension
zone of corresponding section caused by the bending moments
f f
M max and M min respectively;

 Ef ——The ratio of elastic modulus of steel reinforcement to fatigue deformation

modulus of concrete;

I 0f ——The moment of inertia of transformed section as the bending moment

f f
M max and M min in the same direction in fatigue analysis;

x0——The depth of compression zone of the transformed section as the bending

f f
moment M max and M min in the same direction in fatigue analysis;

h0i——The distance from the edge of compression zone to the sectional centroid of
the ith layer longitudinal steel reinforcement in the tension zone as bending
f f
moment M max and M min in the same direction.
f f
If the bending moment M min and M max are in opposite direction, h0i, x0 and I 0f in Expression

(6.7.5-3) shall be replaced respectively by h0i , x0 and I 0f at the opposite position of the section.

6.7.6 In fatigue analysis for reinforced concrete flexural members, the depth of compression zone of

transformed section x0, x0 and the moments of inertia I 0f and I 0f shall be calculated according to the
following expressions:

1 Rectangular section and T-shaped section with flange located in tension zone

bx02
  Ef As ( x0  as )   Ef As ( h0  x0 )  0 (6.7.6-1)
2

bx 03
I 0f    Ef As ( x0  as ) 2   Ef As ( h0  x0 ) 2 (6.7.6-2)
3

2 I-shaped section and T-shaped section with flange located in compression zone

1) If x0 is larger than hf (Figure 6.7.6)

bf x02 (bf  b)( x0  hf ) 2

   Ef As ( x0  as )   Ef As ( h0  x0 )  0 (6.7.6-3)
2 2

75
 bf x03 (bf  b)( x0  hf ) 3
I 0f     Ef As ( x0  as ) 2   Ef As ( h0  x0 ) 2 (6.7.6-4)
3 3

Figure 6.7.6 Calculation of the Normal Section Fatigue Stress in Reinforced Concrete Flexural Member

2) If x0 is not larger than hf , the calculation shall be carried out according to the rectangular
section with width of bf .

3 The calculation of x0 and I 0f , may also adopt the above expression for x0 and I 0f ; if the
f f
bending moment M min and M max are in opposite direction, the positions of compression zones related
to x0 and x0 respectively are at the lower and upper sides of this section; if the bending

f
moment M min f
and M max are in the same direction, it may adopt x0 =x0, I 0f  I 0f .
Note: 1 If the longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement are arranged in multi-layers along the depth of section,  Ef As ( h0  x0 ) in
n
Expression (6.7.6-1) and (6.7.6-3) may be replaced by  E
f
A
i 1
si ( h0i  x 0 ) ;  Ef As ( h0  x0 ) 2 in Expression (6.7.6-2) and

n
(6.7.6-4) may be replaced by aEf  A (h
i 1
si 0i  x0 ) 2 , herein, n represents the total layer number of longitudinal tensile steel

reinforcement, Asi represents the cross-sectional area of all the longitudinal steel reinforcement at the ith layer;

The stress of the longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement shall meet the condition of aE c  f y ; if aE c  f y ,
f f f f
2

aEf As in the expressions of this Article shall be replaced by f y As /  cf . In which, f y represents the design value of
compressive strength of the longitudinal steel reinforcement,  cf represents the concrete stress at the point of resultant

force of the longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement.

6.7.7 The fatigue analysis for inclined section of reinforced concrete flexural members and the
distribution of shear force shall meet the following requirements:

1 If the shear stress at the neutral axis of the section meets the following conditions, the shear
force in this sector is carried entirely by concrete; in this case, the stirrups may be arranged according
to the detailing requirements:

f 0.6ftf (6.7.7-1)

Where τf——The shear stress at the neutral axis of the section, calculated according to Article
6.7.8 of this code:

f t f ——The design value of concrete axial tensile fatigue strength, determined according to
Article 4.1.6 of this code.
76
 2 If the shear stress at the neutral axis of section does not agree with Expression (6.7.7-1), the
shear force shall be carried jointly by stirrups and concrete. In this case, the stress amplitude  svf of
stirrup shall meet the following requirement:

svf  fyvf (6.7.7-2)

Where  svf ——The stress amplitude of stirrup, calculated according to Expression (6.7.9-1) of
this code:

f yvf ——The limit value for fatigue stress amplitude of stirrup, adopted according to
Table 4.2.6-1 of this code.

6.7.8 The shear stress at the neutral axis of reinforced concrete flexural members shall be calculated
according to the following expression:

f
Vmax
 
f
(6.7.8)
bz0

f
Where Vmax ——The maximum shear force in the checked section under the corresponding load
combination in fatigue analysis;

b——The width of rectangular section, and the web width of T-shaped or I-shaped
sections;

z0——The distance from the point of resultant force in compression zone to the point of
resultant force of tensile steel reinforcement, where the depth x0 of the
compression zone shall be calculated according to Expression (6.7.6-1) or
Expression (6.7.6-3) of this code.

6.7.9 The stress amplitude of stirrups on the inclined section of reinforced concrete flexural
members shall be calculated according to the following expressions:

(Vmax
f
 0.1f t f bh0 ) s
 svf  (6.7.9-1)
Asv z0

Vmax
f
 Vmax
f
 Vmin
f
(6.7.9-2)

  Vmax
f f
/Vmax (6.7.9-3)

Where Vmax
f
——The maximum shear force amplitude of the checked section in the fatigue
analysis;
f
Vmin ——The minimum shear force in the checked section under the corresponding load
combination in the fatigue analysis;

η——The relative maximum shear force amplitude;

s——The spacing between stirrups;

77
 Asv——The gross cross-sectional area of all the legs of stirrups arranged in the same
section.

6.7.10 The stress and stress amplitude at the following positions shall be calculated in fatigue
analysis for prestressed concrete flexural members:

1 Stress at extreme fiber of concrete tension zone and compression zone on normal section, as
well as stress amplitude of the longitudinal prestressing tendons and the steel rebars in tension zone;

2 Principal tensile stress in concrete at the sectional centroid and positions where the width of
section changes abruptly.

Note: 1 Fatigue analysis may not be required for longitudinal steel reinforcement in compression zone;

2 Fatigue analysis may not be required for steel reinforcement in prestressed concrete members with crack control level 1.

6.7.11 For prestressed concrete flexural members in which crack is not allowed, the minimum stress,
the maximum stress and the stress amplitude of the concrete, prestressed longitudinal tendons and
steel rebars of normal section shall be calculated by the following expressions:

1 Stress at extreme fiber of concrete tension zone or compression zone

f
M min
 c,f min or  c,f max   pc  y0 (6.7.11-1)
I0

f
M max
 f
c, max or  f
c, min   pc  y0 (6.7.11-2)
I0
2 Stress and stress amplitude of the longitudinal prestressing tendons in tension zone

 pf   p,f max   p,f min (6.7.11-3)

f
M min
 f
p, min   pe   pE y0 p (6.7.11-4)
I0

f
M max
 p,f max   pe   pE y0p (6.7.11-5)
I0

3 Stress and stress amplitude of the longitudinal steel rebars in tension zone

 sf   s,f max   s,f min (6.7.11-6)

f
M min
 s,f min   s0   E y0s (6.7.11-7)
I0

f
M max
 s,f max   s0   E y0s (6.7.11-8)
I0

Where  c,f min ,  c,f max ——The minimum and maximum stresses at extreme fiber of concrete tension

78
 zone and compression zone respectively used for fatigue analysis, the
minimum and maximum stresses shall be identified by their absolute
values;

σpc——The concrete normal stress produced at extreme fiber of concrete tension

zone or compression zone by jacking force, after deducing all prestress
losses, calculated according to Expression (10.1.6-1) or Expression
(10.1.6-4) of this code;
f f
M max , M min ——In fatigue analysis, the maximum and minimum bending moment values
generated by corresponding load combination on the same section;

αpE——Ratio of the elastic modulus of prestressing tendon to the elastic modulus

of concrete: αpE=Es/Ec;

I0——The moment of inertia for transformed section;

y0——The distance from the edge of tension zone or compression zone to the
centroid of transformed section;

 p,f min ,  p,f max ——In fatigue analysis, the minimum and maximum stresses of the outmost
layer of prestressing tendons in tension zone;

 pf ——In fatigue analysis, the stress amplitude of the outmost layer of

prestressing tendons in tension zone;

σpe——The effective prestress in the outmost layer of prestressing tendons in

tension zone after deducing all prestress losses, calculated by Expression
(10.1.6-2) or Expression (10.1.6-5) of this code;

y0s, y0p——The distances from the sectional centroid of the outmost layer of steel
rebars and prestressing tendon respectively in tension zone to the centroid
of transformed section;

 s,f min ,  s,f max ——In fatigue analysis, the minimum and maximum stresses of the outmost
layer of steel rebars in tension zone;

 sf ——In fatigue analysis, the stress amplitude of the outmost layer of steel rebars
in tension zone;

σs0——The stress generated in the outmost layer of steel rebars in tension zone
under the effect of compression-relief moment Mp0; Mp0 is the
corresponding bending moment as the normal prestress in concrete is
equal to zero at the centroid of outmost layer of steel rebars in tension
zone.

Note:  pc ( M min
f f
/ I 0 ) y0 and ( M max / I 0 ) y0 shall use positive sign in Expression (6.7.11-1) and Expression (6.7.11-2) if they are

tensile stress, otherwise they shall use negative sign; σs0 in Expression (6.7.11-7) and Expression (6.7.11-8) shall use negative

sign.

79
6.7.12 The principal tensile stress of concrete in inclined section of prestressed concrete flexural
member shall meet the following requirement:

 tpf  f t f (6.7.12)

Where  tpf ——The principal tensile stress of concrete at the fiber for fatigue analysis in the
inclined section of prestressed concrete flexural members; it shall be calculated
according to Article 7.1.7 of this code; for crane loads, the dynamic factor shall
also be considered.

80
 7 Serviceability Limit States

7.1 Crack control

7.1.1 For reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete members, the analysis of stress at the extreme
fiber in tension zone or crack width on normal section shall be carried out according to the following
requirements:

1 For members with Crack Control Level 1, the stress at the extreme fiber in tension zone under
characteristic combination of loads shall meet the following requirements:

σck－σpc≤0 (7.1.1-1)

2 For members with Crack Control Level 2, the stress at the extreme fiber in tension zone under
characteristic combination of loads shall meet the following requirements:

σck－σpc≤ftk (7.1.1-2)

3 For members with Crack Control Level 3, the maximum crack width of reinforced concrete
members may be calculated according to quasi-permanent combination of loads and by considering
the effect of the influence due to long-term action; the maximum crack width of prestressed concrete
members may be calculated according to characteristic combination of loads and by considering the
effect of the influence due to long-term action. The maximum crack width shall meet the following
requirements:

ωmax≤ωlim (7.1.1-3)

For prestressed concrete members with Environmental Category II-a under quasi-permanent
combination of loads, the stress at the extreme fiber in tension zone shall also meet the following
requirements:

σcq－σpc≤ftk (7.1.1-4)

Where σck, σcq——The normal stresses of concrete at the edge for crack resistance analysis under
the characteristic combination and quasi-permanent combination of loads
respectively;

σpc——The compressive prestress of concrete at the edge for crack resistance analysis
after deducting all prestress losses, calculated by Expression (10.1.6-1) and
Expression (10.1.6-4) of this code;

ftk——The characteristic value for axial tensile strength of concrete, which may be
adopted from Table 4.1.3-2 of this code;

ωmax——The maximum crack width calculated according to the characteristic combination

or quasi-permanent combination of loads in consideration of the influence of
long-term actions, which shall be calculated according to Article 7.1.2 of this
code;

ωlim——The limit value of the maximum crack width, which shall be adopted according
to Article 3.4.5 of this code.

81
7.1.2 For reinforced concrete tension, flexural and eccentric compression members, and prestressed
concrete axial tension and flexural members with rectangular, T-shaped, inverted T-shaped or I-shaped
sections, according to the characteristic combination or quasi-permanent combination of loads in
consideration of the influencing of long-term actions, the maximum crack width may be calculated
according to the following expressions:

s  d eq 
max   cr 1.9cs  0.08  (7.1.2-1)
Es   te 

f tk
  1.1  0.65 (7.1.2-2)
 te s

 ni d i2
d eq  (7.1.2-3)
 ni vi d i

As  Ap
 te  (7.1.2-4)
Ate

Where acr——The load type characteristic coefficient of the member, which shall be adopted
according to Table 7.1.2-1;

 ——The nonuniform coefficient for strain of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement

between cracks; if  <0.2,  =0.2; if  >1.0,  =1.0; for member directly
carrying repeated load,  =1.0;

σs——The stress of longitudinal tensile steel rebars in reinforced concrete members

calculated according to the quasi-permanent combination of loads, or the equivalent
stress of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement in prestressed concrete members
calculated according to the characteristic combination of loads;

Es——The elastic modulus of steel reinforcement, which may be adopted according to

Table 4.2.5 of this code;

cs——The distance (mm) from the outer edge of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement in
the outmost layer to the bottom edge of tension zone; if cs<20, taking cs=20; if cs>65,
taking cs=65;

ρte——The ratio of reinforcement for longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement calculated

according to effective tension concrete sectional area; for unbounded post-tensioned
members, the ratio of reinforcement shall be calculated only for longitudinal tensile
steel rebars; in the calculation of maximum crack width, if ρte<0.01, taking ρte=
0.01;

Ate——The effective tension concrete sectional area: for axial tension members, taking
cross-sectional area of members; for flexural, eccentric compression and eccentric
tension members, taking Ate=0.5bh+(bf－b) hf, where bf and hf refer to the width and
depth of tension flanges;

82
 As——The cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel rebars in the tension zone;

Ap——The cross-sectional area of longitudinal prestressing tendons in the tension zone;

deq——The equivalent diameter (mm) of longitudinal steel reinforcement in tension zone;

for unbounded post-tensioned members, it is the equivalent diameter (mm) of
longitudinal tensile steel rebars only in tension zone;

di——The nominal diameter of Type i longitudinal steel reinforcement in tension zone; for

the diameter of bonded prestressing steel strand bundle, taking n1 d p1 ; hereinto, dp1

refers to the nominal diameter of single steel strand, nl refers to the number of single
bundle of steel strand;

ni——The number of Type i longitudinal steel reinforcement in tension zone; for bonded
prestressing steel strand, taking the number of steel strand bundles;

vi——The relative cohesion characteristic coefficient of Type i longitudinal steel

reinforcement in tension zone, which shall be adopted according to Table 7.1.2-2.

Note: 1 For flexural members under crane load but not required for fatigue analysis, the calculated maximum crack width may be
multiplied by a coefficient of 0.85;

2 For beams provided with surface mesh reinforcement according to Article 9.2.15 of this code, the maximum crack width
calculated according to Expression (7.1.2-1) may be properly reduced and the reduction coefficient may be taken as 0.7;

3 For eccentric compression members with e0/h0≤0.55, the crack width may not be checked and calculated.

Table 7.1.2-1 Load Type Characteristic Coefficient of Members

acr
Type
Reinforced concrete member Prestressed concrete member

Flexural and eccentric compression 1.9 1.5

Eccentric tension 2.4 —

Axial tension 2.7 2.2

Table 7.1.2-2 Relative Cohesion Characteristic Coefficient of Steel Reinforcement

Pretensioned prestressing steel Post tensioned prestressing steel

Classification Steel reinforcement
reinforcement reinforcement
of steel
Plain round steel Ribbed steel Ribbed steel Spiral ribbed Steel Ribbed steel Steel Plain steel
reinforcement
reinforcement reinforcement reinforcement steel wire strand reinforcement strand: wire

vi 0.7 1.0 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.8 0.5 0.4

Note: For ribbed steel reinforcement with epoxy resin coating, the relative cohesion characteristic coefficient shall be 80% of the
value in the Table.

7.1.3 Under the quasi-permanent combination or characteristic combination of loads, the compressive
stress of the concrete at the exteme fiber in compression zone of the cracking section of reinforced
concrete members and prestressed concrete members, the tensile stress of steel reinforcement at
different positions and the equivalent stress of the prestressing tendon should be calculated according
to the following assumptions:

83
 1 Sectional strain remains plane;

2 The shape of normal stress diagram of concrete in compression zone is to be triangle;

3 The tensile strength of concrete in tension zone is disregarded;

4 Transformed section is to be used.

7.1.4 Under the quasi-permanent combination or characteristic combination of loads, the stress of
longitudinal steel rebars in tension zone of reinforced concrete members or the equivalent stress of
longitudinal steel reinforcement in tension zone of prestressed concrete members also may be
calculated according to the following expressions:

1 Stress of longitudinal steel rebars in tension zone of reinforced concrete member

1) Axial tension member

Nq
 sq  (7.1.4-1)
As

2) Eccentric tension member

N q e
 sq  (7.1.4-2)
As (h0  as )

3) Flexural member

Mq
 sq  (7.1.4-3)
0.87 h0 As

4) Eccentric compression member

N q (e  z )
 sq  (7.1.4-4)
As z

  h0  
2

z  0.87  0.12(1   f )   h0 (7.1.4-5)

  e  

e  s e0  ys (7.1.4-6)

(bf  b)hf
 f  (7.1.4-7)
bh0

2
1  l0 
s  1    (7.1.4-8)
4000 e0 /h0  h 

Where As——The cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel rebars in tension zone: for axial tension

84
 members, taking the gross cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel rebars; for
eccentric tension members, taking the cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel
rebars at the side with larger tension; for flexural and eccentric compression
members, taking the cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel rebars in tension zone;

Nq, Mq——The axial force and the bending moment calculated according to the quasi-permanent
combination of loads;

e'——The distance from the acting point of axial tensile force to the resultant force of the
longitudinal steel rebars in the compression zone or at the side with smaller tension;

e——The distance from the acting point of axial compressive force to the resultant force
of longitudinal tensile steel rebars;

e0——The original eccentricity under the quasi-permanent combination of loads, calculated

as Mq/Nq;

z——The distance from the resultant force of longitudinal tensile steel rebars to the
resultant force of section in compression zone, but should not be larger than 0.87h0;

ηs——The enhancement coefficient of eccentricity for the axial compressive force at

service stage; if l0/h is not larger than 14, taken as 1.0;

ys——The distance from the centroid of section to the resultant force of longitudinal tensile
steel rebars;

 f ——The value for ratio of the cross-sectional area of compression flanges to effective
cross-sectional area of the web;

bf , hf ——The width and depth of flanges in compression zone respectively; in Expression
(7.1.4-7), if hf >0.2h0, hf is taken as 0.2h0.

2 Equivalent stress of longitudinal steel reinforcement in tension zone of prestressed concrete

members

1) Axial tension member

N k  N p0
 sk  (7.1.4-9)
Ap  As

2) Flexural member

M k  N p0 ( z  ep )
 sk  (7.1.4-10)
(1 Ap  As ) z

Mk
e  ep  (7.1.4-11)
N p0

ep  yps  ep 0 (7.1.4-12)

85
Where Ap——The cross-sectional area of the longitudinal prestressing tendons in tension zone: for
axial tension members, taking the total cross-sectional area of longitudinal
prestressing tendon; for flexural members, taking the cross-sectional area of the
longitudinal prestressing tendon in tension zone;

Np0——The jacking force where the normal direction prestress of concrete on the calculated
section is equal to zero, calculated according to the requirements of Article 10.1.13 of
this code;

Nk, Mk——The axial force and the bending moment calculated according to the characteristic
combination of loads;

z——The distance from the resultant force of longitudinal steel rebars and prestressing
tendons in tension zone to the resultant force of section compression zone, which
shall be calculated according to Expression (7.1.4-5), hereinto, e shall be calculated
according to Expression (7.1.4-11);

a1——The equivalent reduction coefficient of the unbonded prestressing tendons, taking a1

as 0.3; for post-tensioning prestressing tendons of grouting, taking a1 as 1.0;

ep——The distance from the acting point of jacking force Np0, where the calculated
concrete normal direction prestress of the section is zero, to the point for resultant
forces of the longitudinal prestressing tendons and steel rebars in tension zone;

yps——The eccentricity of the point for resultant forces of the longitudinal prestressing
tendons and steel rebars in tension zone;

ep0——The eccentricity of the acting point of jacking force Np0 where the calculated normal
direction prestress on the section of concrete is zero, which shall be calculated
according to the requirements of Article 10.1.13 of this code;

7.1.5 Under the characteristic combination and quasi-permanent combination of loads, the normal
stress of concrete at the section edge in crack resistance analysis shall be calculated according to the
following expressions:

1 Axial tension members

Nk
 ck  (7.1.5-1)
A0

Nq
 cq  (7.1.5-2)
A0

2 Flexural members

Mk
 ck  (7.1.5-3)
W0

Mq
 cq  (7.1.5-4)
W0
86
 3 Eccentric tension and eccentric compression member

M k Nk
 ck   (7.1.5-5)
W0 A0

Mq Nq
 cq   (7.1.5-6)
W0 A0

Where A0——The transformed cross-sectional area of the member;

W0——The elastic section modulus for the extreme fiber in tension zone of the transformed
section of the member.

7.1.6 The principal tensile stress of concrete and the principal compressive stress of concrete in the
section of prestressed concrete flexural members shall be checked and calculated respectively:

1 Principal tensile stress of concrete

1) Members with Crack Control Level 1 shall meet the following requirement:

σtp≤0.85ftk (7.1.6-1)

2) Members with Crack Control Level 2 shall meet the following requirement:

σtp≤0.95ftk (7.1.6-2)

2 Principal compressive stress of concrete

Members with Crack Control Level 1 and 2 shall all meet the following requirement:

σcp≤0.60fck (7.1.6-3)

Where σtp, σcp——The principal tensile stress and compressive stress of concrete, which shall be
determined according to Article 7.1.7 of this code.

Here, the section at the unfavorable position in the span shall be selected, and analysis shall be
carried out at the centroid of the transformed section of the selected section and at the position where
the section width suddenly changes.

Note: For crane girders allowed to crack, the requirements of Expression (7.1.6-2) and Expression (7.1.6-3) shall be satisfied in static
calculation.

7.1.7 The principal tensile stress and principal compressive stress of concrete shall be calculated
according to the following expressions:

 tp   x   y  x  y 
2

    
2
(7.1.7-1)
 c p  2  2 

M k y0
 x   pc  (7.1.7-2)
I0

87
 (Vk    pe Apb sin  p ) S0
 (7.1.7-3)
I 0b

Where σx——The normal stress of concrete at the calculated fiber caused by jacking force and
bending moment Mk;

σy——The vertical compressive stress of concrete caused by characteristic value for

concentrated load Fk;

τ——The shear stress of concrete at the calculated fiber caused by the shear force Vk and
the jacking force of bent-up prestressing tendons; if torsional moment is acting on
the calculated section, the shear stress induced by the torsional moment shall also be
counted; for members of post-tensioned prestressed concrete statically indeterminate
structure, the secondary shear force caused by jacking force shall also be counted if
the shear stress is calculated;

σpc——The normal stress of concrete at the calculated fiber caused by jacking force after
deduction of total prestress losses, which shall be calculated according to Expression
(10.1.6-1) or Expression (10.1.6-4) of this code:

y0——The distance from the centroid of the transformed section to the calculated fiber;

I0——The moment of inertia for the transformed section;

Vk——The shear force value calculated according to the characteristic combination of

loads;

S0——The moment of area for the part of transformed section area above calculated fiber to
the centroid of transformed section area of member;

σpe——The effective prestress of bent-up prestressing tendons;

Apb——The cross-sectional area of bent-up prestressing tendons in the same bent-up plane
on calculated section;

αp——The included angle between the tangent to bent-up prestressing tendons and the
longitudinal axes of member on the calculated section.

Note: The values of σx, σy, σpc and Mky0/I0 in Expression (7.1.7-1) and Expression (7.1.7-2): if the stresses are in tesion, the positive
values shall be used; otherwise the negative values shall be used.

7.1.8 For prestressed concrete crane girders within the range of 0.6h from the acting point of
concentrated force, the simplified distribution of vertical compressive stress and shear stress caused
by the characteristic value of concentrated load Fk may be determined according to Figure 7.1.8 and
the maximum stress value may be calculated according to the following expressions:

0.6 Fk
 y, max  (7.1.8-1)
bh

 l  r
F  (7.1.8-2)
2

88
 Vkl S 0
 ' (7.1.8-3)
I 0b

Vkr S 0
r  (7.1.8-4)
I 0b

Where τl, τr——The shear stresses on the section located at a distance of 0.6h from the Fk acting
point to its left and right sides, respectively;

τF——The shear stress on the acting section of the concentrated load Fk;

Vkl ,Vkr ——The characteristic values of shear force on the left and right sides of the Fk acting
section.

(a) Section (b) Distribution of vertical compressive stress σy (c) Distribution of shear stress

Figure 7.1.8 Stress Distribution Adjacent to Acting Point of Concentrated Force for Prestressed Concrete Crane
Girder

7.1.9 In crack resistance analysis for the normal section and inclined section at the end of
pretensioning prestressed concrete members, the variation of the actual stress values within the range
of transfer length ltr of prestress for prestressing tendons shall be considered. The actual stress in
prestressing tendons may be deemed as linear distribution, where the stress is considered to be zero at
the end of the member, and to be effective prestress σpe at the end of the prestress transfer length
(Figure 7.1.9); the transfer length of prestress for prestressing tendons ltr shall be determined
according to Article 10.1.9 of this code.

Figure 7.1.9 Variation for the Value of Effective Prestress within the Range of the Prestress Transfer Length

7.2 Deflection of Flexural Members

7.2.1 The deflection of reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete flexural members may be
89
calculated according to the method of structural mechanics and shall not exceed the limit value
specified in Table 3.4.3 of this code.

For members with constant section, it may be assumed that the rigidity is the same in the portion
of member with same bending moment direction, and the rigidity at the position with maximum
bending moment in that portion shall be adopted. If the section rigidity at support in the calculated
span is not larger than twice or it is not less than one half of the section rigidity at mid-span, then the
span also may be calculated according to the constant rigidity member, the rigidity of maximum
bending moment section may be taken as the rigidity of this member.

7.2.2 The rigidity B of flexural members with rectangular, T-shaped, inverted T-shaped or I-shaped
section considering the action effects of long-term loads may be calculated according to the following
requirements:

1 If adopting characteristic combination of loads,

Mk
B Bs (7.2.2-1)
M q (  1)  M k

2 If adopting quasi-permanent combination of loads,

Bs
B (7.2.2-2)

Where Mk——The bending moment calculated according to characteristic combination of loads,
taking the maximum value of bending moment within the calculated section;

Mq——The bending moment calculated according to quasi-permanent combination of loads,

taking the maximum value of bending moment within the calculated section;

Bs——The short-term rigidity of reinforced concrete flexural members calculated according

to quasi-permanent combination of loads, or the short-term rigidity of prestressed
concrete flexural members calculated according to characteristic combination of
loads, which shall be calculated according to Article 7.2.3 of this code;

θ——The influence coefficient by considering the increase of deflection due to the long-
term action of loads, which shall be taken according to Article 7.2.5 of this code.

7.2.3 The short-term rigidity Bs of reinforced concrete flexural members and prestressed concrete
flexural members under the action of load combination required by crack control level may be
calculated according to the following expressions:

1 Reinforced concrete flexural member

Es As h02
Bs  (7.2.3-1)
6 E 
1.15  0.2 
1  3.5 f

2 Prestressed concrete flexural member

1) For member in which crack is not allowed

Bs=0.85EcI0 (7.2.3-2)
90
 2) For member in which crack is allowed

0.85 Ec I 0
Bs  (7.2.3-3)
 cr  (1   cr )

M cr
 cr  (7.2.3-4)
Mk

 0.21 
  1.0   (1  0.45 f )  0.7 (7.2.3-5)
 E  

M cr  ( pc  f tk )W0 (7.2.3-6)

(bf  b)hf
f  (7.2.3-7)
bh0

Where  ——The nonuniform coefficient for strain of longitudinal tensile steel rebars between
cracks, which shall be determined according to Article 7.1.2 of this code;

aE——The ratio of the elastic modulus of steel reinforcement to the elastic modulus of
concrete; namely Es/Ec;

ρ——The ratio of reinforcement of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement: for reinforced

concrete flexural members, taken as As/(bh0); for prestressed concrete flexural
members, taken as (α1Ap+As)/(bh0), where for grouted post-tensioning prestressing
tendons, taking α1=1.0, for unbounded post-tensioning prestressing tendons, taking
α1=0.3;

I0——The moment of inertia for the transformed section;

γf——The ratio of the cross-sectional area of tension flanges to the effective cross-sectional
area of the web;

bf, hf——The width and depth of flange in tension zone;

κcr——The value for the ratio of the cracking bending moment Mcr to the bending moment
Mk for the normal section of prestressed concrete flexural members, where kcr>1.0,
taking kcr=1.0;

σpc——The pre-compressive stress in concrete caused by jacking force at the edge for crack
resistance analysis after deducting the total prestress losses;

γ——The plastic influence coefficient for section modulus of concrete members, which
shall be determined according to Article 7.2.4 of this code.

Note: For members in which cracks occur in pretension zone when pre-compression is applied, Bs shall be reduced by 10%.

7.2.4 The plastic influence coefficient γ for section modulus of concrete members may be calculated
according to the following expression:

91
  120 
   0.7   m (7.2.4)
 h 

Where γm——The basic value of the plastic influence coefficient for section modulus of concrete
members, which may be determined by the assumption that the normal section strain
may remain plane, and by deeming the concrete stress diagram in tension zone as a
trapezoid and the ultimate tensile strain at the the extreme fiber in tension zone of
the concrete to be 2ftk/Ec; for commonly used sectional shapes, the value of γm may
be adopted according to Table 7.2.4;

h——The depth of section (mm): if h<400, taking h=400; if h>1600, taking h= 1600; for
circular and annular sections, taking h=2r, where r is the radius of circular section or
the radius of external ring of annular section.

Table 7.2.4 Basic Value of Plastic Influence Coefficient for Section Modulus γm

Item 1 2 3 4 5

Symmetric I-shaped section or Inverted T-shaped section with

T-shaped section with box section flange located in tension zone
Section Rectangular Circular and
flange located in bf/b≤2 and hf/h bf/b≤2 and hf/h
shape section bf/b>2 and bf/b>2 and annular section
compression zone could be arbitrary could be arbitrary
hf/h<0.2 hf/h<0.2
values values

γm 1.55 1.50 1.45 1.35 1.50 1.40 1.6－0.24rl/r

Note: 1 For I-shaped section bf  bf , the value between Item 2 and Item 3 may be adopted; for I-shaped section bf  bf , the
value between Item 3 and Item 4 may be adopted;

2 For the box section, b refers to the sum of width of all the ribs;

3 r1 refers to the radius of internal ring of annular section; for circular section, taking r1=0.

7.2.5 the influence coefficient θ considering the increase of deflection due to the long-term action of
loads may be adopted according to the following requirements:

1 Reinforced concrete flexural member

If ρ'=0, θ=2.0; If ρ'=ρ, θ=1.6; if ρ' is an intermediate value, θ may be taken according to the linear
interpolation method, where    As /(bh0 ) ,   As /(bh0 ) .

For inverted T-shaped section with flange located in tension zone, θ shall be increased by 20%.

2 For prestressed concrete flexural members, θ=2.0.

7.2.6 The inverted camber value due to jacking force in service stage of prestressed concrete
flexural members may be calculated by the method of structural mechanics based on the rigidity of
EcI0, and the influence of long-term action of pre-compressive stress shall be considered; the total
prestress losses in the stress of prestressing tendons shall be deducted in the calculation. The
calculated inverted camber value may be multiplied by the enhancement coefficient 2.0 in the
simplified calculation.

The long-term inverted camber value of the important or special prestressed concrete flexural
members may be determined through specific tests or by the calculation considering shrinkage and
92
creep influence according to the reinforcement conditions.

7.2.7 For prestressed concrete members, measures shall be taken to control the inverted camber and
deflection, and the following requirements should also be complied with:

1 If the long-term deflection of members considering the inverted camber does not conform to
Article 3.4.3 of this code, the method of pre-arching may be adopted during construction to control
the deflection;

2 For prestressed concrete members undergoing permanent loads comparatively small to

variable loads, the adverse effect for serviceability due to oversize inverted camber shall be
considered, and the corresponding design and construction measures shall be taken.

93
 8 Detailing Requirements

8.1 Expansion Joint

8.1.1 The maximum spacing of expansion joints for reinforced concrete structures may be determined
according to Table 8.1.1.

Table 8.1.1 Maximum Spacing of Expansion Joint for Reinforced Concrete Structures (in m)

Types of Structure Indoor or in soil Outdoor

Bent structure Precast 100 70

Precast 75 50
Frame structure
Cast-in-situ 55 35

Precast 65 40
Shear wall structure
Cast-in-situ 45 30

Precast 40 30
Structural types of retaining wall and basement wall, etc.
Cast-in-situ 30 20

Note: 1 The spacing of expansion joint for assembled monolithic structure may adopt the value between precast structure and
cast-in-situ structure in this Table according to specific conditions of structures;

2 The spacing of expansion joint for buildings with frame-shear wall structure or frame-core-tube structure may adopt the
value between the frame structure and shear wall structure in this Table according to specific conditions of structures;

3 In case there are no thermal insulation or heat insulation measures on the roof, the spacing of expansion joint for the frame
structure and the shear wall structure should adopt according to the value specified in “outdoor” column in this Table;

4 The spacing of local expansion joint for exposing structures such as cast-in-situ eaves and canopy, should not be larger than
12m.

8.1.2 Under the following conditions, the maximum spacing of expansion joint in Table 8.1.1 of this
code should be properly reduced:

1 The column height of bent structure is less than 8m (calculated from the top surface of
foundation);

2 Bent structure without thermal insulation and heat insulation measures on the roof;

3 The structure located in dry climate area where temperature is high in summer and rainstorm
occurs frequently, or the structure usually under the action of high temperature;

4 Structural wall structures that adopting the slip-form type construction technology;

5 Structures that using concrete materials with comparatively large shrinkage or exposing to air
for comparatively long time during construction.

8.1.3 Under the following conditions, the maximum spacing of expansion joints in Table 8.1.1 of
this code may be properly increased if sufficient evidence is available:

1 Measures for reducing the concrete shrinkage or temperature variation are taken;

2 Special measures of prestressing or increasing constructional steel reinforcement are adopted;

94
 3 Concrete materials with low shrinkage are adopted; construction methods such as pouring by
separate strips, post-placed strip and control joints are adopted; and maintenance during construction
is enforced.

If the spacing of expansion joint is increased, the influence for temperature variation and
concrete shrinkage on the structure shall also be considered.

8.1.4 The double-column foundation of frame structures or bent structures may not be separated
when expansion joints are applied.

8.2 Concrete Cover

8.2.1 The thickness of concrete cover for steel rebars and the prestressing tendons of members shall
meet the following requirements.

1 The cover thickness of load-carring steel reinforcement of members shall not be less than the
nominal diameter d of the steel reinforcement;

2 The cover thickness for the outmost layer of steel reinforcement in the concrete structure with
50-year design working life shall be in accordance with Table 8.2.1; the cover thickness for the
outmost layer of steel reinforcement in the concrete structure with 100-year design working life shall
not be less than 1.4 times of the value in Table 8.2.1.

Table 8.2.1 Minimum Thickness of Concrete Cover c (mm)

Environmental category Slab, wall and shell Beam, column and bar

I 15 20

II-a 20 25

II-b 25 35

III-a 30 40

III-b 40 50

Note: 1 The value of the cover thickness in this Table shall be increased by 5mm if the concrete strength grade is not larger than
C25;

2 The concrete cushion should be provided for the reinforced concrete foundation; the thickness of concrete cover for the steel
reinforcement in the foundation shall be calculated from the top surface of the cushion and shall not be less than 40mm.

8.2.2 The thickness of the concrete cover may be properly reduced if sufficient evidence is available
and the following measures are taken:

1 There has reliable protective coating on the member surface;

2 The industrializedly manufactured precast members are adopted;

3 Antirust measures such as mixing the corrosion inhibitor into the concrete or adopting the
cathodic protection treatment are taken;

4 If reliable waterproofing or protective measures are taken for the basement wall, the cover
thickness for the steel reinforcement contacted with soil may be properly reduced but shall not be less
than 25mm.

8.2.3 The effective detailing measures should be taken for the cover if the cover thickness for the
95
longitudinal steel reinforcement in beams, columns and walls is larger than 50mm. If steel mesh is
provided against cracking or peeling of concrete, the cover thickness for the mesh shall not be less
than 25mm.

8.3 Anchorage of Steel Reinforcement

8.3.1 If the tensile strength of steel reinforcement is utilized sufficiently in the calculation, the
anchorage of tensile steel reinforcement shall meet the following requirements:

1 The basic anchorage length shall be calculated according to the following expressions:

Steel rebars

fy
lab   d (8.3.1-1)
ft

Prestressing tendons

f py
lab   d (8.3.1-2)
ft

Where lab——The basic anchorage length of tensile steel reinforcement;

fy, fpy——The design value of the tensile strength for the steel rebars and the prestressing
tendons;

ft——The design value of the axial tensile strength for the concrete, valued as C60 if the
concrete strength grade is greater than C60;

d——The diameter of anchored steel reinforcement;

α——The appearance coefficient of anchored steel reinforcement, adopted according to

Table 8.3.1.

Table 8.3.1 Appearance Coefficient of Anchored Steel Reinforcement α

Type of steel Plain round steel Ribbed steel Spiral ribbed steel Three-skein steel Seven-skein steel
reinforcement reinforcement reinforcement wire strand strand

α 0.16 0.14 0.13 0.16 0.17

Note: The end of the plain round steel reinforcement shall be made into 180° hook, the length of the straight segment after hooking
shall not be less than 3d, however, if it is used as compressive steel reinforcement, the hook may not be made.

2 The anchorage length of tensile steel reinforcement shall be calculated according to the
following expression based on anchorage conditions and shall not be less than 200mm:

la=ζalab (8.3.1-3)

Where la——The anchorage length of tensile steel reinforcement;

ζa——The correction coefficient of the anchorage length; for steel rebars, it shall be adopted
according to the requirements of Article 8.3.2 of this code; if there are more than one
item, it may be calculated by continued multiplication but shall not be less than 0.6;
for prestressing tendons, it may be taken as 1.0.
96
 The anchorage requirements of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement for beam-column joints
shall be implemented in accordance with the requirements of Section 9.3 (II) of this code.

3 If the cover thickness for the anchored steel reinforcement is not larger than 5d, the transverse
constructional steel reinforcement shall be arranged within the anchorage length range and the
diameter shall not be less than d/4; the spacing of members such as beams, columns and diagonal
bracing shall not be greater than 5d; the spacing of plane members such as slabs and walls shall not be
larger than 10d and all of above shall not be larger than 100mm, where d refers to the diameter of the
anchored steel reinforcement.

8.3.2 The correction coefficient ζa of anchorage length for longitudinal tensile steel rebars shall be
adopted according to the following requirements:

1 It shall be adopted as 1.10 if the nominal diameter of the ribbed steel reinforcement is larger
than 25mm;

2 It shall be adopted as 1.25 for the ribbed steel reinforcement with epoxy coating;

3 It shall be adopted as 1.10 for the steel reinforcement easily disturbed in the construction
process;

4 If the actual reinforcement area of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement is larger

than the design calculated area, the ratio of the design calculated area to the actual reinforcement area
shall be adopted as the correction coefficient; however, for structural members directly bearing
dynamic loads with seismic protection requirements, this correction shall not be considered;

5 If the cover thickness of anchored steel reinforcement is 3d, the correction coefficient may be
taken as 0.80; if the cover thickness is 5d, the correction coefficient may be taken as 0.70; the
intermediate values shall be calculated by interpolation. Here d is the diameter of the anchored bars.

8.3.2 If the hook or mechanical anchoring measures are adopted at the end of the longitudinal tensile
steel rebars, the anchorage length (projected length) including the hook or anchor end may be taken as
60% of the basic anchorage length lab. The types (Figure 8.3.3) and technical requirements for the
hook and mechanical anchoring shall be in accordance with Table 8.3.3.

Table 8.3.3 Types and Technical Requirements for Hook and Mechanical Anchoring of Steel Reinforcement

Anchoring type Technical requirements

End with 90° hook, the internal diameter of the hook is 4d, the straight length after bending is
90° hook
12d
End with 135° hook, the internal diameter of the hook is 4d, the straight length after bending
135° hook
is 5d

Fillet welding with anchor bar at one side Fillet welding 5d-long steel reinforcement with the same diameter at one side of the end

Fillet welding with anchor bar at both sides Fillet welding 3d-long steel reinforcement with the same diameter at both sides of the end

Anchor slab at welded end Plug welding with perforation for d-thick anchor slab at end

Bolt anchor head Screwing in bolt anchor head at end

Note: 1 The weld and thread length shall meet the requirements of load-carrying capacity;

2 The net bearing area of bolt anchor head and welded anchor slab shall not be less than 4 times of cross-sectional area of the
anchored steel reinforcement;

97
 3 The specification for the bolt anchor head shall meet the requirements of relevant standards;

4 The clear spacing of steel reinforcement between the bolt anchor head and welded anchor slabs should not be less than 4d,
otherwise the adverse effect of group anchor shall be considered;

5 The hook at corner of the section and the reinforced direction for fillet welding anchor bar at one side should be offset
toward the inner side of the section.

(a) 90° hook (b) 135° hook (c) Fillet welding with anchor bar at
one side

(d) Fillet welding with anchor bar at (e) Anchor slab for plug welding with (f) Bolt anchor head
both sides perforation

Figure 8.3.3 Type and Technical Requirements for Hook and Mechanical Anchoring of Steel Reinforcement

8.3.4 If the compression strength of longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement in the concrete
structure is sufficiently utilized in calculation, the anchorage length shall not be less than 70% of the
corresponding tension anchorage length.

Anchoring measures such as end hooks and fillet welding anchor bar at one side shall not be
adopted for the compressive steel reinforcement.

The transverse constructional steel reinforcement within the range of the anchorage length of the
compressive steel reinforcement shall meet the relevant requirements of Article 8.3.1 of this code.

8.3.5 For precast members under dynamic loads, the end of the longitudinal stressed steel rebars
shall be welded on the steel plate or steel angle, which shall be reliably anchored in the concrete. The
dimension of the steel plate or steel angle shall be determined according to calculation and the
thickness should not be less than 10mm.

The anchor at the end of stressed steel rebars in other members also may be realized by welding
steel plates or section steel.

8.4 Splices of Steel Reinforcement

8.4.1 The splice of steel reinforcement may adopt binding lap, mechanical connecting or welding.
The types and quality of mechanical connection joints and welded joints shall comply with current
relevant standards of China.

The connection joint of load-carrying steel reinforcement in the concrete structure should be
arranged at the place where the stressed force is relative small. The joints on a same load-carrying steel
reinforcement should be arranged as less as possible. The connection joints should not be arranged for

98
longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement in important members and key force transfer positions
of the structure.

8.4.2 The binding lap splices shall not be adopted for longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement
in the axial tension and small eccentric tension members; the diameter of tensile steel reinforcement
should not be larger than 25mm and the diameter of compressive steel reinforcement should not be
larger than 28mm if the binding lap splices are adopted for steel reinforcement in other members.

8.4.3 The binding lap splices of adjacent longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement in the same
member should be mutually staggered. The length of connection sector of binding lap splices of steel
reinforcement is 1.3 times the lap splice length; and all the midpoints of the lap splice joints located in
the length of this connection sector belong to the same connection sector (Figure 8.4.3). In the same
connection sector, the lap splice joint area percentage of longitudinal steel reinforcement is the ratio of
the cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel reinforcement with lap splice joints to the cross-sectional
area of all the longitudinal steel reinforcement. If steel reinforcement are lap splice with different
diameters, it shall be calculated according to the steel reinforcement with relatively smaller diameter.

Figure 8.4.3 Binding Lap Splices Joint of Longitudinal Tensile steel Reinforcement in a Same Connection Sector

Note: There are two sticks of steel reinforcement with lap splice joints in the same connection sector as shown in the Figure; the lap
splice joint area percentage of the steel reinforcement is 50% if the diameters of the steel reinforcement are same.

The lap splice joint area percentage of tensile steel reinforcement in the same connection sector:
should not be larger than 25% for beam, slab and wall members; should not be larger than 50% for
column members. If it is really necessary to increase the lap splice joint area percentage of tensile
steel reinforcement, it should not be larger than 50% for beam members; and the requirement may be
loosen according to actual conditions for splicing points of slabs, walls, columns and precast
members.

If the binding lap splices are adopted for bundled bars, the connection shall be carried out with
the mode of staggered-lap splice for each bar. The joint area percentage shall be calculated according
to all single bars in the same connection sector. The lap splice length of steel reinforcement in bundled
bars shall be calculated according to the single bar respectively.

8.4.4 The overlapping length of binding lap splices of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement shall
be calculated according to the following expression based on the lap splice joint area percentage of
steel reinforcement in the same connection, and shall not be less than 300mm.

ll=ζlla (8.4.4)

Where ll——The lap splice length of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement;

ζl——The correction coefficient of the lap splice length for the longitudinal tensile steel
99
 reinforcement, which shall be adopted according to Table 8.4.4. If the joint area
percentage of longitudinal lap splice steel reinforcement is an intermediate value in
this Table, the correction coefficient may be determined according to interpolation
method.

Table 8.4.4 Correction Coefficient of Lap splice Length for Longitudinal Tensile steel Reinforcement

Joint area percentage of longitudinal lap splice steel reinforcement (%) ≤25 50 100

ξl 1.2 1.4 1.6

8.4.5 If the lap splice connection is adopted for the longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement in
members, the compression lap splice length shall not be less than 70% of the lap splice length for
longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement specified in Article 8.4.4 of this code and shall not be less than
200mm.

8.4.6 The transverse constructional steel reinforcement within the range of lap splice length for
longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement of beam and column members shall meet the
requirements of Article 8.3.1 of this code; if the diameter of the compressive steel reinforcement is
larger than 25mm, two pieces of stirrup shall also be arranged respectively within the range of 100mm
outside two end surfaces of the lap splice joint.

8.4.7 The mechanical connection joints of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement should be
mutually staggered. The length of the mechanical connection sector of steel reinforcement is 35d; d
refers to the relatively smaller diameter of the connection steel reinforcement. All the mechanical
connection joints of which midpoints of joints are located in the length of this connection sector
belong to the same connection sector.

The joint area percentage of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement in the same connection
sector should not be larger than 50%; but it may be loosen according to actual conditions for splicing
points of slabs, walls, columns and precast members. The joint percentage of longitudinal compressive
steel reinforcement may be free from restriction.

The cover thickness of the mechanical connection sleeve should meet the relevant requirements
for minimum cover thickness of steel reinforcement. The transverse clear spacing of the mechanical
connection sleeve should not be less than 25mm; the spacing of stirrup at the sleeve shall also meet
the corresponding detailing requirements.

The mechanical connection joints in structural members directly under dynamic loads shall not
only meet the fatigue resistance required in the design, the joint area percentage of longitudinal
load-carrying steel reinforcement in the same connection sector shall not be larger than 50%.

8.4.8 The welding for fine grain hot rolled ribbed steel reinforcement and the ribbed steel
reinforcement with diameter larger than 28mm shall be determined after tests; the steel reinforcement
with remained heat treatment should not be welded.

The mechanical connection joints of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement should be

mutually staggered. The length of the connection sector of welded joints of steel reinforcement is 35d
and shall not be less than 500mm; d refers to the relatively smaller diameter of the connection steel
reinforcement. All the midpoints of welded joints located in the length of this connection sector
belong to the same connection sector.

100
 The joint area percentage of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement should not be larger than
50%; but it may be loosen according to actual conditions for splicing points of precast members. The
joint percentage of longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement may be free from restriction.

8.4.9 For the members requiring fatigue analysis, the binding lap splices shall not be adopted for
longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement and the welded joints should not be adopted neither; It is
prohibited to weld accessories (except end anchorage) on the steel reinforcement.

The adoption of welded joints for longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement in reinforced concrete
crane girders, roof beams and bottom chord of roof truss directly under crane loads shall meet the
following requirements:

1 The flash butt welding shall be adopted and the burrs and hemming shall be removed;

2 The area percentage of welded joints of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement in the same
connection sector shall not be larger than 25%, the length of the connection sector of welded joints
shall be taken as 45d, d refers to the relatively larger diameter of the longitudinal steel reinforcement;

3 In fatigue analysis, the welded joints shall meet the requirements of limit value for fatigue
stress amplitude specified in Article 4.2.6 of this code.

8.5 Minimum Ratio of Reinforcement for Longitudinal Load-carrying Steel Reinforcement

8.5.1 The ratio of reinforcement ρmin for longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement in
reinforced concrete structural members shall not be less than the value specified in Table 8.5.1.

Table 8.5.1 Minimum Ratio of Reinforcement for Longitudinal Load-carrying steel Reinforcement ρmin (%)

Load type Minimum ratio of reinforcement

Strength grade 500MPa 0.50

All longitudinal steel
Compression Strength grade 400MPa 0.55
reinforcement
member Strength grade 300MPa and 335MPa 0.60

One side of longitudinal steel reinforcement 0.20

Tensile steel reinforcement at one side of flexural members, eccentric tension members
Larger value between 0.20 and 45ft/fy
and axial tension members
Note: 1 For the minimum ratio of reinforcement for all longitudinal steel reinforcement in compression members: if the
strength grade of concrete is above C60, the valuses in the table shall be increased by 0.10 ;

2 For tensile steel reinforcement in flexural slab members (excluding cantilever slab): if the strength grade of steel
reinforcement is 400MPa and 500MPa, the minimum ratio of reinforcement shall be allowed to adopt the larger
value between 0.15 and 45ft/fy;

3 The compressive steel reinforcement in eccentric tension members shall be considered as the longitudinal steel
reinforcement at one side of compression members;

4 The ratio of reinforcement for all longitudinal steel reinforcement and one side of longitudinal steel reinforcement of
compression member, as well as the ratio of reinforcement for tensile steel reinforcement at one side of axial tension
members and small eccentric tension members shall all be calculated according to the total cross-sectional area of
members;

5 The ratio of reinforcement for tensile steel reinforcement at one side of flexural members and large eccentric tension

101
 members shall be calculated according to the cross-sectional area after deducting the compression flange area

(bf  b)hf from the total cross-sectional area;

6 If the steel reinforcement is provided along the perimeter of member section, “longitudinal steel reinforcement at one
side” refers to the longitudinal steel reinforcement provided along one of two opposite sides in the direction of force.

8.5.2 For concrete slabs bedded on the base, the minimum ratio of reinforcement for tensile steel
reinforcement in slabs may be properly reduced but shall not be less than 0.15%.

8.5.3 For secondary reinforced concrete flexural members in structures, if the depth of section
required in the construction is far larger than the load bearing demands, the ratio of reinforcement for
longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement may be calculated according to the following expressions:

hcr
s   min (8.5.3-1)
h

M
hcr  1.05 (8.5.3-2)
 min f yb

Where ρs——The ratio of reinforcement for longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement in members
calculated as total section;

ρmin——The minimum ratio of reinforcement for longitudinal load-carrying steel

reinforcement, which shall be adopted according to Article 8.5.1 of this code;

hcr——The critical depth of the member section, h/2 shall be taken if it is less than h/2;

h——The section depth of the member;

b——The section width of the member;

M——The design value of the flexural capacity of normal section of the member.

102
 9 Fundamental Requirements for Structural Members

9.1 Slabs

(I) Fundamental Requirements

9.1.1 The concrete slabs shall be calculated in accordance with the following principles:

1 The slab supported by two opposite sides shall be calculated according to one-way slab;

2 The slab supported by four sides shall be calculated according to the following provisions:

1) If the ratio of long side to short side is not larger than 2.0, the slab shall be calculated
according to two-way slab;

2) If the ratio of long side to short side is larger than 2.0 but less than 3.0, the slab should be
calculated according to two-way slab;

3) If the ratio of long side to short side is not less than 3.0, the slab should be calculated as
the one-way slab that is stressed along the direction of short side and the sufficient
constructional steel reinforcement shall be placed along long side..

9.1.2 The dimensions of cast-in-situ concrete slabs should meet the following requirements:

1 The span-to-thickness ratio of slab: for reinforced concrete one-way slabs, it is not larger than
30; for reinforced concrete two-way slabs, it is not larger than 40; for slabs without beam support but
with column cap, it is not larger than 35; for slabs without beam support or column cap, it is not larger
than 30. The span-to-thickness ratio of prestressed slabs may be increased appropriately; if the load
and span of a slab is relatively large, the span-to-thickness ratio should be reduced appropriately.

2 The thickness of cast-in-situ reinforced concrete slab shall not be less than the values
specified in Table 9.1.2.

Table 9.1.2 Minimum Thickness of Cast-in-situ Reinforced Concrete Slabs (mm)

Types of slab Minimum thickness

Roof slab 60

Floor slabs of residential buildings 60

One-way slab
Floor slabs of industrial buildings 70

Floor slabs under vehicle loads 80

Two-way slab 80

Face slab 50
Ribbed floor
Rib height 250

The cantilever length not larger than 500mm 60

Cantilever slab (at root)
The cantilever length of 1200mm 100

Flat floor slab 150

Cast-in-situ hollow floor 200

9.1.3 The spacing of load-carrying steel reinforcement in the slab should not be larger than 200mm
103
if the slab thickness is not larger than 150mm; and it should not be larger than 1.5 times of the slab
thickness or 250mm if the slab thickness is larger than 150mm.

9.1.4 For the multi-span slabs adopting separate reinforcement, all the steel reinforcement at the slab
bottom should be extended into the supports; the length of reinforcement extended into the span shall
be determined according to negative bending moment diagram and also shall meet the anchorage
requirements of steel reinforcement.

The anchorage length of longitudinal steel reinforcement in the lower portion of simply
supported slab or continuous slab extending into the support shall not be less than 5 times of the
diameter of steel reinforcement, and the steel reinforcement shall be extended beyond the center line
of the support. Where the temperature and shrinkage stress in the continuous slab are relatively large,
the length extended into the support should be increased appropriately.

9.1.5 The volumetric void ratio of cast-in-situ concrete hollow floor slab should not be larger than
50%.

Where box-shaped internal hole is adopted, the thickness of the top slab shall not be less than
1/15 of the clear distance between ribs or 50mm. Where the bottom slab is provided with steel
reinforcement, the slab thickness shall not be less than 50mm. The ratio of the rib width between
internal holes to the height of internal holes should not be less than 1/4 and the rib width shall not be
less than 60mm; for the prestressed slabs, the rib width shall not be less than 80mm.

Where tubular-shaped internal hole is adopted, the thickness of the slabs at both the top and
bottom of the hole shall not be less than 40mm, the ratio of the rib width to the internal hole diameter
should not be less than 1/5 and the rib width shall not be less than 50mm; for the prestressed slabs, the
rib width shall not be less than 60mm.

(II) Detailing Reinforcement

9.1.6 For the cast-in-situ concrete slabs designed according to simply supported side or
non-load-carrying side, if the slab is integrally casted with the concrete beam and wall or is fixed in
masonry wall, constructional steel reinforcement shall be applied at the upper portion of the slab and
the following requirements shall be met:

1 The diameter should not be less than 8mm; the spacing should not be larger than 200mm; the
area of reinforcement in unit width should not be less than 1/3 of cross-sectional area of steel
reinforcement in slab bottom at the mid-span in the corresponding direction. For the one-way slab
integrally casted with the concrete beam and concrete wall, the cross-sectional area of steel
reinforcement in the non- load-carrying direction should not be less than 1/3 cross-sectional area of
steel reinforcement in slab bottom at the mid-span in the load-carrying direction.

2 The length of the steel reinforcement extended into the slab from the concrete beam edge,
column edge or wall edge should not be less than l0/4, the length of steel reinforcement extended into
the slab at the edge of the support of masonry wall should not be less than l0/7, where the calculated
span l0 shall be considered according to the load-carrying direction in relation to the one-way slab and
be considered according to the direction of short side in relation to the two-way slab.

3 At the corners of floor slabs, the additional steel reinforcement should be applied perpendicularly
along two directions, or parallel along inclined direction or in radial pattern.

104
 4 The steel reinforcement shall be reliably anchored in beams, walls or columns.

9.1.7 If designed according to one-way slab, distribution steel reinforcement shall be arranged
perpendicular to the load-carrying direction, the reinforcement in unit width should not be less than
15% of the load-carrying steel reinforcement in unit width, and the ratio of reinforcement should not
be less than 0.15%; the diameter of distribution steel reinforcement should not be less than 6mm and
the spacing between them should not be greater than 250mm; in the case of greater concentrated load,
the area of distribution steel reinforcement shall also be increased and their spacing should not be
larger than 200mm.

Where practical experiences or reliable measures are available, the distribution steel reinforcement
for precast one-way slab may not be restricted by this Clause.

9.1.8 Within the range of cast-in-situ slab where the temperature and shrinkage stress are large,
anti-cracking constructional steel reinforcement shall be applied at the upper portion of the slab in two
ways. The ratio of reinforcement should not be less than 0.10% and the spacing should not be greater
than 200mm. The anti-cracking constructional steel reinforcement may be arranged by penetrating the
exiting steel reinforcement or may be provided with other steel reinforcement to overlap with the
exiting steel reinforcement according to the requirements of tensile steel reinforcement or to anchor in
the peripheral members.

At the neck position of slab plane, the slab thickness and the reinforcement should be increased
appropriately. Along the hole edges and concave corners of the slabs, additional anti-cracking
constructional steel reinforcement should be applied and reliable anchoring measures should be taken.

9.1.9 For the thick concrete slab as well as the foundational raft slab that is laid on the subgrade, if
the slab thickness is larger than 2m, in addition that the longitudinal and transverse steel
reinforcement shall be applied along the upper and lower portions of the slab, the constructional steel
mesh reinforcement parallel to the slab surface shall also be applied along the slab thickness within a
range not larger than 1m; and the diameter of the steel mesh reinforcement should not be less than
12mm and the spacing of the steel reinforcement both in longitudinal and transverse directions should
not be larger than 300mm.

9.1.10 Where the thickness of concrete slab is not less than 150mm, U-shaped constructional steel
reinforcement should be applied at the end of the free side of the slab to overlap with the steel
reinforcement at the upper and lower portions of the slab, the lap splice length should not be less than
15 times the diameter of U-shaped constructional steel reinforcement or 200mm; or the steel
reinforcement may also be bent up and down respectively at the upper and lower portions of the slab.

(III) Slab-column Structure

9.1.11 If the anti-punching stirrups or bent-up steel reinforcement are applied in the concrete slabs,
the following construction requirements shall be met:

1 The slab thickness shall not be less than 150mm;

2 Stirrups and corresponding erection steel reinforcement that are required in calculation shall
be applied within the range intersecting with the 45° punching failure conical surface, of which the
distribution length outward from the zone of concentrated load or from the edge of column section
shall not be less than 1.5h0 (Figure 9.1.11a); the diameter of stirrup shall not be less than 6mm and the

105
stirrups shall be made into closed type and the spacing shall not be larger than h0/3 or 100mm;

(a) Stirrup is used as punching resistant steel reinforcement (b) Bent-up steel reinforcement is used as punching resistant
steel reinforcement

Figure 9.1.11 Arrangement of Punching Resistant Steel Reinforcement in Slab

Note: Dimensional unit in the Figure is mm.
1—erection steel reinforcement; 2—punching failure conical surface; 3—stirrup; 4—bent-up steel reinforcement

3 The bent-up angle of the required bent-up steel reinforcement according to calculation may
be selected between 30° and 45° based on the slab thickness; the inclined part of bent-up steel
reinforcement shall be intersected with the conical surface failed by punching (Figure 9.1.11b), the
intersection point shall be at the scope of (1/2~2/3)h outside the zone or concentrated load or outside
the column section. The diameter of the bent-up steel reinforcement should not be less than 12mm and
at least three bent-up steel reinforcement shall be applied in each direction.

9.1.12 The slab-column joints may adopt the structural form of column cap or supporting plate. The
shape and dimension of slab-column joint shall contain a 45° punching failure cone and shall meet
requirements on punching shear capacity.

The height of column cap shall not be less than the slab thickness h, and the thickness of
supporting plate shall not be less than h/4. The dimensions of both the column cap and supporting
plate in two directions in the plane should not be less than the sum of width b of column section in the
same direction with 4h (Figure 9.1.12).

9.2 Beams

(I) Longitudinal Reinforcement

9.2.1 The longitudinal load-carrying reinforcement of beam shall meet the following requirements:

1 The amount of the steel reinforcement extended into the beam support shall not be less than
2.

106
 (a) Column cap (b) Supporting plate

Figure 9.1.12 Slab-column Structure with Column Cap or Supporting Plate

2 If the beam height is not less than 300mm, the diameter of steel reinforcement shall not be
less than 10mm; otherwise, the diameter shall not be less than 8mm.

3 The clear spacing between the steel reinforcement in the horizontal direction at top of beam
shall not be less than 30mm or 1.5d; while the clear spacing between the steel reinforcement in the
horizontal direction at bottom of beam shall not be less than 25mm or d. If over two lower layers of
steel reinforcement are applied at the bottom, the center-to-center distance in the horizontal direction
between those steel reinforcement above two layers shall be one time larger than the lower two layers
by; the clear spacing between each layer of the steel reinforcement shall not be less than 25mm or d,
where, d is the maximum diameter of steel reinforcement.

4 In the intense reinforcement zone of beams, the reinforcement should be arranged in the form
of bundled bars.

9.2.2 For the longitudinal load-carrying reinforcement at the lower portion of reinforced concrete
simply supported beam and simply supported end of continuous beam, the anchorage length extended
into the support from the support edge shall meet the following requirements:

1 If V is not larger than 0.7ftbh0, the anchorage length shall not be less than 5d; if V is larger
than 0.7ftbh0, the anchorage length shall not be less than 12d for ribbed steel reinforcement and shall
not be less than 15d for plain round steel reinforcement, where d is the maximum diameter of steel
reinforcement;

2 If the anchorage length of the longitudinal load-carrying reinforcement extended into the
range of beam support fails to meet the requirements stated in Clause 1 of this Article, hook or
mechanical anchoring measures may be taken, and the requirments specified in Article 8.3.3 of this
code shall be met;

3 For the reinforced concrete independent beam supported on the masonry structure, at least
two stirrups shall be applied within the range of the anchorage length of longitudinal load-carrying
steel reinforcement, and the diameter of stirrup should not be less than d/4, d is the maximum
diameter of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement; the stirrup spacing should not be larger
than 10d, and the stirrup spacing should also not be larger than 5d if mechanical anchoring measures
are taken, d is the minimum diameter of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement.

Note: For the simply supported beam and the simply supported end of continuous beam, of which the concrete strength grade is C25
or below, if there is concentrated load acting within a scope of 1.5h to the support edge and V is larger than 0.7ftbh0, the ribbed
steel reinforcement should be taken with effective anchoring measures or the anchorage length may not be less than 15d, where
d is the diameter of anchored steel reinforcement.

9.2.3 The longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement carrying negative bending moment in the support
107
section of reinforced concrete beam should not be cut off in the tension zone, if they have to be cut off,
the following requirements shall be met:

1 If V is not larger than 0.7ftbh0, the longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement shall be cut off
after it has been extended by no less than 20d outside the section in which this steel reinforcement is
unneeded according to the calculation of flexural capacity of normal section, and the length of this
steel reinforcement extended out of the section in which the reinforcement strength is fully used shall
not be less than 1.2la;

2 If V is larger than 0.7ftbh0, the longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement shall be cut off by no
less than h0 or 20d outside the section in which this steel reinforcement is unneeded according to the
calculation of flexural capacity of normal section, and the length of this steel reinforcement extended
out of the section in which the reinforcement strength is fully used shall not be less than the sum of
1.2la and h0;

3 If the cut points determined according to Clause 1 and 2 of this Article are still located in the
corresponding tension zone of negative bending moment, then the longitudinal tensile steel
reinforcement shall be extended by no less than 1.3h0 or 20d outside the section in which this steel
reinforcement is unneeded according to the calculation of flexural capacity of normal section, and the
length of this steel reinforcement extended out of the section in which the reinforcement strength is
fully used shall not be less than the sum of 1.2la and 1.7h0;

9.2.4 In the reinforced concrete cantilever beam, at least two upper steel reinforcement shall be
extended to the outer end of cantilever beam and shall be bent downward by no less than 12d; the rest
of steel reinforcement shall not be cut off at the upper portion of the beam but shall be bent downward
at the bent starting points as specified in Article 9.2.8 of this code and be anchored at the lower side of
the beam according to Article 9.2.7 of this code.

9.2.5 The minimum ratio of reinforcement ρtl, min of the longitudinal torsion steel reinforcement in
the beam shall meet the following requirements:

T ft
 tl , min  0.6 (9.2.5)
Vb f y

If T/(Vb)>2.0, T/(Vb)=2.0.

Where ρtl, min——The minimum ratio of reinforcement of longitudinal torsion steel reinforcement,
which equals to Astl/(bh);

b——The width of the shear section, which shall be taken according to Article 6.4.1 of
this code and b shall be replaced by bh for the box-section members;

Astl——The gross cross-sectional area of those longitudinal torsion steel reinforcement

arranged along the periphery of section.

The spacing between the longitudinal torsion steel reinforcement arranged along the periphery of
section shall not be larger than 200mm or the length of the short side of beam section; in addition to
applying longitudinal torsion steel reinforcement at the four corners of the beam section, the rest of
longitudinal torsion steel reinforcement should be arranged uniformly and symmetrically along the
periphery of section. The longitudinal torsion steel reinforcement shall be anchored in the support as
tensile steel reinforcement.
108
 In flexural members with shear and torsion, the cross-sectional area of the longitudinal
load-carrying steel reinforcement arranged at the flexural tension side of the section shall not be less
than the sum of the cross-sectional area of steel reinforcement calculated according to the minimum
ratio of reinforcement of tensile steel reinforcement in flexural members as specified in Article 8.5.1
of this code and the cross-sectional area of steel reinforcement calculated according to the ratio of
reinforcement of longitudinal torsion steel reinforcement specified in this Article which are distributed
to the flexural tension side.

9.2.6 The longitudinal constructional steel reinforcement at the upper portion of the beam shall meet
the following requirements:

1 If the beam end is calculated according to simply supported beam but is actually restrained
partially, the longitudinal constructional steel reinforcement shall be applied in the upper portion of
the support zone, and their cross-sectional area shall not be less than a quarter of the cross-sectional
area required in the calculation of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement that are applied in
mid-span lower portion of beam, and their amount shall not be less than 2. The length of this
longitudinal constructional steel reinforcement extruded from the edge of support into the span shall
not be less than l0/5, here, l0 is the calculated span of beam.

2 For the erection steel reinforcement, the diameter should not be less than 8mm if the beam
span is less than 4m; its diameter shall not be less than 10mm if the beam span is between 4m and 6m;
its diameter should not be less than 12mm if the beam span is larger than 6m.

(II) Transverse Reinforcement

9.2.7 The concrete beam should adopt stirrups as the steel reinforcement to resist shear force.

If the bent-up steel reinforcement are adopted, the bent-up angle should be 45° or 60°; proper
anchorage length parallel to the axial direction of beam shall be reserved beyond the bent end point,
and the anchorage length shall not be less than 20d in the tension zone and shall not be less than 10d
in the compression zone, where d is the diameter of bent-up steel reinforcement; the steel reinforcement
at corners among the bottom layer steel reinforcement of beam shall not be bent up and those at
corners among the top storey steel reinforcement shall not be bent downward.

9.2.8 In the tension zone of concrete beam, the bent starting point of bent-up steel reinforcement
may be set in front of the section in which this steel reinforcement is unneeded according to the
calculation of flexural capacity of normal section. However, the intersection point of this bent-up steel
reinforcement with the center line of beam shall be located outside such section in which this steel
reinforcement is unneeded (Figure 9.2.8); meanwhile, the distance between the bent starting point and
the calculated section in which this steel reinforcement is fully used shall not be less than h0/2.

If the bent-up steel reinforcement is required according to the calculation, the distance from the
bent starting point of the front row starting from the support to the bent end point of the next row shall
not be larger than the maximum spacing of stirrups with “V>0.7ftbh0+0.05Np0” as stated in Table 9.2.9
of this code. The bent-up steel reinforcement shall not adopt the form of floating steel reinforcement.

109
 Figure 9.2.8 Relationship Between Bent Starting Point of Bent-up Steel Reinforcement and Bending Moment
Diagram
1—bent starting point of tension zone; 2—section needing no steel reinforcement “b” according to calculation;
3—diagram of flexural capacity of normal section;
4—section fully using the strength of steel reinforcement “a” or “b” according to calculation;
5—section needing no steel reinforcement “a” according to calculation; 6—center line of beam

9.2.9 Arrangement of stirrups in the beam shall meet the following requirements:

1 For the beams not requiring stirrups according to the calculation of load-carrying capacity, if
the depth of section is larger than 300mm, the constructional stirrups shall be applied along the full
length of beam; if the depth of section h=150mm~300mm, the constructional stirrups may only be
applied within a scope of l0/4 from the ends of member, where l0 is the span. However, if there are
concentrated loads acting within a scope of l0/2 at the middle part of member, the stirrups shall be
applied along the full length of beam. If the depth of section is less than 150mm, no stirrup may be
applied.

2 The diameter of stirrup should not be less than 8mm for beams with section depth larger than
800mm and should not be less than 6mm for beams with section depth no larger than 800mm. If
longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement are applied in beams as required by calculation, the
diameter of stirrup shall also not be less than d/4, and d is the maximum diameter of compressive steel
reinforcement.

3 The maximum spacing of stirrups in the beam should be in accordance with Table 9.2.9; if V
is larger than 0.7ftbh0+0.05Np0, the ratio of reinforcement of stirrups ρsv [ρsv=Asv /(bs)] shall also not be
less than 0.24ft/fyv.

Table 9.2.9 Maximum Spacing of Stirrups in Beam (mm)

Depth of beam h V>0.7ftbh0+0.05Np0 V≤0.7ftbh0+0.05Np0

150<h≤300 150 200

300<h≤500 200 300

500<h≤800 250 350

h>800 300 400

4 Where the longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement are applied in the beam as required
110
by calculation, the stirrups shall meet the following requirements:

1) The stirrup shall be made into closed type and the length of the straight segment of hook
shall not be less than 5d (d is the diameter of stirrup).

2) The spacing of stirrups shall not be larger than 15d or 400mm. Where there are more
than five longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement in one layer and the diameter of
steel reinforcement is larger than 18mm, the stirrup spacing shall not be larger than 10d
(d is the minimum diameter of longitudinal compressive steel reinfor- cement).

3) If the section width of beam is larger than 400mm and there are over three longitudinal
compressive steel reinforcement in one layer or if the section width of beam is not larger
than 400mm but there are over four longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement in one
layer, the combined stirrup shall be arranged.

9.2.10 In members under combined action of flexure, shear and torsion, the ratio of reinforcement of
stirrups (ρsv) shall not be less than 0.28ft/fyv.

The stirrup spacing shall meet Table 9.2.9 of this code; the stirrups required to resist torsion shall
be made into closed type and shall be arranged along the periphery of section. If combined stirrup is
adopted, the stirrups located in the section shall not be included in the area of torsional stirrups. The
end of the torsional stirrups shall be made into a hook of 135° and the length of the straight segment at
the end of this hook shall not be less than 10d (d is the diameter of stirrup).

In statically indeterminate structures, in consideration of the stirrups applied for coordinating

torsion, the stirrup spacing should not be larger than 0.75b, where b shall be adopted according to
Article 6.4.1 of this code. However, for the box-section members, b shall be replaced by bh.

(III) Local Reinforcement

9.2.11 The concentrated loads acting in the lower portion of beam or within the scope of the section
depth of beam shall all be carried by additional transverse reinforcement; the additional transverse
reinforcement should adopt stirrups.

The stirrups shall be arranged within a scope of (2h1+3b) (Figure 9.2.11). If steel hangers are
adopted, the bent-up segment shall be extended up to the top edge of beam and the length of the
horizontal segment at end shall not be less than the value specified in Article 9.2.7 of this code.

The gross cross-sectional area of the required additional transverse reinforcement shall meet the
following requirements:

F
Asv  (9.2.11)
f yv sin 

Where Asv——The gross cross-sectional area of additional transverse reinforcement required for
carring the concentrated loads; if additional steel hangers are adopted, Asv shall be
the sum of the cross-sectional area of the left and right bent-up segments;

F——The design value of concentrated loads acting at the bottom of beam or in the scope
of beam section depth;

111
 α——The included angle between additional transverse reinforcement and the axial line
of beam.

(a) Additional stirrup (b) Additional steel hanger

Figure 9.2.11 Arrangement of Additional Transverse Reinforcement If concentrated Loads acting in the Section
Depth of Beam
Note: Dimensional unit in the Figure is mm.
1—position where concentrated load is transferred; 2—additional stirrup; 3—additional steel hanger

9.2.12 The folded beam shall be added with stirrups (Figure 9.2.12) at the inside corner. These
stirrups shall be able to carry the resultant force of the longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement that are
not anchored in compression zone and shall be able to carry no less than 35% of the resultant force of
all the longitudinal steel reinforcement in any case.

Figure 9.2.12 Reinforcement at the Inside Corner of Folded Beam

The resultant force of the longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement, carried by stirrups, shall be
calculated according to the following expression:

The resultant force of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement that not anchored in the
compression zone is:

N s1  2 f y As1 cos (9.2.12-1)
2
35% of the resultant force of all the longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement is:

N s2  0.7 f y As cos (9.2.12-2)
2
Where As——The cross-sectional area of all the longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement;

As1——The cross-sectional area of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement that not anchored
in the compression zone;

α——The inside corner of member.

112
 The stirrups calculated according to the above conditions shall be arranged within in the scope of
length s, s=htan(3α/8).

9.2.13 Where the depth of beam web hw is not less than 450mm, the longitudinal constructional steel
reinforcement shall be arranged along the depth on both side of the beam. The spacing of the
longitudinal constructional steel reinforcement (excluding the load-carrying steel reinforcement at the
upper and lower portions of beam as well as the erection steel reinforcement) on each side should not
be larger than 200mm, and the cross-sectional area shall not be less than 0.1% of the cross-sectional
area of web (bhw), however, this requirement may be reduced if the beam width is relatively large.
Hereof, the depth of web hw shall be adopted according to Article 6.3.1 of this code.

9.2.14 For thin webbed girder or for reinforced concrete beam requiring fatigue analysis, the
longitudinal constructional steel reinforcement in diameter of 8mm~14mm shall be applied along two
sides of the lower half depth of the web; it shall have a spacing of 100mm~150mm, and shall be laid
out in a manner of lower-intense and upper-sparse. In the upper half depth of the web, the longitudinal
constructional steel reinforcement may be applied according to Article 9.2.13 of this code.

9.2.15 If the concrete cover thickness of beam is larger than 50mm, and the surface layer steel mesh
reinforcement are applied, the following requirements shall be met:

1 The surface layer steel reinforcement should adopt the welded mesh, the diameter of steel
reinforcement should not be larger than 8mm and the spacing of them shall not be larger than 150mm;
the meshes shall be set at the bottom and sides of the beam; the steel mesh reinforcement at beam
sides shall be extended up to 2/3 of the beam depth.

2 The cross-sectional area of the surface layer steel mesh reinforcement in two directions both
shall not be less than 1% of the area of corresponding concrete cover (the shaded area in Figure
9.2.15).

Figure 9.2.15 Detailing Requirements for Applying Surface Layer Steel Mesh Reinforcement
1—surface layer steel mesh reinforcement at beam side; 2—surface layer steel mesh reinforcement at beam bottom;
3—area in which steel mesh reinforcement are applied

9.2.16 The design of deep flexural member shall comply with Appendix G of this code.

9.3 Columns, Joints and Brackets

(I) Columns

9.3.1 Arrangement of longitudinal steel reinforcement in column shall meet the following requirements:

113
 1 The diameter of longitudinal steel reinforcement should not be less than 12mm; the ratio of
reinforcement of all the longitudinal steel reinforcement should not be larger than 5%;

2 The clear spacing of longitudinal steel reinforcement in column shall not be less than 50mm
and should not be larger than 300mm;

3 Where the section depth of the eccentric compression column is not less than 600mm, the
longitudinal constructional steel reinforcement in diameter no less than 10mm shall be applied on the
each side of column section and shall also be provided with combine stirrups or tie bars
correspondingly;

4 The amount of longitudinal steel reinforcement applied in circular column should not be less
than 8 but shall not be less than 6, and these steel reinforcement should be uniformly arranged along
the periphery of the column section;

5 In eccentric compression column, the center-to-center distance of these longitudinal steel

reinforcement on the side perpendicular to the acting plane of bending moment as well as of these
longitudinal steel reinforcement on each side in the axial compression column should not be larger
than 300mm.

Note: In the horizontally casted precast column, the minimum clear spacing of longitudinal steel reinforcement may be adopted in
accordance with the relevant provisions for beams stated in Article 9.2.1 of this code.

9.3.2 Stirrups in column shall meet the following requirements:

1 The diameter of stirrups shall not be less than d/4 (d is the maximum diameter of longitudinal
steel reinforcement) or 6mm;

2 The stirrup spacing shall not be larger than 400mm or the size of the short side of member
section and shall also not be larger than 15d (d is the minimum diameter of longitudinal steel
reinforcement);

3 The peripheral stirrups in column and other compression members shall be made into closed
type; for the stirrups in circular column, their lap splice length shall not be less than the anchorage
length stated in Article 8.3.1 of this code, and their ends shall be made into 135° hooks, the length of
the straight sector at the end of hook shall not be less than 5d (d is the diameter of stirrup);

4 Combined stirrups shall be arranged in case the size of the short side of column section is
larger than 400mm and the amount of longitudinal steel reinforcement on each side is larger than 3 or
the size of the short side of column section is not larger than 400mm but the amount of longitudinal
steel reinforcement on each side is larger than 4;

5 Where the ratio of reinforcement of all longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement is

larger than 3%, the diameter of stirrup shall not be less than 8mm, the stirrup spacing shall not be
larger than 10d or 200mm. The end of stirrups shall be made into 135° hook and the length of the
straight segment at end of this hook shall not be less than 10d (d is the minimum diameter of
longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement);

6 In columns in which spiral stirrups or welding ring stirrups are applied, if the action of
indirect steel reinforcement is considered in the calculation of the compression load-carrying capacity
of normal section, the stirrup spacing shall not be larger than 80mm or dcor/5 (dcor is the diameter of
core section determined according to the internal surface of stirrup) and should not be less than 40mm.

114
9.3.3 For columns with I-shaped section, the flange thickness should not be less than 120mm and
the web thickness should not be less than 100mm. If the web has opening, 2~3 strengthening steel
reinforcement in diameter no less than 8mm should be applied at the periphery of the opening, the
cross-sectional area of strengthening steel reinforcement in each direction should not be less than the
cross-sectional area of those steel reinforcement cut in this direction.

For I-shaped columns having opening in the web, if the transverse dimension of the opening is
less than one half of the depth of column section and the vertical dimension of the opening is less than
the clear spacing between two adjacent openings, the rigidity of column may be calculated according
to the solid web I-shaped section column, however, the weak part of the opening shall be deducted in
the calculation of load-carrying capacity. If the opening size exceeds the above-mentioned
requirements, the rigidity and load-carrying capacity of column shall be calculated according to
double-leg column.

(II) Beam-column Joints

9.3.4 The anchorage of longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam at the end joint of
intermediate-storey of frame shall meet the following requirements:

1 Anchorage of the upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam into the joint:

1) Where the linear anchoring form is adopted, the anchorage length shall not be less than
la and the steel reinforcement shall be extended over the center line of column, the length
extending over the center line should not be less than 5d (d is the diameter of the upper
longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam).

2) Where the sectional dimension of column fails to meet the requirements of linear
anchoring, the upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam may be adopted with the
anchorage mode by adding mechanical anchor heads at the ends of steel reinforcement
as stated in Article 8.3.3 of this code. The upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of
beam should be extended into the inner side of the outer longitudinal steel reinforcement
of column, the anchorage length of their horizontal projection, including the mechanical
anchor heads, shall not be less than 0.4lab (Figure 9.3.4a).

3) The upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam may also adopt the anchorage mode
of 90° bending, by which, they shall be extended into the inner side of the outer
longitudinal steel reinforcement of column and shall be bent inwards to the joint; their
horizontal projection length, including the arc, shall not be less than 0.4lab, and the length
of the projection of bent steel reinforcement (including the arc segment) in the bending
plane shall not be less than 15d (Figure 9.3.4b).

2 Anchorage of the lower longitudinal steel reinforcement of frame beam into the end joint:

1) Where the tensile strength of steel reinforcement is fully used in calculation, the
anchorage mode and length of steel reinforcement shall be the same as the requirements
for upper steel reinforcement.

2) Where the strength of this steel reinforcement is not used or only its compressive
strength is used in calculation, the anchorage length extending into the joint shall meet
the requirements on anchorage of lower longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam at the

115
 intermediate joints as stated in Article 9.3.5 of this code.

(a) Anchorage by adding anchor heads at the end of steel reinforcement (b) Anchorage by bending steel reinforcement 90°at the end

Figure 9.3.4 Anchorage of Upper Longitudinal Steel Reinforcement of Beam in End Joints at Intermediate-storey

9.3.5 For the intermediate joints at intermediate-storey of frame or the intermediate support of
continuous beam, the upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam shall penetrate through the joint
or support. The lower longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam should penetrate through the joint or
point. If they must be anchored, the following anchorage requirements shall be met:

1 Where the strength of this steel reinforcement is not used in calculation, the anchorage length
of this steel reinforcement extended into the joint or support shall not be less than 12d for ribbed steel
reinforcement and not be less than 15d for plain steel reinforcement (d is the maximum diameter of
steel reinforcement);

2 Where the compressive strength of steel reinforcement is fully used in calculation, the steel
reinforcement shall be anchored in the intermediate joints or intermediate supports according to
compressive steel reinforcement, and their linear anchorage length shall not be less than 0.7la;

3 Where the tensile strength of steel reinforcement is fully used in calculation, the steel
reinforcement may be anchored in the joints or supports in linear anchoring mode, their anchorage
length shall not be less than the tension anchorage length la of steel reinforcement (Figure 9.3.5a);

4 Where the sectional dimension of column is insufficient, the mechanical anchoring measure
by adding anchor heads at the ends of steel reinforcement should be adopted in accordance with
Clause 1 of Article 9.3.4 of this code or the anchorage mode of 90° bending may also be adopted;

5 The steel reinforcement may be provided with lap splice joints outside the joint or support
and at places where bending moment in the beam is small, the distance from the starting point of their
lap splice length to the edge of joint or support shall not be less than 1.5h0 (Figure 9.3.5b).

(a) Linear anchorage of lower longitudinal steel reinforcement in (b) Lap splice of lower longitudinal steel reinforcement outside
joint the scope of joint or support

Figure 9.3.5 Anchorage and Lap splice of Lower Longitudinal Steel Reinforcement of Beam within Scope of

116
 Intermediate Joint or Intermediate Support

9.3.6 The longitudinal steel reinforcement of column shall penetrate through the intermediate joint
at intermediate-storey or the end joint, and the joint shall be arranged outside the joint zone.

The anchorage of longitudinal steel reinforcement of column at the intermediate joint of top
storey shall meet the following requirements:

1 The longitudinal steel reinforcement of column shall be extended up to the column top, and
the anchorage length, counted from the beam bottom, shall not be less than la.

2 If the sectional dimension fails to meet the requirements on linear anchorage, the anchoring
measure of 90° bending may be adopted. Here, the anchorage length by the vertical projection of steel
reinforcement (including the arc) shall not be less than 0.5lab, and the horizontal projection length in
the bending plane (including the arc segment) should not be less than 12d (Figure 9.3.6a).

3 If the sectional dimension is insufficient, the mechanical anchoring measure with anchor
head may also be adopted, in this case, the vertical anchorage length with anchor head included shall
not be less than 0.5lab (Figure 9.3.6b).

(a) Anchorage of column longitudinal steel reinforcement by 90° (b) Anchorage of column longitudinal steel reinforcement by
bending adding anchoring end plate

Figure 9.3.6 Anchorage of Column Longitudinal Steel Reinforcement in the Joints of Top Storey

4 Where cast-in-situ floor slab is applied at the column top and the slab thickness is not less
than 100mm, the longitudinal steel reinforcement of column may also be bent outward and their
horizontal projection length after bending should not be less than 12d.

9.3.7 The outer longitudinal steel reinforcement of column at the top storey of end joint may be bent
into the beam to act as the upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of the beam; and the upper
longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam may also be overlapped with the outer longitudinal steel
reinforcement of column at the joints and the nearby positions, the following lap splice methods may
be adopted:

1 The lap splice joints may be arranged along the outer side of the top storey end joint and the
top of beam end, and the lap splice length shall not be less than 1.5lab (Figure 9.3.7a). Therein, the
cross-sectional area of the outer steel reinforcement of column extended into the beam should not be
less than 65% of the total area; the outer steel reinforcement of column beyond the scope of beam
width should be anchored along the top of column to the inner side of column. Where the outer
longitudinal steel reinforcement of column are located at the first layer of column top, they should,
after being extended into the inner side of column, should be bent down by no less than 8d (d is the
diameter of column longitudinal steel reinforcement) and be cut off (Figure 9.3.7a); where they are
located at the second layer of column top, they may not be bent down. If the thickness of cast-in-situ
117
slab is not less than 100mm, the outer longitudinal steel reinforcement of column beyond the beam
width may also be inserted into the cast-in-situ slab and the length is the same as that of the column
longitudinal steel reinforcement extended into the beam.

(a) Arrangement of lap splice joints along outer side of end joints (b) Linear arrangement of lap splice joints along outer side of
of top storey and top of beam end joints

Figure 9.3.7 In-joint Anchorage and Lap splice of Longitudinal Steel Reinforcement of Beam and Column at Top
storey of End Joints

2 In case the ratio of reinforcement of the outer longitudinal steel reinforcement of column is
larger than 1.2%, the longitudinal steel reinforcement of column extended into the beam shall comply
with 1 of this Article and should be cut off in two batches, the distance between cut points should
not be less than 20d (d is the diameter of outer longitudinal steel reinforcement of column). The upper
longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam shall be extended to the outer side of joint, bent down and
cut off at the depth position of the lower edge of beam.

3 The lap splice joints of longitudinal steel reinforcement may also be arranged linearly along
the outer side of the column top at the joint (Figure 9.3.7b). In this case, the lap splice length, counted
from the column top, shall not be less than 1.7lab. If the ratio of reinforcement of the upper longitudinal
steel reinforcement of beam is larger than 1.2%, the upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam
extended into the outer side of column shall comply with the lap splice length specified in Clause 1 of
this Article and should be cut off in two batches, the distance between the cutting points should not be
less than 20d (d is the diameter of upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam).

4 If the section depth of beam is relatively large, the longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam
and column are relatively small, and the linear lap splice length counted from the beam bottom has
already met the requirement on 1.5lab before extending up to the column top, then the lap splice length
shall be extended up to the column top and shall meet the requirement on the lap splice length of
1.7lab; or, if the lap splice length by bending, counted from the beam bottom, has already meet the
requirement on 1.5lab before extending to the inner edge of column, then the length of the horizontal
segment of bent steel reinforcement, with the arc included, shall not be less than 15d (d is the
diameter of longitudinal steel reinforcement of column).

5 The anchorage of inner longitudinal steel reinforcement of column shall meet the provisions
on intermediate joints of top storey given in Article 9.3.6 of this code.

9.3.8 The cross-sectional area As of upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam on the end joint
of top storey shall meet the following requirements:

118
 0.35 c f cbb h0
As  (9.3.8)
fy

Where bb——The width of the beam web;

h0——The effective depth of beam section.

If the diameter of steel reinforcement is not larger than 25mm, the internal radius of the arc of
upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam or outer longitudinal steel reinforcement of column at
the corner of the joint should not be less than 6d; otherwise, this internal radius should not be less than
8d. In the concrete outside the arc of steel reinforcement, anti-cracking and anti-peeling constructional
steel reinforcement shall be distributed.

9.3.9 Horizontal stirrups shall be distributed in the joints of frame, these stirrups shall meet the
detailing requirements on stirrups in column as stated in Article 9.3.2 of this code. However, their
spacing should not be larger than 250mm. For the intermediate joint with beams at four sides, the
rectangular stirrups may be only applied along the periphery in this joint. In case the lap splice joints
of upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of beam with outer longitudinal steel reinforcement of
column exist in the top storey end joint, the horizontal stirrups in the joint shall meet Article 8.4.6 of
this code.

(III) Brackets

9.3.10 The sectional dimension of the column bracket (Figure 9.3.10) with a≤h0 shall meet the
following requirements:

Figure 9.3.10 Appearance and Steel Reinforcement Arrangement of Bracket

Note: Dimensional unit in the Figure is mm.
1—upper column; 2—lower column; 3—bent-up steel reinforcement; 4—horizontal stirrup

1 Requirements for crack control of bracket

119
  F  f bh
Fvk   1  0.5 hk  tk 0 (9.3.10)
 Fvk  0.5  a
h0

Where Fvk——The value of vertical force acting on top of the bracket and calculated according to
the characteristic combination of load effects;

Fhk——The value of horizontal tensile force acting on top of the bracket and calculated
according to the characteristic combination of load effects;

β——The crack control coefficient, which is 0.65 for the bracket supporting the crane
girder and is 0.80 for other brackets;

a——The horizontal distance from the acting point of vertical force to the edge of lower
column, for which the installation deviation of 20mm shall be considered; a is
equal to zero in case the acting point of vertical force with consideration of
installation deviation is still in the section of lower column;

b——The width of bracket;

h0——The effective depth of vertical section at the connecting position of bracket and
lower column, h0=h1－as+c · tanα, in which, α will be taken as 45° if a>45°, and c is
the horizontal length from the edge of lower column to the outer edge of bracket.

2 The depth h1 of the outer edge of bracket shall not be less than h/3 or 200mm.

3 The local compressive stress caused by vertical force Fvk on the top compression plane of
bracket shall not exceed 0.75fc.

9.3.11 In the bracket, the gross cross-sectional area of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement,
which is composed of the cross-sectional area of the tensile steel reinforcement required to bear the
vertical force and the cross-sectional area of the anchor bars required for bearing the horizontal tensile
force, shall meet the following requirement:

Fv a F
As   1.2 h (9.3.11)
0.85 f y h0 fy

Here, a will be taken as 0.3h0 in case a<0.3h0.

Where Fv——The design value of vertical force acting at top of bracket;

Fh——The design value of horizontal tensile force acting at top of bracket.

9.3.12 The longitudinal steel reinforcement distributed along the top of bracket should adopt the hot
rolled ribbed steel rebars of Grade HRB400 or Grade HRB500. All the longitudinal steel
reinforcement and bent-up steel reinforcement should be cut off after being extended down into the
lower column by 150mm along the outer edge of bracket.

The anchorage length of longitudinal steel reinforcement and bent-up steel reinforcement extended
into the upper column shall not be less than the anchorage length la of tensile steel reinforcement as
specified in Article 8.3.1 of this code if the linear anchorage mode is adopted; in case the dimension
of upper column is insufficient, the anchorage of steel reinforcement shall comply with the provisions
120
in Article 9.3.4 of this code on the anchorage by 90° bending of upper steel reinforcement of beam in
the intermediate-storey end joints of frame. In this case, the anchorage length shall be counted from
the inner side of upper column.

The reinforcement ratio of longitudinal steel reinforcement required for carrying the vertical
force shall not be less than 0.20% or 0.45ft/fy and should also not be larger than 0.60%, the amount of
steel reinforcement should not be less than 4 and the diameter of steel reinforcement shall be 12mm.

If the bracket is set at the top of upper column, the outer longitudinal steel reinforcement of
column at opposite side to the bracket may be horizontally bent into the bracket along the column top
to act as the longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement of bracket. If the top longitudinal tensile steel
reinforcement of bracket is applied separately from the outer longitudinal steel reinforcement of
column at opposite side to the bracket, it shall be bent into the outer side of the column and shall also
meet provisions in Article 8.4.4 of this code on the lap splice of steel reinforcement.

9.3.13 The bracket shall be provided with horizontal stirrups, the diameter of stirrup should be from
6mm to 12mm and the spacing of stirrups should be from 100mm to 150mm; the gross cross-sectional
area of stirrups within a scope of 2h0/3 at the upper portion should not be less than 1/2 of the
cross-sectional area of tensile steel reinforcement carrying the vertical force.

Where the shear span ratio of bracket is not less than 0.3, proper number of bent-up steel
reinforcement should be provided. The bent-up steel reinforcement should adopt the hot rolled ribbed
steel rebars of Grade HRB400 or Grade HRB500, their intersection point with the connecting line
from the acting point of concentrated load to the lower extreme point of sloped edge of bracket should
be located in a scope of l/6~l/2 at the upper portion of bracket (l is the length of this connecting line)
(Figure 9.3.10). The cross-sectional area of bent-up steel reinforcement should not be less than 1/2 of
the cross-sectional area of the tensile steel reinforcement carrying vertical force or two steel rebars
with diameter of 12mm. The longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement shall not be used as bent-up steel
reinforcement.

9.4 Walls

9.4.1 If the ratio between the long side and short side (thickness) of the section of vertical member is
larger than 4, this member should be designed according to the requirements of wall.

The thickness of the wall supporting precast floor (roof) slab should not be less than 140mm; for
the shear wall structure, the thickness should also not be less than 1/25 of the storey height; and for
the frame-shear wall structure should also not be less than 1/20 of the storey height.

Where the precast slab is adopted, the thickness of supporting wall shall meet the requirements
on the penetration of vertical steel reinforcement in wall.

9.4.2 The wall with thickness larger than 160mm shall arrange two layers of steel meshes; for the
shear wall at important position in the structure, if the thickness is not larger than 160mm, it shall also
arrange two layers of steel meshes.

These two layers of steel meshes shall be arranged along two side faces of the wall and shall be
connected by tie bars; the diameter of tie bar should not be less than 6mm and the spacing of tie bars
should not be larger than 600mm.

9.4.3 Under the action of horizontal loads and vertical loads that are parallel to wall surface, the
121
calculation of normal section load-carrying capacity shall be carried out for the wall as an eccentric
compression or eccentric tension member specified in Section 6.2 of this code. Moreover, the
calculation of inclined section shear capacity shall also be carried out based on the relevant provisions
in Section 6.3 of this code. At the area of concentrated loads, the calculation of local bearing capacity
shall also be carried out in accordance with Section 6.6 of this code.

In calculation of load-carrying capacity, the calculated width of the flange of shear wall may take
the minimum value among the spacing of shear walls, the width of wing wall between doors and
windows, the thickness of shear wall plus six times of the thickness of wing walls on both sides as
well as the 1/10 of the total height of shear wall columns.

9.4.4 For horizontal and vertical steel rebars in a wall, their diameter should not be less than 8mm
and their spacing should not be larger than 300mm. Welded steel mesh may be used as wall
reinforcement.

Ash
In the wall, both the ratio of reinforcement ρsh ( , sv is the spacing of horizontal steel
bsv

Asv
reinforcement) of the horizontal steel reinforcement in wall and the ratio of reinforcement ρsv ( , sh
bsh
is the spacing of vertical steel reinforcement) of vertical steel reinforcement should not be less than
0.20%; in the walls at important positions, the ratio of reinforcement of the horizontal and vertical
steel reinforcement should be increased appropriately.

At the positions having high temperature or shrinkage stress, the ratio of reinforcement of
horizontal steel reinforcement should be increased appropriately.

9.4.5 For the wall with height of building no larger than 10m and the number of storeys no larger
than 3, the thickness of its section shall not be less than 120mm, and the ratio of reinforcement of both
the horizontal and vertical steel reinforcement in it should not be less than 0.15%.

9.4.6 The reinforcement detailing in wall shall meet the following requirements:

1 The vertical steel reinforcement of the wall may be overlapped at the same height, and the lap
splice length shall not be less than 1.2la.

2 The lap splice length of the horizontal steel reinforcement of wall shall not be less than 1.2la.
The clear spacing along the horizontal direction between the lap splice joints of the same row of
horizontal steel reinforcement as well as that between the lap splice joints of the up and down adjacent
horizontally distributed steel reinforcement should not be less than 500mm.

3 The horizontal steel reinforcement in the wall shall be extended to the wall ends and be
horizontally bent inward by 10d (d is the diameter of steel reinforcement).

4 For the wall having wings or corners at the end, the horizontal steel reinforcement on both
sides of the inner wall and on inner side of the outer wall shall be extended beyond the wing or corner
and shall be horizontally bent by 15d towards both sides respectively. At the corner, the horizontal
steel reinforcement on outer side of outer wall shall be bent into the wing at the exterior angle of wall
end and be overlapped with the horizontal steel reinforcement on outer side of wing.

5 For the wall with a frame, the horizontal and vertical distributed steel reinforcement should
122
penetrate through the column and beam respectively or be anchored in the column and beam.

9.4.7 The coupling beam at wall opening shall be arranged with stirrups along the full length, the
diameter of stirrup shall not be less than 6mm and spacing of stirrups should not be larger than
150mm. In the scope of the anchorage length of the longitudinal steel reinforcement for coupling
beam at top storey opening extended into the wall, the stirrups shall be distributed with spacing no
larger than 150mm, and the diameter of stirrup should be the same as the diameter of those stirrups in
the span. Meanwhile, the vertical steel reinforcement at the edges of the door and window openings
shall meet the requirements on anchorage length of tensile steel reinforcement.

The upper and lower horizontal steel reinforcement on both sides of wall opening shall meet the
requirements on flexural capacity of normal section of the coupling beam for opening, and at least two
steel reinforcement in diameter no less than 12mm shall be arranged. As for the openings that are
negligible in calculation and analysis, the cross-sectional area of steel reinforcement on edges of these
openings should not be less than one half of the gross cross-sectional area of those horizontal steel
reinforcement cut off at the opening. The length of the longitudinal steel reinforcement extended from
the opening edge into the wall shall not be less than the anchorage length of tensile steel
reinforcement.

9.4.8 Vertical load-carrying steel reinforcement shall be applied on both ends of the column of shear
wall and be used for the calculation for the flexural capacity of normal section of wall together with
the vertical steel reinforcement in the wall. The vertical load-carrying steel reinforcement at each end
should not be less than four steel reinforcement in diameter of 12mm or 2 steel reinforcement in
diameter 16mm, and should also provided with stirrups or tie bars in diameter no less than 6mm at
spacing of 250mm along the direction of this vertical steel reinforcement.

9.5 Composite Members

(I) Horizontal Composite Members

9.5.1 Horizontal composite flexural members formed by two phases shall have reliable support
during the construction stage if the height of precast member is less than 40% of the total section
depth.

Composite flexural members having reliable support during the construction stage may be
designed and calculated as integral flexural members. However, the shear capacity of the inclined
section and the shear capacity of the composite interface shall be calculated in accordance with
Appendix H of this code.

For composite flexural members having no support during the construction stage, the bottom
precast members and entire concreted composite members shall be carried out with load calculation
by two phases according to the requirements stated in Appendix H of this code.

9.5.2 The concrete composite beam and slab shall meet the following requirements:

1 The thickness of composite layer concrete of composite beam should not be less than 100mm
and the concrete strength grade should not be less than C30. All the stirrups of precast beam shall be
extended into the composite layer, the length of the straight segment of each leg extending into the
composite layer should not be less than 10d (d is the diameter of stirrup). The top surface of precast
beam shall be built into such a rough surface with unevenness no less than 6mm.
123
 2 The thickness of composite layer concrete of composite slab shall not be less than 40mm and
the concrete strength grade should not be less than C25. The surface of precast slab shall be made into
such a rough surface with unevenness no less than 4mm. For the composite slab carrying relatively
large load and the prestressed composite slab, constructional steel reinforcement extending into the
composite layer shall be distributed on the precast bottom slab.

9.5.3 The flexural members concreted on the floor slabs and roofs of existing structures shall meet
Article 9.5.2 of this code and shall be carried out with the calculation of construction stage and service
stage in accordance with relevant provisions stated in Section 3.3 and Section 3.7 of this code.

(II) Vertical Composite Members

9.5.4 Composite columns and walls formed with precast members and post-cast concrete shall be
respectively carried out with the calculation of precast member and integral structure according to the
working conditions during construction stage and service stage.

9.5.5 For vertical composite members formed by concreting at the periphery of column or on side
face of wall in the existing structures, their load bearing history and the roof supporting conditions in
construction shall be taken into account, and the calculation of load-carrying capacity for construction
stage and service stage shall be carried out in accordance with the principles stated in Section 3.3 and
Section 3.7 of this code.

9.5.6 For vertical composite columns and walls relying on existing structures, the calculation of
load-carrying capacity during the service stage shall take into account the influence of the changes in
geometric parameters of existing members in accordance with the measured results.

The design values of strength of concrete and steel reinforcement for vertical composite column
and existing members of wall shall be determined in accordance with Article 3.7.3 of this code; the
strength of concrete and steel reinforcement in the part of post-cast concrete shall determined by
multiplying the reduction coefficient of strength utilization in accordance with Chapter 4 of this code
and should be adjusted appropriately by considering the actual roof supporting conditions in
construction.

9.5.7 The thickness of the secondary concrete layer around the column shall not be less than 60mm
and the concrete strength grade shall not be less than the strength grade of concrete in existing columns.
The unevenness of rough joint surface shall not be less than 6mm, and the constructional steel
reinforcement shall be distributed in the interface by such methods as bar planting and welding. The
diameter of the longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement in the post-cast layer shall not be less
than 14mm; the diameter of stirrup shall not be less than 8mm or the diameter of corresponding
stirrup in column, and the stirrup spacing shall be the same as those in the column.

The thickness of the secondary concrete layer over the wall shall not be less than 50mm and the
concrete strength grade shall not be less than the strength grade of concrete in existing walls. The
unevenness of rough interface shall not be less than 4mm, and the constructional steel reinforcement
shall be distributed in the interface by such methods as bar planting and welding. The diameter of
vertical and horizontal steel reinforcement in the post-cast layer should not be less than 8mm and shall
not be less than the diameter of corresponding steel reinforcement in wall.

9.6 Precast Concrete Structures

124
9.6.1 All the precast members and connection constructions in the precast concrete structures and
assembled monolithic concrete structures shall be designed in accordance with the following
principles:

1 The arrangement and connecting mode of precast members shall be determined in the
structural scheme and force transfer route, based on which the analysis of integral structure and the
design of members and connections shall be carried out;

2 The design of precast members shall meet the functions of building and meet the standardization
requirements;

3 The connection of precast members should be set at the part with small stress in the structure
and should be convenient for construction; the connection construction between structural members
shall meet the requirements on internal force transfer of structure;

4 All kinds of precast members and their connection constructions shall be checked in
accordance with the unfavorable working conditions that may be produced during the production,
construction and service process, and those for the precast non-load-carrying members shall also meet
Article 9.6.8 of this code.

9.6.2 During the production and construction process, the precast concrete members shall be carried
out with analysis of construction stage in accordance with the loads, calculation diagrams and strength
of solid concrete of actual working conditions. In the analysis, the self-weight of member shall be
multiplied by the corresponding dynamic factor: this dynamic factor may be taken as 1.5 during
demoulding, turning, hoisting and transportation and taken as 1.2 for temporary fixation.

Note: The dynamic factor may also be increased or decreased appropriately according to specific conditions.

9.6.3 The connection construction of various precast members in precast concrete structures and
assembled monolithic concrete structures shall be convenient for the installation and monolithic
assembly. For the connection without consideration of internal force transfer in the calculation also
shall have reliable fixation measures.

9.6.4 The longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement of frame beam in assembled monolithic
structure as well as the vertical load-carrying steel reinforcement in columns and walls should adopt
such forms as mechanical connection and welding; the load-carrying steel reinforcement in such
members as slabs and walls may adopt the lap splice connection form; the concrete interface shall be
carried out with roughing treatment or made into groove; the splicing points shall be grouted with
such concrete with strength grade no less than that of precast member.

At the beam-column joints in assembled monolithic structures, the longitudinal steel reinforcement of
columns shall penetrate through the joint; the longitudinal steel reinforcement of beams shall meet the
anchorage requirements stated in Section 9.3 of this code.

Where the columns are adopted with assembled joggle joints, the axial compression
load-carrying capacity of the section in the sector near to the joint should be 1.3~1.5 times of the
load-carrying capacity required in the calculation of this section. On this occasion, measures, like
adding transverse steel mesh reinforcement in the concrete of joints and the sectors nearby, improving
the post-placed concrete strength grade and distributing additional longitudinal steel reinforcement,
shall be taken.

9.6.5 The assembled monolithic floor and roof adopting with precast slab shall be taken with the
125
following detailing measures:

1 Precast slabs shall be made into double-geared edges; the upper opening width of the edge
joint shall not be less than 30mm; plugs shall be set in the end holes of hollow slabs and the depth of
plug in the hole should not be less than 60mm; and the edge joint shall be grouted with fine stone
concrete with strength grade no less than C30;

2 The ends of precast slabs should be connected with the out-extending anchored steel
reinforcement, and also should be spliced with the steel reinforcement extended out of the supporting
structures (ring beam, beam top or wall crown) of slabs and the full-length steel reinforcement
distributed in the edge joints at slab ends.

9.6.6 For the assembled monolithic floor and roof having high requirements on integrity, the form of
precast members with cast-in-situ composite layers shall be adopted; or, the reinforced concrete post-
placed strip shall be arranged one the sides of precast slab, and negative moment steel reinforcement
and steel tie bars distributed along the edge joint at periphery of slab shall be applied to connect with
the support.

9.6.7 In assembled monolithic structures, the connecting steel reinforcement distributed along the
periphery of precast load-carrying wall slab shall be connected with the supporting structure and the
adjacent wall slab and also shall be concreted to form into one entirety with the peripheral floors and
walls.

9.6.8 The design of non-load-carrying precast members shall meet the following requirements:

1 The non-load-carrying precast members should adopt flexible connection with the supporting
structures;

2 If inlaying the non-load-carrying precast members in frames or adopting welded connection,

their influence on the lateral stiffness of frame shall be taken in account;

3 The connection construction between cladding panel and the major structure shall have a
certain deformation adaptability.

9.7 Embedded Parts and Connecting Pieces

9.7.1 Anchoring plates of load-carrying embedded parts should adopt steel of Grade Q235 or Q345,
the thickness of anchoring plate shall be determined through calculation according to the stressing
condition and should not be less than 60% of the diameter of anchor bar; the thickness of the
anchoring plates of tension or flexural embedded parts should also be larger than b/8 (b is the spacing
of anchor bars).

The anchor bars of load-carrying embedded parts shall adopt the HRB400 or HPB300 steel
reinforcement but shall not adopt the cold-processed steel reinforcement.

Straight anchor bars and anchoring plates shall adopt the T-type welding. If the diameter of
anchor bar is not larger than 20mm, the submerged arc pressure welding shall be adopted; otherwise,
the perforated plug welding should be adopted. Where the manual welding is adopted, the weld bead
height should not be less than 6mm, and also should not be less than 0.5d for steel reinforcement of
Grade 300MPa and should not be less than 0.6d for other steel reinforcement (d is the diameter of
anchor bar).

126
9.7.2 For load-carrying embedded parts composed of anchoring plates and symmetrically arranged
straight anchor bars (Figure 9.7.2), the gross cross-sectional area As of anchor bars shall meet the
following requirements:

1 If shear force, normal tension and bending moment are present simultaneously, the gross
cross-sectional area shall be calculated according to the following two expressions and be taken as the
larger value between the calculated results:

V N M
As    (9.7.2-1)
 r v f y 0.8 b f y 1.3 r b f y z

N M
As   (9.7.2-2)
0.8 b f y 0.4 r b f y z

Figure 9.7.2 Embedded Parts Composed of Anchoring Plates and Straight Anchor Bars
1—anchoring plate; 2—straight anchor bar

2 If shear force, normal compressive force and bending moment are present simultaneously, the
gross cross-sectional area shall be calculated according to the following two expressions and be taken
as the larger value between the calculated results:

V  0.3 N M  0.4 Nz
As   (9.7.2-3)
 r v f y 1.3 r b f y z

M  0.4 Nz
As  (9.7.2-4)
0.4 r b f y z

If M <0.4Nz, M=0.4Nz.

Coefficients αv and αb in the above expressions shall be calculated according to the following
expressions:

fc
 v  (4.0  0.08d ) (9.7.2-5)
fy

t
 b  0.6  0.25 (9.7.2-6)
d
127
 If av>0.7, av=0.7; and αb=1.0 if the measures preventing the flexural deformation of anchoring
plates are taken.

Where fy——The design value of tensile strength of anchor bar, which shall be adopted in
accordance with Section 4.2 of this code but shall not be larger than 300N/mm2;

V——The design value of shear force;

N——The design value of normal tension or normal compressive force, the design value of
normal compressive force shall not be larger than 0.5fcA, hereof, A is the area of
anchoring plate;

M——The design value of bending moment;

αr——The influence coefficient of the number of layers of anchor bars; if the anchor bars
are arranged with equal spacing: αr=1.0 for two layers; αr=0.9 for three layers;
αr=0.85 for four layers;

αv——The shear capacity coefficient of anchor bar;

d——The diameter of anchor bar;

αb——The reduction coefficient for flexural deformation of anchoring plate;

t——The thickness of anchoring plate;

z——The distance between center lines of the anchor bars at the outmost layer along the
acting direction of shear force.

9.7.3 For embedded parts in which the shear force is carried jointly by the anchoring plate,
symmetrically arranged bent anchor bars and straight anchor bars (Figure 9.7.3), the cross-sectional
area Asb of the bent anchor bars shall meet the following requirements:

V
Asb  1.4  1.25 v As (9.7.3)
fy

Where, coefficient αv is adopted in accordance with Article 9.7.2 of this code. If the straight
anchor bar is provided according to the detailing requirements, As shall be taken as 0.

Figure 9.7.3 Embedded Parts Composed of Anchoring Plates, Bent Anchor Bars and Straight Anchor Bars
Note: The included angle between bent anchor bar and steel plate should not be less than 15°but not larger than 45°.

9.7.4 For the embedded parts, the distance from the center of anchor bar to the edge of anchoring
plate shall not be less than 2d or 20mm.The embedded part shall be located with its anchor bar being
at the inner side of the outer layer main steel reinforcement of the member.

128
 The diameter of the straight anchor bars for embedded parts should not be less than 8mm and not
be larger than 25mm. The number of straight anchor bars should not be less than four, and the rows of
straight anchor bars should not be more than four; the number of straight anchor bars for shear
embedded parts may be two.

For tension and flexural embedded parts (Figure 9.7.2), the spacing b and b1 of their anchor bars
and the distance c and c1 from the anchor bar to the edge of member shall all not be less than 3d or
45mm.

For shear embedded parts (Figure 9.7.2), the spacing b and b1 of their anchor bars shall not be
larger than 300mm, and b1 shall not be less than 6d or 70mm; the distance c1 from the anchor bar to
the edge of member shall not be less than 6d or 70mm, and both b and c shall not be less than 3d or
45mm.

The anchorage length of tension straight anchor bar and bent anchor bar shall not be less than the
anchorage length of tensile steel reinforcement as stated in Article 8.3.1 of this code; if the anchor
bars adopt the steel reinforcement of Grade HPB300, their ends shall also be made into hooks. If the
requirements for anchorage length can not be met, other effective anchoring measures shall be taken.
The anchorage length of shear and compression straight anchor bars shall not be less than 15d (d is
the diameter of anchor bar).

9.7.5 The precast members should be adopted with embedded nuts, embedded hanger rod or
preformed lifting hole as well as the mating special lifting tools to conduct the hoisting, and the
hanging rings for the hoisting may also be adopted.

The design and construction of embedded nut or embedded hanger rod shall meet the requirements
on convenience and safety of hoisting. The special embedded nuts or embedded hanger rods and the
mating lifting tools shall be selected in accordance with the corresponding product standards and the
requirements of application technologies.

9.7.6 The hanging rings shall be manufactured with HPB300 steel reinforcement, it shall be
anchored into concrete by a depth no less than 30d and shall be welded or banded onto the framework
of steel reinforcement, here, d is the diameter of steel reinforcement for hanging ring. Under the
action of the characteristic self-weight value of the member, the reinforcement stress of each hanging
ring calculated according to two sections shall not be larger than 65N/mm2; where four hanging rings
are set on one member, the reinforcement stress shall be calculated according to three hanging rings.

9.7.7 The position of the hoisting facilities for precast concrete members shall be able to ensure the
steady stressing of member during the hoisting and transportation process. If arranging embedded
parts, hanging rings, lifting holes and various embedded preformed lifting tools, the effect of hoisting
loads withstood by the member at these positions shall be checked in load-carrying capacity analysis
and corresponding detailing measures also shall be taken so as to avoid local failure of concrete at the
lifting point.

129
 10 Prestressed Concrete Structural Members

10.1 General

10.1.1 For prestressed concrete structural members, in addition to the calculation of

load-carrying capacity and serviceability limit states analysis according to the design conditions,
analysis for construction stage shall also be carried out.

10.1.2 Effects of prestress shall be included in the design of prestressed concrete structures; for
statically indeterminate structures, corresponding secondary bending moments, secondary shear forces
and secondary axial forces shall be included in the combination calculation.

For ultimate limit states, the partial coefficient of the prestress γp shall be taken as 1.0 if effects of
prestress are in favor of the structure, otherwise it shall be taken as 1.2; for serviceability limit states,
the partial coefficient of the prestress γp shall be taken as 1.0.

For prestress participated in the combination, if effects of prestress are favorable for the
load-carrying capacity, the coefficient for importance of structure γ0 shall be taken as 1.0; if effects of
prestress are unfavorable for the load-carrying capacity, the coefficient γ0 shall be determined
according to Article 3.3.2 of this code.

10.1.3 The tension control stress of the prestressing tendons σcon shall meet the following
requirements:

1 Stress-relieved steel wires and steel strands

σcon≤0.75fptk (10.1.3-1)

2 Medium-strength prestressed wires

σcon≤0.70fptk (10.1.3-2)

3 Prestressing deformed steel reinforcement

σcon≤0.85fpyk (10.1.3-3)

Where fptk——The characteristic value of ultimate strength for the prestressing tendons;

fpyk——The characteristic value of yield strength for the prestressing deformed steel
reinforcement.

The tension control stress of stress-relieved steel wires, steel strands and medium-strength
prestressing wires shall not be less than 0.4fptk; while the tension control stress of prestressing
deformed steel reinforcement should not be less than 0.5fpyk.

The limit value of the above-mentioned tension control stress may be proportionately increased
by 0.05fptk or 0.05fpyk if one of the following conditions is met:

1) The prestressing tendons are required to arrange in the compression zone at service stage
in order to improve the crack resistance of members in construction stage;

2) The loss of prestress caused by such factors as the stress relaxation, friction, tensioning
of the steel reinforcement in batches and the temperature difference between prestressing

130
 tendons and the stretching bed is required to counteract partially.

10.1.4 When applying the prestress, the required concrete cube compressive strength shall be
determined by calculation, but it should not be less than 75% of the designed concrete strength grade
value.

Note: If tensioning of prestressing tendons is to prevent shrinkage cracks appeared in the early stage, it may be free from the
above-mentioned restrictions, but it shall meet the requirements of local bearing capacity.

10.1.5 For statically indeterminate structures of post-tensioned prestressed concrete, the elastic
theory may be adopted for the analysis of internal force and deformation caused by the prestress and
the following requirements should be met:

1 The secondary bending moment M2 should be calculated according to the following

expressions if the calculation is based on the elastic analysis:

M2=Mr－M1 (10.1.5-1)

M1=Npepn (10.1.5-2)

Where Np——The jacking force for post-tensioned prestressed concrete members shall be
calculated according to Expression (10.1.7-3) of this code;

epn——The distance from the centroid of the net section to the acting point of the jacking
force, calculated according to Expression (10.1.7-4) of this code;

M1——The value for the bending moment of the eccentricity of the net section centroid
caused by the jacking force Np;

Mr——The value for the bending moment on the section of the structural member caused
by the equivalent load of the jacking force Np.

The secondary shear force may be calculated according to the distribution analysis for the
secondary bending moment of the member, and the secondary axial force should be calculated
according to the constraint conditions of the structure.

2 Measures should be taken in the design to avoid or reduce adverse effects of constraint
members such as supports, columns and walls on effects of the prestress of beams and slabs.

10.1.6 The concrete normal stress caused by the jacking force and corresponding stress in
prestressing tendons may be calculated according to the following expressions respectively:

1 Pretension members

The concrete normal stress caused by the jacking force

N p0 N p 0 ep0
 pc   y0 (10.1.6-1)
A0 I0

Corresponding effective stress in prestressing tendons

σpe=σcon－σl－αEσpc (10.1.6-2)

When the concrete normal stress at the point of resultant force of the prestressing tendons is
equal to zero, the stress of the prestressing tendons is
131
 σp0=σcon－σl (10.1.6-3)

2 Post-tensioned members

The concrete normal stress caused by the jacking force is

Np N p epn
 pc   yn   p 2 (10.1.6-4)
An In

Corresponding effective stress in prestressing tendons

σpe=σcon－σl (10.1.6-5)

When the concrete normal stress at the point of resultant force of the prestressing tendons is
equal to zero, the stress of the prestressing tendon is

σp0=σcon－σl+αEσpc (10.1.6-6)

Where An——The area of the net section, namely the sum of the total cross-sectional area of the
concrete by deducting the area of weakened parts such as ducts and grooves and the
cross-sectional area of concrete converted from the cross-sectional area of longitudinal
non-prestressing tendons; for the section composed of concrete with different
strength grades, the area shall be converted to the cross-sectional area of the same
concrete strength grade according to the ratio of the elastic modulus of the concrete;

A0——The transformed cross-sectional area including the net sectional area and the
cross-sectional area of concrete converted from the cross-sectional area of all
longitudinal prestressing tendons;

I0, In——The moment of inertia for the transformed section, the moment of inertia for the net
section, respectively;

ep0, epn——The distances from the transformed section centroid and the net section centroid to
the acting point of the jacking force respectively, calculated according to the
requirements of Article 10.1.7 of this code;

y0, yn——The distances from the transformed section centroid and the net section centroid to
the calculated fiber respectively;

σl——The prestress loss at the corresponding stage, calculated according to the

requirements of Article 10.2.1~Article 10.2.7 of this code;

αE——The ratio of the elastic modulus of the steel reinforcement to the elastic modulus of
the concrete; αE=Es/Ec, hereof, Es shall be adopted according to Table 4.2.5 of this
code, and Ec shall be adopted according to Table 4.1.5 of this code;

Np0, Np——The jacking force for pretensioned members and post-tensioned members
respectively, calculated according to Article 10.1.7 of this code;

σp2——The normal stress of concrete section caused by the secondary internal force of the
prestress.
Note: In Expression (10.1.6-1) and Expression (10.1.6-4), if the stress direction of the second item on the right and first item is same,
taking the plus sign, if not, taking the minus sign; Expression (10.1.6-2) and Expression (10.1.6-6) are applicable to the
condition that σpc is the compressive stress, if σpc is the tensile stress, the negative value shall be substituted in.
132
10.1.7 The jacking force and the eccentricity of the acting point (Figure 10.1.7) should be calculated
according to the following expressions:

(a) Pretension Member (b) Post-tensioned Member

Figure 10.1.7 Position of Action Point for Jacking Force

1—gravity axis of the transformed section; 2—gravity axis of the net section

1 Pretensioned members

N p0   p0 Ap   p0
 Ap   l 5 As   l5 As (10.1.7-1)

 p0 Ap yp   p0
 Ap yp   l 5 As ys   l5 As ys
ep0  (10.1.7-2)
 p0 Ap   p0
 Ap   l 5 As   l5 As

2 Post-tensioned members

N p   pe Ap   pe
 Ap   l 5 As   l5 As (10.1.7-3)

 pe Ap ypn   pe Ap ypn

   l 5 As ysn   l5 As ysn
epn  (10.1.7-4)
 pe Ap   pe Ap   l 5 As   l5 As

Where  p0 ,  p0
 ——The stresses of the prestressing tendons in tension zone and compression zone
respectively under the condition that the concrete normal stress at the point of
the resultant force of the prestressing tendons is equal to zero;
 pe ,  pe ——The effective prestresses of the prestressing tendons in tension zone and
compression zone respectively;

Ap , Ap ——The cross-sectional areas of the longitudinal prestressing tendons in tension

zone and compression zone respectively;

As , As ——The cross-sectional areas of longitudinal steel rebars in tension zone and
compression zone respectively;

yp , yp ——The distances from the point of the resultant force of prestress to the
transformed section centroids in tension zone and compression zone
respectively;

ys , ys ——The distances from the steel rebar centroid to the transformed section centroids
in tension zone and compression zone respectively;

133
  l 5 ,  l5 ——The prestressing losses due to concrete shrinkage and creep at the point of the
resultant force of the prestressing tendons in tension zone and compression
zone respectively, calculated according to the requirements of Article 10.2.5 of
this code;

 ——The distances from the point of the resultant force of prestress to the net
ypn , ypn
section centroids in tension zone and compression zone respectively;

ysn , ysn ——The distances from the steel rebar centroid to the net section centroids in
tension zone and compression zone respectively.

Note: 1 In Expression (10.1.7-1) ~ Expression (10.1.7-4), where Ap  0 , then  l5  0 ;

2 When calculating the secondary internal force, σl5 and  l5 in Expression (10.1.7-3) and Expression (10.1.7-4) may
approximately adopt zero.

10.1.8 For bonded post-tensioned prestressed concrete frame beams and continuous beams allowed
to have cracks, when the calculation is according to ultimate limit states under the action of gravity
load, redistribution of internal forces may be considered and the requirements for serviceability limit
states analysis shall be satisfied. If the relative depth of compression zone ξ is not less than 0.1 and
not larger than 0.3, the design value of the maximum negative bending moment on the section of the
support in any span may be determined according to the following expressions:

M=(1－β)(MGQ+M2) (10.1.8-1)

β=0.2(1－2.5ξ) (10.1.8-2)

The modulated amplitude should not exceed 20% of the design value for the bending moment
under the gravity load.

Where M——The design value of the bending moment on the control section of the support;

MGQ——The design value of the bending moment on the control section under the gravity
load calculated according to the elastic analysis;

ξ——The relative depth of compression zone, calculated according to the requirements in

Chapter 6 of this code;

β——The amplitude modulation coefficient for the bending moment.

10.1.9 The transfer length of prestress ltr for the prestressing tendons in the pretensioned members
shall be calculated according to the following expression:

 pe
ltr   d (10.1.9)
f tk

Where σpe——The effective prestress of the prestressing tendon at release;

d——The nominal diameter of the prestressing tendons, adopted according to Appendix A

of this code;

α——The appearance coefficient of the prestressing tendons, adopted according to Table

8.3.1 of this code;
134
 f tk ——The characteristic value of axial tensile strength corresponding to the concrete cube
compressive strength f cu at release of prestress, determined by linear interpolation
specified in Table 4.1.3-2 of this code.

When sudden release approach is adopted, for prestressing wires with smooth surface, the
starting point of ltr shall be calculated from the place where ltr/4 away from the tail end of the member.

10.1.10 When calculating the bend capacity of normal section and inclined section in the end
anchorage zone of pretensioned prestressed concrete members, the design value of tensile strength of
prestressing tendons within the range of anchorage length shall be taken as zero at the starting point of
the anchorage, shall be taken as fpy at the end point of the anchorage and shall be determined
according to linear interpolation method between these two points. The anchorage length la of
prestressing tendons shall be determined according to Article 8.3.1 of this code.

When sudden release approach is adopted, for prestressing wires with smooth surface, the
anchorage length shall be calculated from the place where ltr/4 away from the tail end of the member.

10.1.11 For members allowed to have tensile stress in pretension zone at such construction stages as
manufacture, transportation and installation, or members with total section compressed in prepressing,
the normal stress of concrete at the edge of the section under action of the jacking force, self-weight
and construction loads (the dynamic factor shall be considered if necessary) should meet the
following requirements (Figure 10.1.11):

 ct  f tk (10.1.11-1)

 cc  0.8 f ck (10.1.11-2)

(a) Pretensioned Members (b) Post-tensioned Members

Figure 10.1.11 Checking of Prestressed Concrete Member at Construction Stage

1—gravity axis of the transformed section; 2—gravity axis of the net section

The concrete tensile stress of fiber at the edge of the section in pretension zone at the end of
simply-supported members is allowed to larger than f tk but shall not be larger than 1.2 f tk .

The concrete normal stress at the edge of the section may be calculated according to the
following expression:

Nk M k
σcc or  ct   pc   (10.1.11-3)
A0 W0

Where σct——The concrete tensile stress of fiber at the edge of calculated section in pretension zone
at corresponding construction stage;
135
 σcc——The concrete compressive stress of fiber at the edge of calculated section in
precompression zone at corresponding construction stage;

f tk , f ck ——The characteristic values for the tensile strength and the compressive strength
corresponding to the concrete cube compressive strength f cu at each construction
stage respectively, determined according to the linear interpolation method specified
in Table 4.1.3-2 and Table 4.1.3-1 of this code respectively;

Nk, Mk——The values for the axial force and the bending moment on the calculated section
caused by the characteristic combination of the member self-weight and construction
loads respectively;

W0——The elastic section modulus of transformed section.at the extreme fibre

Note: 1 The pretension zone and precompression zone refer to the section tensile stress zone and compressive stress zone formed if
applying the prestress respectively;

2 In Expression (10.1.11-3), if σpc is the compressive stress, the positive value shall be adopted; if σpc is the tensile stress, the
negative value shall be adopted; if Nk is the axial compressive force, the positive value shall be adopted; if Nk is the axial
tensile force, the negative value shall be adopted; if the external fiber stress caused by Mk is the compressive stress, the plus
sign shall be adopted for the symbol in the expression; if it is the tensile stress, the minus sign shall be adopted for the
symbol in the expression;

3 If there is reliable engineering experience, the normal tensile stress of the concrete in pretension zone for composite flexural
members may be controlled basing on that σct is not larger than 2 f tk .

10.1.12 For members allowed to have tensile stress in pretension zone at construction stage, the
ratio of reinforcement ( As  Ap ) /A of the longitudinal steel reinforcement in pretension zone should
not be less than 0.15%, Ap shall not be counted in for post-tensioned members, hereinto, A is the
cross-sectional area of member. The diameter of longitudinal steel rebars in pretension zone should
not be larger than 14mm, and they shall be arranged uniformly along the external edge of the member
in pretension zone.

Note: For slab-type members not allowed to have cracks in pretension zone at construction stage, the reinforcement in longitudinal
steel reinforcement in pretension zone may be determined according to specific conditions and practical experience.

10.1.13 For members of pretensioned and post-tensioned prestressed concrete structure, in the
calculation of load-carrying capacity and crack width, when the prestress in normal direction is zero,
the jacking force Np0 and the eccentricity of its acting point ep0 shall all be calculated according to
Expression (10.1.7-1) and Expression (10.1.7-2) of this code. Here, the stress σp0 and  p0 of the
prestressing tendons in pretensioned and post-tensioned members shall all be calculated according to
the requirements of Article 10.1.6 of this code.

10.1.14 For unbounded prestressed flexural members with rectangular section, in calculation of
load-carrying capacity of normal section, the design value of stress σpu for the unbonded prestressing
tendons should be calculated according to the following expressions:

σpu=σpe+Δσp (10.1.14-1)

136
  h l
 p  (240  335 p ) 0.45  5.5  2 (10.1.14-2)
 l0  l1

 pe Ap  f y As
p  (10.1.14-3)
f cbhp

For continuous beams, continuous one-way slabs and continuous two-way slabs with span number
no less than three; Δσp value shall not be less than 50N/mm2.

The design value of stress σpu for unbonded prestressing tendons shall also meet the following
condition:

σpu≤fpy (10.1.14-4)

Where σpe——The effective prestress in unbonded prestressing tendons after deducting all losses
of prestress (N/mm2);

Δσp——The increment of stress in unbonded prestressing tendons (N/mm2);

ξp——The characteristic value of composite reinforcement, which should not be larger

than 0.4; for continuous beams and slabs, the mean value for the characteristic value
of composite reinforcement in supports in each span and in mid-span section shall
be adopted;

h——The depth of section in flexural members;

hp——The distance from the point of the resultant force of unbonded prestressing tendons
to the extreme fiber in compression zone of section;

l1——The total length between two anchored ends of continuous unbonded prestressing
tendons;

l2——The sum of span length of loads related with l1 and determined by the most
unfavorable arrangement diagram of live loads.

For flexural members of T-shaped or I-shaped section with flanges located in compression zone,
if the depth of compression zone is larger than the depth of flange, the characteristic value ξp of
composite reinforcement may be calculated according to following expression:

 pe Ap  f y As  f c (bf  b)hf
p  (10.1.14-5)
f cbhp

Where hf ——The depth of flange on T-shaped or I-shaped sections in compression zone;

bf ——The calculated width of flange on T-shaped or I-shaped sections in compression

zone.

10.1.15 In tension zone of unbounded prestressed concrete flexural members, the arrangement for
the cross-sectional area As of longitudinal steel rebars shall meet the following requirements:

1 One-way slabs
137
 As≥0.002bh (10.1.15-1)

Where b——The width of section;

h——The depth of section.

The diameter of longitudinal steel rebars shall not be less than 8mm and the spacing shall not be
larger than 200mm.

2 Beams

The larger value from calculated results of the following two expressions shall be adopted for As:

1   pu hp 
As   Ap (10.1.15-2)
3  f y hs 

As≥0.003bh (10.1.15-3)

Where hs——The distance from the point of the resultant force of the longitudinal tensile steel
rebars to the extreme fiber in compression zone of section.

The diameter of longitudinal tensile steel rebars should not be less than 14mm and they shall be
distributed uniformly at the extreme fiber in tension zone of beams.

For beams designed according to Crack Control Level 1, if no less than 75% of the design value
of bending moment is carried by unbonded prestressing tendons, the area of longitudinal tensile steel
rebars shall meet the requirements of the calculation of load-carrying capacity and Expression
(10.1.15-3).

10.1.16 For two-way flat slabs in slab-column structure of unbounded prestressed concrete, the
cross-sectional area As of longitudinal steel rebars and the distribution shall meet the following
requirements:

1 In hogging moment area of the column side, the cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel
rebars in each direction shall meet the following requirements:

As≥0.00075hl (10.1.16-1)

Where l——The span of slab parallel to the direction for calculating longitudinal load-carrying
steel reinforcement;

h——The slab thickness.

The longitudinal steel rebars determined by the above expression shall be distributed within the
range of slab width (namely 1.5h away from each column side). At least four steel rebars with
diameter no less than 16mm shall be arranged in each direction. The spacing of longitudinal steel
reinforcement shall not be larger than 300mm; the extended length outside of the column shall be at
least 1/6 of clear span at each side of the support. If the effect of longitudinal steel rebars is considered
in calculation of load-carrying capacity, the extended length outside of the column shall be determined
according to the calculation and shall meet the requirements for anchorage length specified in Section
8.3 of this code.

2 Under characteristic combination of loads, as for positive bending moment zone, longitudinal
steel rebars may be arranged according to detailing requirements only, when the normal tensile stress
138
of concrete at edge in positive bending moment zone meets the following requirement:

σck－σpc≤0.4ftk (10.1.16-2)

3 Under characteristic combination of loads, if the normal tensile stress of concrete at edge in
positive bending moment zone exceeds 0.4ftk but is not larger than 1.0ftk, the cross-sectional area of
longitudinal steel rebars shall meet the following requirement:

N tk
As  (10.1.16-3)
0.5 f y

Where Ntk——The resultant force in tension zone of non-cracking section of concrete of members
under characteristic combination of loads;

fy——The design tensile strength of steel reinforcement, if fy is larger than 360N/mm2, it

shall adopt 360N/mm2.

The longitudinal steel rebars shall be distributed uniformly in tension zone of slabs and shall be
arranged in full length near by the extreme fiber in tension zone.

4 Embedded ring-beams or reinforced concrete boundary beams shall be arranged at the edge
and corner of flat slabs. The diameter of longitudinal steel reinforcement in embedded ring-beams
shall not be less than 12mm and the number of longitudinal steel reinforcement shall not be less than
four; the diameter of stirrup shall not be less than 6mm and the spacing shall not be larger than
150mm.

Note: In the area of cast-in-situ two-way flat slabs with high temperature and large shrinkage stress, the detailing of steel mesh shall
be arranged according to Article 9.1.8 of this code.

10.1.17 The design value of normal section flexural capacity for prestressed concrete flexural
members shall meet the following requirements:

Mu≥Mcr (10.1.17)

Where Mu——The design value of normal section flexural capacity, calculated according to
Expression (6.2.10-1), Expression (6.2.11-2) or Expression (6.2.14) of this code,
but the equal sign shall be adopted and M shall be replaced by Mu;

Mcr——The cracking bending moment of normal section, calculated according to

Expression (7.2.3-6) of this code.

10.2 Calculation of Prestress Losses

10.2.1 The losses of prestress in prestressing tendons may be calculated according to Table 10.2.1.

If the calculated values of total prestress losses are less than the following values, the following
values shall be adopted:

Pretensioned members 100N/mm2;

Post-tensioned members 80N/mm2.

Table 10.2.1 Losses of Prestress (N/mm2)

139
 Factor for loss Symbol Pretensioned members Post-tensioned members

Calculated according to the Calculated according to the

Deformation of anchorage at the jacking end and
σl1 requirements of Article 10.2.2 of requirements of Article 10.2.2 and
drawing-in of prestressing tendons
this code Article 10.2.3 of this code
Calculated according to the
Friction with duct walls — requirements of Article 10.2.4 of

Friction of this code

σl2
prestressing tendons Friction of anchor at the jacking Determined according to actual measured values or data provided by
end manufacturer

Friction at steering devices Determined according to actual conditions

The temperature difference between prestressing

tendons and the devices carrying tension during heat σl3 2Δt —
curing of concrete
Stress-relieved steel wires and steel strands
General relaxation:
 
0.4  con  0.5 con
f 
 ptk 
Low relaxation:
When σcon≤0.7fptk,
Stress relaxation of prestressing tendons σl4  
0.125 con  0.5  con
 f 
 ptk 
When 0.7fptk<σcon≤0.8fptk,
 
0.2  con  0.575  con
 f 
 ptk 
Medium-strength prestressing wires: 0.08σcon
Prestressing deformed steel reinforcement: 0.03σcon

Shrinkage and creep of concrete σl5 Calculated according to the requirements of Article 10.2.5 of this code

For ring-shaped members with spiral prestressing

tendons, when the diameter d is not larger than 3m, σl6 — 30
resulting from local compression of concrete
Note: 1 Δt in this Table refers to the temperature difference (℃) between the prestressing tendons and/or bar and the equipment
bearing tension in the heating maintenance of concrete;

2 Where σcon/fptk≤0.5, The value for the loss of stress relaxation of the prestressing tendon may be taken as zero.

10.2.2 For straight prestressing tendons, the losses of prestress σl1 caused by deformation of
anchorage and drawing-in of prestressing tendons shall be calculated according to the following
expression:

a
 l1  Es (10.2.2)
l
Where a——The value of deformation of anchorage at the jacking end and drawing-in of
prestressing tendons (mm), may be adopted according to Table 10.2.2;

l——The distance from the jacking end to anchored end (mm).

Table 10.2.2 Value a of Deformation of Anchorage and Drawing-in of Prestressing Tendons (mm)

140
 Type of anchorage a

Supporting-type anchorage (button-head Seam of nut cap 1

anchorage for steel wire bundles) Seam of each post-added plate 1

With top pressure 5

Clip-type anchorage
Without top pressure 6~8

Note: 1 The value of deformation of anchorage and drawing-in of prestressing tendons in this Table may also be determined
according to actual measured data;

2 The value for deformation of anchorage and drawing-in of other types shall be determined according to actual measured
data.

For structures composed of precast blocks, the precompression deformation of gap filling
between blocks shall be included in the losses of prestress. When concrete or cement mortar is
adopted as the gap filler, the precompression deformation value for each gap filling may be taken as
1mm.

10.2.3 The value of prestress losses σl1 for curved or segmented prestressing tendons in
post-tensioned members, which caused by deformation of anchorage and drawing-in of prestressing
tendons, shall be determined according to the condition that the deformation of prestressing tendons
within the range of the reverse friction influence length lf between the curved or segmented
prestressing tendons and duct walls equal to the value of the deformation of anchorage and drawing-in
of prestressing tendons; and the reverse friction coefficient may be selected according to those values
specified in Table 10.2.4.

The reverse friction influence length lf and the value of prestress losses σl1 for post-tensioning
tendons of common tendon shapes within the range of reverse friction influence length lf may be
calculated according to Appendix J of this code.

10.2.4 The value of prestress losses σl2 due to friction between prestressing tendons and duct walls
should be calculated according to the following expression:

 1 
 l 2   con 1  x  μθ  (10.2.4-1)
 e 

Where (κx+μθ) is not larger than 0.3, σl2 may be calculated according to the following
approximate expression:

σl2=(κx+μθ)σcon (10.2.4-2)

Note: When the clip-type group anchor system is adopted, the anchor friction loss should be deducted in σcon.

Where x——The duct length from the jacking end to the calculated section, which may take the
projected length (m) of the duct at this sector on the longitudinal axis approximately;

θ——The sum of included angles for tangent lines at each part of curved ducts from the
jacking end to the calculated section (rad);

κ——The friction coefficient in consideration of local deviation in each meter length of the
duct, adopted according to Table 10.2.4;

μ——The friction coefficient between prestressing tendons and the duct walls, adopted
141
 according to Table 10.2.4.

Table 10.2.4 Friction Coefficient

Μ
Forming mode of ducts κ
Steel strands and steel tendons Prestressing deformed steel reinforcement

Embedded metal corrugated pipes 0.0015 0.25 0.50

Embedded plastic corrugated pipes 0.0015 0.15 —

Embedded steel pipes 0.0010 0.30 —

Core extraction 0.0014 0.55 0.60

Unbonded prestressing tendons 0.0040 0.09 —

Note: The friction coefficient also may be determined according to actual measured data.

In Expression (10.2.4-1), for the space curve that changed in parabola and arc curve as well as
the generalized space curve that may be superposed after segmenting, the sum of included angles θ
may be calculated according to the following approximate expressions:

Parabola and arc curve:

   v2   h2 (10.2.4-3)

Generalized space curve:

    v2   h2 (10.2.4-4)

Where αv, αh——The bending angles of the parabola and arc curve shaped by vertical, horizontal
projection of the space curve of prestressing tendons changed with the parabola
and arc curve respectively;

Δαv, Δαh——The bending angle increments at segmented curve shaped by vertical, horizontal
projection of generalized space curve of prestressing tendons respectively.

10.2.5 The values of prestress losses σl5 and  l5 for longitudinal prestressing tendons in tension
zone and compression zone due to concrete shrinkage and creep may be determined according to the
following methods:

1 General situation

Pretensioned members
 pc
60  340
f cu
 l5  (10.2.5-1)
1  15

 pc
60  340
f cu
 l5  (10.2.5-2)
1  15 

Post-tensioned members

142
  pc
55  300
f cu
 l5  (10.2.5-3)
1  15

 pc
55  300
f cu
 l5  (10.2.5-4)
1  15 

Where  pc ,  pc ——The normal compressive stresses of concrete at the point of the resultant force
of prestressing tendons in tension zone and compression zone respectively;

f cu ——The compressive strength of cubic concrete when applying jacking force;

ρ, ρ'——The ratios of reinforcement for prestressing tendons and steel rebars in tension
zone and compression zone respectively. For pretensioned members,
ρ=(Ap+As)/A0,    ( Ap  As ) /A0 ; for post-tensioned members, ρ=(Ap+As)/An,
   ( Ap  As ) /An ; for members with symmetrically arranged prestressing tendons
and steel rebars, the ratio of reinforcement ρ and ρ' shall be calculated
according to half of gross sectional area of steel reinforcement.

The normal compressive stress of concrete at the point of the resultant force of prestressing
tendons in tension zone and compression zone σpc and  pc shall be calculated according to the
requirements of Article 10.1.6 and Article 10.1.7 of this code. Here, only the loss before the
precompression of concrete (in the first batch) shall be considered for the value of prestress losses and
the stress σl5 and  l5 in steel rebars shall be taken as zero; σpc and  pc
 shall not be larger than 0.5 f cu ;
when  pc
 is the tensile stress,  pc
 in Expression (10.2.5-2) and Expression (10.2.5-4) shall be taken
as zero. The effects of self-weight may be considered according to manufacture conditions of
members when calculating the normal stress of concrete σpc and  pc
 .

While the structure is under the environment with annual average relative humidity less than
40%, values of σl5 and  l5 shall be increased by 30%.

2 For important structural members, when time-dependent concrete shrinkage and creep as
well as the stress relaxation of prestressing tendons is considered for the losses of prestress, it should
be calculated according to Appendix K of this code.

10.2.6 When tensioning by batches is adopted for prestressing tendons of post-tensioned members,
the influence of concrete elastic compression or elongation caused by prestressing tendons tensioned
in the latter batch on prestressing tendons tensioned in the former batch shall be considered; the
tension control stress σcon for prestressing tendons tensioned in the former batch may be increased or
αEσpci may be reduced. Hereof, σpci is the normal stress of concrete at the centroid of prestressing
tendons tensioned in the former batch caused by prestressing tendons tensioned in the latter batch.

10.2.7 The combination of losses of prestress for prestressed concrete members in each stage should
be carried out according to Table 10.2.7.

Table 10.2.7 Combination of Value for Losses of Prestress at Each Stage

143
 Combination of losses of prestress Pretensioned members Post-tensioned members

Losses before concrete precompression (in the first batch) σl1+σl2+σl3+σl4 σl1+σl2

Losses after concrete precompression (in the second batch) σl5 σl4+σl5+σl6

Note: For pretensioned members, if it is required to distinguish the proportions of prestress loss σl4 in total prestress losses in the first
batch and the second batch respectively, the value may be determined according to actual conditions.

10.3 Detailing of Prestressed Concrete Members

10.3.1 The clear spacing between pretensioned prestressing tendons should not be less than 2.5
times of nominal diameter or 1.25 times of maximum particle diameter of the concrete coarse
aggregate and shall meet the following requirements: for prestressing wires, it shall not be less than
15mm; for 3-wire steel strands, it shall not be less than 20mm; for 7-wire steel strands, it shall not be
less than 25mm. If there is reliable guaranty for concrete compatibility under vibrating, clear spacing
may be broadened to 1.0 times of maximum particle diameter of coarse aggregate.

10.3.2 The ends of pretensioned prestressed concrete members should be taken with the following
detailing measures:

1 For members with single prestressing tendon, spiral reinforcement should be arranged at the
ends;

2 For members with multiple prestressing tendons dispersedly distributed, if the length range is
within 10d from member ends and is not less than 100mm, 3~5 sheets of steel mesh reinforcement
perpendicular to prestressing tendons should be arranged, hereof d is the nominal diameter of
prestressing tendons;

3 For thin slabs with prestressing wires, the transverse steel reinforcement should be properly
thickened within the length range of 100mm from the slab ends;

4 For members of trough slab type, additional transverse reinforcement shall be arranged
within the length range of 100mm from the member ends, and the number shall not be less than two.

10.3.3 The transverse ribs for strengthening the integrity and transverse stiffness should be arranged
for precast ribbed slabs. The load-carrying steel reinforcement with end transverse ribs shall be bent
into the longitudinal rib. If the pretension long-line method is adopted for manufacturing prestressed
concrete ribbed slabs with end transverse ribs, effective measures for preventing cracks on the end of
transverse rib when prestress is released shall be taken in the design and manufacture.

10.3.4 For parts of such members as prestressed concrete roof beams and crane girders with larger
inclined principal tensile stress near by the support, a part of prestressing tendons should be bent-up
arranged.

10.3.5 For flexural members with all prestressing tendons bent up at member end or pretensioned
members with straight reinforcement, if the member end is welded with bottom supporting structure,
the adverse effect caused by concrete shrinkage, creep and temperature variation shall be considered
and longitudinal detailing reinforcement should be arranged at parts of the member end where
cracking may occur..

10.3.6 The type and quality of the anchorages, grips and couplers used for post-tensioning tendons
shall comply with relevant current national standards.

144
10.3.7 The arrangement of post-tensioning tendons and preformed ducts shall meet the following
detailing requirements:

1 The horizontal clear spacing between preformed ducts in precast members should not be less
than 50mm and should not be less than 1.25 times of the particle diameter of coarse aggregate; the
clear spacing from the duct to the member edge should not be less than 30mm and should not be less
than 50% of the diameter of duct;

2 The clear spacing of preformed ducts in cast-in-situ concrete beams in vertical direction shall
not be less than the external diameter of ducts; the clear spacing in horizontal direction should not be
less than 1.5 times of external diameter of ducts and shall not be less than 1.25 times of particle
diameter of coarse aggregate. The clear spacing from outer wall of ducts to the member edge: it
should not be less than 50mm for the beam bottom, it should not be less than 40mm for the beam side;
for the beam of Crack Control Level 3, it should not be less than 60mm or 50mm for the beam bottom
and beam side respectively.

3 The internal diameter of preformed ducts should be 6mm~15mm larger than the external
diameter of prestressing bundles and the external diameter of the couplers in need of crossing the
ducts, and the sectional area of ducts should be 3.0 ~4.0 times of the area of section for prestressing
bundles to pass through.

4 If reliable experience is available and the quality of concrete pouring can be ensured, the
preformed ducts may be arranged closely and parallelly in horizontal, but the quantity for parallelly
preformed ducts shall not exceed two.

5 If the flat anchorage system is adopted in cast-in-situ floor slabs, the number of prestressing
tendons passing through each preformed duct should be 3 to 5; under common loading conditions, the
clear spacing of ducts in horizontal direction shall not exceed the larger value between 8 times of the
slab thickness and 1.5m.

6 The spacing of single unbonded prestressing tendons in slabs should not be larger than 6
times of the slab thickness and should not be larger than 1m; the number of unbonded prestressing
tendons in strip-shaped bundles should not exceed 5 and the spacing of strip-shaped bundles should
not be larger than 12 times of the slab thickness and should not be larger than 2.4m.

7 For unbonded prestressing tendons in bundling arrangement in beams, the horizontal clear
spacing of bundling should not be less than 50mm; the clear distance from the bundle to the member
edge should not be less than 40mm.

10.3.8 In anchorage zone at the end of post-tensioned prestressed concrete members, the indirect
steel reinforcement shall be arranged according to the following requirements:

1 If an ordinary anchor plate is adopted, the calculation for local bearing capacity shall be
carried out according to the requirements of Section 6.6 of this code and the indirect steel
reinforcement shall be arranged. The ratio of volumetric reinforcement shall not be less than 0.5%,
and the rigidity spread angle of the anchor plate shall be 45°;

2 In calculation of local bearing capacity, the design value of local bearing force for bonded
prestressed concrete members shall take 1.2 times of tension control force; the larger value between
1.2 times of tension control force and (fptkAp) shall be taken for unbounded prestressed concrete;

3 If an intergral-casting anchor plate is adopted, the design of local bearing zone shall meet the
145
requirements of relevant standards;

4 Outside the zone of indirect steel reinforcement arranged for local bearing, within the
additional reinforcement zone at member end where the length l is not less than 3 times of the
distance e from the point of resultant force for prestressing tendons at upper part or lower part of the
gravity center line to the adjacent edge but is not larger than 1.2 times of depth of section h at member
end, and where the height is 2e, the additional anti-splitting stirrup or steel mesh (Figure 10.3.8) shall
be arranged uniformly, and the area of reinforcement may be calculated according to the following
expression:

 l  P
Asb  0.18 1  l  (10.3.8-1)
 lb  f yv

The ratio of volumetric reinforcement shall not be less than 0.5%.

Where P——The design value of the resultant force acting on the prestressing tendons at upper
part or lower part of the section gravity center line at member end, which may be
determined according to the requirements of Item 2 of this Article;

ll, lb——The side lengths or diameters along the height direction Al and Ab of member
respectively, Al and Ab shall be determined according to Article 6.6.2 of this code;

fyv——The design value of tensile strength of additional anti-splitting steel reinforcement,

adopted according to the requirements of Article 4.2.3 of this code.

l (≥3e and ≤1.2h)

Figure 10.3.8 Range of Reinforcement Preventing End Cracks

1—arrangement zone for local bearing indirect steel reinforcement; 2—additional anti-splitting reinforcement zone;
3—additional anti-end-crack reinforcement zone

5 If prestressing tendons at member end are required to be intensively arranged at the lower
part of the section or at the upper part and lower part of the section, the additional vertical detailing
measures to prevent end cracks shall be arranged within the range of 0.2h of the member end (Figure
10.3.8), and the cross-sectional area shall meet the requirements of the following expressions:

Ts
Asv  (10.3.8-2)
f yv

 e
Ts   0.25   P (10.3.8-3)
 h

146
Where Ts——The tension at surface of anchor end;

P——The design value of the resultant force acting on the prestressing tendons at upper
part or lower part of the section gravity center line at member end, which may be
determined according to the requirements of Item 2 of this Article;

e——The distance from the point of the resultant force of prestressing tendons at upper
part or lower part of section gravity center line to the near edge of section;

h——The depth of section at member end;

If e is larger than 0.2h, the constructional steel reinforcement may be properly arranged
according to actual conditions. The vertical steel reinforcement to prevent end cracks should be
arranged nearby the end face, and welded steel mesh, closed stirrup or other types may be adopted;
ribbed steel reinforcement should be adopted.

If prestressing tendons are present at both upper part and lower part of end section, the larger
value calculated according to the resultant force of prestress at upper part and lower part respectively
shall be adopted for the gross cross-sectional area of additional vertical steel reinforcement.

The steel reinforcement to prevent end cracks shall also be calculated according to
above-mentioned methods in the transverse of end face of member, and the arrangement of mesh
reinforcement shall be formed with above-mentioned vertical steel reinforcement.

10.3.9 If local dent is present at the end of members, segmented detailing steel reinforcement
(Figure 10.3.9) or other effective detailing steel reinforcement shall be added.

10.3.10 In post-tensioned prestressed concrete members, if curved prestressing bundles are adopted,
the radius of curvature rp should be determined according to the following expression and it should
not be less than 4m.

Figure 10.3.9 Detailing Steel Reinforcement of local dent at the End

1—segmented reinforcement; 2—vertical reinforcement

P
rp  (10.3.10)
0.35 f c d p

Where P——The design value of the resultant force of prestressing bundles, which may be
determined according to the requirements of Clause 2 of Article 10.3.8 in this code;

rp——The radius of curvature for prestressing bundles (m);

dp——The external diameter of ducts for prestressing bundles;

fc——The design value of compressive strength of concrete; in checking of radius of

147
 curvature at tensioning stage, the design value of compressive
strength f c corresponding to the compressive strength of cubic concrete f cu at
construction stage may be taken and it shall be determined according to linear
interpolation method and Table 4.1.4-1 of this code.

For members with segmented reinforcement, the radius of curvature at the bending place of
prestressing bundles may be properly reduced. If the radius of curvature rp dissatisfies the above-
mentioned requirements, the steel mesh reinforcement or spiral reinforcement may be arranged at
inner side of the bending place of curved prestressing bundles.

10.3.11 In prestressed concrete structures, if the curved prestressing bundles are arranged along the
concave of the member (Figure 10.3.11), the anti-cracking design shall be carried out. If the radius of
curvature rp meets the following expression requirements, the U-shaped inserted steel rebars may be
arranged only for detailing reinforcement.

P
rp  (10.3.11-1)
f t (0.5d p  cp )

If it is not met, the cross-sectional area of each single-leg U-shaped inserted steel rebars shall be
determined according to the following expression:

Psv
Asv1  (10.3.11-2)
2rp f yv

Where P——The design value of resultant force for prestressing bundles, which may be
determined according to the requirements of Item 2 of Article 10.3.8 in this code;

ft——The design value of compressive strength of concrete; or the design value of tensile
strength f t corresponding to compressive strength of cubic concrete f cu at
construction tensioning stage, determined according to linear interpolation method
and Table 4.1.4-2 of this code;

cp——The net thickness of concrete cover in ducts for prestressing bundles;

Asv1——The cross-sectional area of each single-leg inserted steel bars;

sv——The spacing of U-shaped inserted steel rebars;

fyv——The design value of tensile strength of U-shaped inserted steel rebars, adopted
according to Table 4.2.3-1 of this code, if it is larger than 360N/mm2, taken as
360N/mm2.

The anchorage length of U-shaped inserted steel rebars shall not be less than la; if the actual
anchorage length le is less than la, the sectional area of each single-leg U-shaped inserted steel rebars
may be valued according to Asv1/k where k shall be taken as the smaller value between le/15d and
le/200, and shall not be larger than 1.0.

If there are several parallel ducts and the center to center distance is not larger than 2dp, the
design value of resultant force for prestressing tendons shall be determined according to prestressing
tendons in all adjacent ducts.
148
 (a) Arrangement of Anti-cracking U-shaped Inserted Steel rebars (b) I-I Section

Figure 10.3.11 Detailing Schematic of Anti-cracking U-shaped inserted Steel rebars

1—prestressing bundles; 2—U-shaped inserted steel rebars arranged uniformly along the curved prestressing bundles

10.3.12 The anchorage arrangement, dimension of tensioning devices and requirements for local
bearing shall be considered for the dimension of member end, which shall be properly increased if
necessary.

10.3.13 For exposed metal anchorage of post-tensioning prestressed concrete, reliable anticorrosion
and fire precaution measures shall be taken and the following requirements shall be met:

1 The sealed anchorage end with plastic cap filled with sufficient anti-corrosive grease shall be
adopted for exposed anchorage of unbonded prestressing tendons and non-shrink cement mortar or
fine-stone concrete shall be adopted for sealing;

2 For anchorage system of unbounded prestressing tendons under Environment Category II-b,
III-a and III-b, totally enclosed anti-corrosion system shall be adopted, the anchor end for sealing and
each connecting part shall be able to bear 10kPa of hydrostatic pressure and shall not be pervious to
water.

3 If concrete is adopted for sealing, the strength grade of concrete should be consistent with the
concrete strength grade of members and shall not be less than C30. The concrete for anchor sealing
and concrete of members shall be bonded reliably, for instance, the concrete interface around the
anchorage shall be roughened and rinsed out before sealing, and 1~2 sheets of steel mesh
reinforcement should be arranged, while the steel mesh reinforcement shall be tied to concrete
members.

4 If non-shrink cement mortar or concrete are adopted for sealing protection, the cover
thickness of the end at the anchorage and prestressing tendons shall not be less than: 20mm for
Environmental Category I; 50mm for Environmental Category II-a and II-b; 80mm for Environmental
Category III-a and III-b.

149
 11 Seismic Design of Reinforced Concrete Structural Members

11.1 General

11.1.1 For concrete structures having the requirements of seismic precaution, the seismic design of
structural members shall be carried out according to the requirements of this chapter in accordance
with the seismic design principles specified in the current national standard “Code for Seismic Design
of Buildings” (GB 50011). Meanwhile, the requirements of Chapter 1~Chapter 10 of this code shall
also be complied with,

11.1.2 For concrete buildings having seismic precaution requirements, the seismic precaution
category and corresponding seismic precautionary criterion shall be determined according to the
requirements of the current national standard “Standard for Classification of Seismic Precaution of
Building Constructions” (GB 50223).

Note: Category A, Category B and Category C buildings in this chapter are short for buildings of special precaution category, major
precaution category and standard precaution category respectively specified in “Standard for Classification of Seismic
Precaution of Building Constructions” (GB 50223).

11.1.3 The seismic design of concrete structural members for buildings shall use different
seismic grades according to the precaution category, intensity, structural type and the height of
buildings, and shall meet the requirements of the corresponding calculation and detailing
measures. The seismic grade of Category C buildings shall be determined according to Table 11.1.3.

Table 11.1.3 Seismic Grades of Concrete Structures

Precaution intensity (degree)

Structural type
6 7 8 9

Height (m) ≤24 >24 ≤24 >24 ≤24 >24 ≤24

Frame structure Ordinary frame IV III III II II I I

Large-span frame III II I I

>24 >24 >24

Height (m) ≤60 >60 ≤24 and >60 ≤24 and >60 ≤24 and
Frame-shear wall
≤60 ≤60 ≤50
structure
Frame IV III IV III II III II I II I

Shear wall III III II II I I

>24 >24

Shear wall Height (m) ≤80 >80 ≤24 and >80 ≤24 and >80 ≤24 24~60

structure ≤80 ≤80

Shear wall IV III IV III II III II I II I

>24 >24
Partial and and
Height (m) ≤80 >80 ≤24 >80 ≤24
frame-supporting
≤80 ≤80 — —
shear wall
General position IV III IV III II III II
structure Shear wall
Strengthened position III II III II I II I

150
 Frame of frame-support storey II II I I

Table 11.1.3 (continued)

Precaution intensity (degree)

Structure type
6 7 8 9

Frame-core- Frame III II I I

tube Core tube II II I I

Tube structure
Tube-in- Inner tube III II I I

tube Outer tube III II I I

Height (m) ≤34 >35 ≤35 >35 ≤35 >35 I

Slab-column-shear
Slab column and peripheral frame III II II II I
wall structure —
Shear wall II II II I II I

Structure of
Hinged bent IV III II I
single-storey plant
Note: 1 If building site is of Category I, except for the Precaution Intensity 6, it shall be allowed to adopt seismic detailing
design based on the Precaution Intensity that is one degree lower than the degree listed in the above table). However,
the corresponding calculation requirements shall not be reduced;

2 If the height is close to or equal to the threshold value, the seismic grade shall be determined according to the
combination of the degree of irregularity of buildings as well as conditions of site and base;

3 The large-span frame refers to the frame with span no less than 18m;

4 The frames stated in this Table exclude special-shaped column frames;

5 If the frame-core tube structure is not higher than 60m and is designed according to the requirements of
frame-shear wall structure, its seismic grade shall be determined according to the requirements of the frame-shear
wall structure stated in this Table.

11.1.4 The determination of the seismic grade of structural members in reinforced concrete buildings
shall also meet the following requirements:

1 For frame-shear wall structures, under the action of specified horizontal seismic force, if the
overturning moment carried by the frame bottom is larger than 50% of total overturning moment at
the bottom, the seismic grade of the frame shall be determined as frame structures.

2 For podiums attached to main building, the seismic grade shall be determined according to
the podiums themselves and the seismic grade of relevant range shall not be less than that of the main
building. Seismic detailing design for the main building structure shall be properly strengthened at the
upper and lower two storeies adjacent to the top slab of the podium. If the podium and the main
building are separated, the seismic grade shall be determined according to the podium itself.

3 If the top-slab of the basement is used as the built-in support of upper structure, the seismic
grade of the first sub-storey shall be the same as that of the upper structure; while the seismic grade of
the seismic detailing design for other storeies lower than the first sub-storey may be reduced by one
grade storey by storey but shall not be less than Grade IV. For the part of the basement without upper
structure, the seismic grade of the seismic detailing design may be taken as Grade III or IV according
to specific conditions.

4 When the seismic grade of Category A and B buildings is determined by increasing one grade
151
as required, if the height exceeds the maximum applicable height of corresponding buildings, then
more effective seismic detailing design than that of corresponding seismic grade shall be taken.

11.1.5 The range of bottom reinforced part of the shear wall shall meet the following requirements:

1 The height of the bottom reinforced part shall be counted from the top-slab of basement.

2 For the shear wall of partial frame-support shear wall structures, the height of the bottom
reinforced part may be taken from the larger value between the height of the frame-supporting storey
and the two storeys above this frame-supporting storey and 1/10 of the total height of the shear wall
linked with the ground. As for the shear wall of other structures, if the height of the building is larger
than 24m, the height of its bottom reinforced part may be taken from the larger value between the
height of these two bottom storeys and 1/10 of the total height of coupling wall-column; if the height
of the building is not lager than 24m, the height of bottom storey may be taken as that of the bottom
reinforced part.

3 If the calculated built-in end of the structure is located on or below the base slab of first
sub-storey, the range of bottom reinforced part determined according to Clause 1 and 2 of this Article
shall also be extended downward to the calculated built-in end.

11.1.6 If the seismic combination is considered in load-carrying capacity analysis of concrete

structural members, the capacity shall be adjusted by the seismic adjustment coefficient γRE, which
shall be adopted according to Table 11.1.6.

The seismic load-carrying capacity of normal section shall be calculated according to the
requirements of Section 6.2 of this code, but the right hand item in the relevant calculation expression
shall divide by corresponding seismic adjustment coefficient of load-carrying capacity γRE.

If only the vertical earthquake action is calculated, the seismic adjustment coefficient of load-
carrying capacity γRE of all structural members shall be taken as 1.0.

Table 11.1.6 Seismic Adjustment Coefficient of Load-carrying Capacity

Calculation of
inclined section
Calculation of normal section load-carrying capacity
Type of load-carrying Calculation of Calculation of
structural capacity punching shear local bearing
member Eccentric compression column Eccentric All types of capacity capacity
Flexural Shear
Axial compression Axial compression tension members and
member wall
ratio less than 0.15 ratio no less than 0.15 member joints

γRE 0.75 0.75 0.8 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 1.0

Note: The seismic adjustment coefficient of load-carrying capacity γRE calculated on the anchor bar section of embedded parts shall be
taken as 1.0.

11.1.7 The anchorage and splice of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement in concrete
structural members shall not only meet the relevant requirements of Section 8.3 and Section 8.4 but
also shall meet the following requirements:

1 The seismic anchorage length laE of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement shall be calculated
according to the following expression:

laE=ζaEla (11.1.7-1)
152
Where ζaE——The correction coefficient of seismic anchorage length for longitudinal tensile steel
reinforcement, taken as 1.15 for seismic grade Grade I and II, 1.05 for Grade III and
1.00 for Grade IV;

la——The anchorage length of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement, determined

according to Article 8.3.1 of this code.

2 If lap splice is adopted, the seismic lapping length llE of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement
shall be calculated according to the following expression:

llE=ζllaE (11.1.7-2)

Where ζl——The correction coefficient of lap splice length for longitudinal tensile steel
reinforcement, determined according to Article 8.4.4 of this code.

3 Splices of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement may be adopted with binding lap
splice, mechanical splice or welding.

4 The position for splices of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement should be away
from the stirrups intensified zone at the ends of beams and columns; the mechanical splice or welding
shall be adopted if the splice must be finished in this zone.

5 For concrete members, the area percentage of splices of longitudinal load-carrying steel
reinforcement located in the same connecting sector should not exceed 50%.

11.1.8 The stirrup should adopt welded closed stirrup, continuous spiral stirrup or continuous
combined spiral stirrup. If non-welded closed stirrup is adopted, the end shall be made into hook of
135° and the length of straight sector of hook terminal shall not be less than 10 times of diameter of
stirrup; the stirrup spacing within the range of lap splice length of longitudinal steel reinforcements
shall not be larger than 5 times of smaller diameter of lap splice steel reinforcement and should not be
larger than 100mm.

11.1.9 The embedded parts in consideration of the earthquake action shall meet the following
requirements:

1 The cross-sectional area of straight anchor steel rebars may be calculated according to the
relevant requirements of Chapter 9 of this code and increased by 25%; and the thickness of anchor
plate shall also be properly increased.

2 The anchorage length of anchor rebars shall meet the relevant requirements of Section 9.7 of
this code and shall be increased by 10%; if not, effective measures shall be taken. One closed stirrup
with diameter no less than 10mm should be provided at the position adjacent to the anchor plate.

3 The embedded parts should not be arranged in plastic hinge zone; otherwise, effective
measures shall be taken.

11.2 Materials

11.2.1 The concrete strength grade of concrete structures shall meet the following requirements:

1 For shear walls, it should not exceed C60; for other members, it should not exceed C60 at
Intensity 9 or C70 at Intensity 8.
153
 2 For frame-supporting beams, frame-supporting columns and Seismic Grade I frame beams,
columns and joints, it shall not be less than C30; for other structural members, it shall not be less than
C20.

11.2.2 In beams, columns, supports and shear wall boundary members, the load-carrying steel
reinforcement should adopt hot rolled ribbed rebars; if hot rolled ribbed steel rebars with designation
“E” specified in the current national standard “Steel for the Reinforcement of Concrete— Part 2: Hot
Rolled Ribbed Bars” (GB 1499.2) are adopted, the strength and elastic modulus shall be adopted
according to related requirements of hot rolled ribbed rebars specified in Section 4.2 of this code.

11.2.3 For frames and diagonal bracing members designed according to Seismic Grade I, II
and III, the longitudinal load-carrying steel rebars shall meet the following requirements:

1 The ratio of the actual measured value of tensile strength to actual measured value of
yield strength of steel rebars shall not be less than 1.25;

2 The ratio of the actual measured value of yield strength to characteristic value of yield
strength of steel rebars shall not be larger than 1.30;

3 The actual measured value of overall percentage elongation under the maximum
tension of steel rebars shall not be less than 9%.

11.3 Frame Beams

11.3.1 In calculation of normal section flexural capacity of beams, the depth of concrete
compression zone at beam end counted in longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement shall meet
the following requirements:

Seismic Grade I

x≤0.25h0 (11.3.1-1)

Seismic Grade II and III

x≤0.35h0 (11.3.1-2)

Where x——The depth of concrete compression zone;

h0——The effective depth of section.

11.3.2 The design value of shear force Vb at frame beam end in consideration of seismic
combination shall be calculated according to the following requirements:

1 Frame structures of Seismic Grade I and Frame of Seismic Grade I at Precaution Intensity 9

l
( M bua  M bua
r
)
Vb  1.1  VGb (11.3.2-1)
ln

2 Other Conditions

Seismic Grade I

154
 ( M bl  M br )
Vb  1.3  VGb (11.3.2-2)
ln

Seismic Grade II

( M bl  M br )
Vb  1.2  VGb (11.3.2-3)
ln

Seismic Grade III

( M bl  M br )
Vb  1.1  VGb (11.3.2-4)
ln

Seismic Grade IV, taken as the design value of shear force under seismic combination.
l r
Where M bua , M bua ——The bending moment value at left and right ends of frame beams
respectively corresponding to the normal section seismic flexural capacity,
which is calculated according to the cross-sectional area of actual arranged
steel reinforcement (including the compressive steel reinforcement and the
steel reinforcement in floor slab within the range of effective flange width
of beams) and the characteristic value for material strength and in
consideration of seismic adjustment coefficient of load-carrying capacity;

M bl , M br ——The design values of bending moment at left and right ends of frame beam
in consideration of seismic combination;

VGb——The design value of shear force caused by the representative value of

gravity load in consideration of seismic combination, which may be
determined by calculating according to simple-supported beams;

ln——The clear span of beam.

l r
In Expression (11.3.2-1), the sum of M bua and M bua shall be calculated in clockwise and
counter-clockwise directions respectively, and be taken as the larger value.

In Expression (11.3.2-2)~Expression (11.3.2-4), the sum of M bl and M br shall adopt the larger value
for the sum of the design value of bending moment at both end in consideration of seismic
combination calculated in clockwise and counter-clockwise directions respectively; at Seismic Grade
I, if the bending moments at two ends are both hogging moment, the bending moment value with
smaller absolute value shall adopt zero.

11.3.3 For frame beams with rectangular, T-shaped or I-shaped sections in consideration of seismic
combination, if the span-depth ratio is larger than 2.5, the shear section shall meet the following
conditions:

1
Vb  (0.20  c f cbh0 ) (11.3.3-1)
 RE

If the span-depth ratio is not larger than 2.5, the shear section shall meet the following condition:
155
 1
Vb  (0.15 c f cbh0 ) (11.3.3-2)
 RE

11.3.4 For frame beams with rectangular, T-shaped or I-shaped section in consideration of seismic
combination, the shear capacity of inclined section shall meet the following requirement:

1  A 
Vb   0.6 cv f t bh0  f yv sv h0  (11.3.4)
 RE  s 

Where αcv——The shear capacity coefficient for concrete section, valued according to Article
6.3.4 of this code.

11.3.5 The sectional dimension of frame beams shall meet the following requirements:

1 The section width should not be less than 200mm;

2 The ratio of section depth to width should not be larger than 4;

3 The ratio of the clear span to the depth of section should not be less than 4.

11.3.6 The arrangement of steel reinforcement for frame beams shall meet the following
requirements:

1 The ratio of reinforcement for longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement shall not be less
than the value specified in Table 11.3.6-1;

Table 11.3.6-1 Minimum Ratio of Reinforcement for Longitudinal Tensile steel Reinforcement of Frame Beam (%)

Position in beam
Seismic grade
Support Mid-span

Grade I The larger value between 0.40 and 80ft/fy The larger value between 0.30 and 65ft/fy

Grade II The larger value between 0.30 and 65ft/fy The larger value between 0.25 and 55ft/fy

Grade III and IV The larger value between 0.25 and 55ft/fy The larger value between 0.20 and 45ft/fy

2 The ratio between cross-sectional area of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement

at bottom and top of end section for frame beams shall be determined according to calculation,
while the ratio shall not be less than 0.5 in the condition of Seismic Grade I, and not be less than
0.3 in Seismic Grade II ;

3 The length of the stirrup intensified zone at the beam end, the maximum spacing
between stirrups and the minimum diameter of stirrup shall be adopted according to Table
11.3.6-2; if the ratio of reinforcement for longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement at beam end is
larger than 2%, the values of the minimum diameter of stirrup shall be increased by 2mm in
this Table.

11.3.7 The ratio of reinforcement for longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement at beam end should not
be larger than 2.5%. At least two longitudinal steel rebars with full length shall be arranged at top
surface and bottom surface along full length of beam respectively; for Seismic Grade I and II, the
diameter of steel reinforcement shall not be less than 14mm and shall not be less than 1/4 of relatively
large cross-sectional area in longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement at top surface and bottom
surface at both end of beams respectively; for Seismic Grade III and IV, the diameter of steel
156
reinforcement shall not be less than 12mm.

Table 11.3.6-2 Detailing Requirements for Stirrup Intensified Zone at Beam End of Frame Beam

Length of intensified zone Maximum spacing of stirrups Minimum diameter

Seismic grade
(mm) (mm) (mm)
The larger value between 2 The minimum value amongst 6 times of diameter of
Grade I 10
times of beam depth and 500 longitudinal steel reinforcement, 1/4 of beam depth and 100
The minimum value amongst 8 times of diameter of
Grade II 8
longitudinal steel reinforcement, 1/4 of beam depth and 100
The larger value between 1.5 The minimum value amongst 8 times of diameter of
Grade III 8
times of beam depth and 500 longitudinal steel reinforcement, 1/4 of beam depth and 150
The minimum value amongst 8 times of diameter of
Grade IV 6
longitudinal steel reinforcement, 1/4 of beam depth and 150

Note: If the diameter of the stirrup is larger than 12mm, the amount of stirrup legs are no less than 4 and the spacing of
stirrup legs is not larger than 150mm, the allowed maximum spacing of stirrups for Grade I and II shall be enlarged
properly but shall not be larger than 150mm.

11.3.8 For the spacing of stirrup legs within the intensified zone: for Seismic Grade I, it should not
be larger than the larger value between 200mm and 20 times of diameter of stirrup; for Seismic Grade
II and III, it should not be larger than the larger value between 250mm and 20 times of diameter of
stirrup; it should not be larger than 300mm under any seismic grades.

11.3.9 The distance from the first stirrup arranged at beam end to the edge of joint of frame shall not
be larger than 50mm. The spacing of stirrup in non-intensified zone should not be larger than 2 times
of spacing of stirrup in intensified zone. The area ratio of reinforcement ρsv for stirrups along length of
beam shall meet the following requirements:

Seismic Grade I

ft
 sv  0.30 (11.3.9-1)
f yv

Seismic Grade II

ft
 sv  0.28 (11.3.9-2)
f yv

Seismic Grade III and IV

ft
 sv  0.26 (11.3.9-3)
f yv

11.4 Frame Columns and Columns Supporting Structural Transfer Member

11.4.1 Except the joints of frame top columns, the joints of columns with axial-compression ratio
less than 0.15 and the joints of beams and columns supporting structural transfer member, the design
values of section bending moment at the upper and lower end of the frame column joints and the
157
upper and lower end of the joint in intermediate storey shall meet the following requirements:

1 Frame structure of Seismic Grade I and frame of Seismic Grade I at Precaution Intensity 9

ΣMc=1.2ΣMbua (11.4.1-1)

2 Frame structure

Seismic Grade II

ΣMc=1.5ΣMb (11.4.1-2)

Seismic Grade III

ΣMc=1.3ΣMb (11.4.1-3)

Seismic Grade IV

ΣMc=1.2ΣMb (11.4.1-4)

3 Other conditions

Seismic Grade I

ΣMc=1.4ΣMb (11.4.1-5)

Seismic Grade II

ΣMc=1.2ΣMb (11.4.1-6)

Seismic Grade III and IV

ΣMc=1.1ΣMb (11.4.1-7)

Where ΣMc——The sum of the design values of the bending moment at the upper and lower
column end of the joint in consideration of seismic combination; for the determination
of the design bending moment at column end, generally, the sum of bending
moment calculated in Expression (11.4.1-1)~Expression (11.4.1-5) may be
distributed according to the bending moment ratio gained from elastic analysis at
the upper and lower column end in consideration of the seismic combination;

ΣMbua——The larger value of the sum of bending moment values corresponding to the bend
bearing capacity of normal section at the left and right beam ends of the same joint,
calculated according to adopting the actual arranged steel reinforcement and
characteristic value of the material strength in clockwise and counterclockwise
directions and in consideration of the seismic adjustment coefficient of
load-carrying capacity. If there are cast-in-situ slabs, the actual arranged steel
reinforcement at the beam end shall include the longitudinal steel reinforcement of
the floor-slab within the range of the beam’s effective flange width;

ΣMb——The larger value of the sum of the design bending moment at the left and right
beam ends of the same joint, calculated in clockwise and counterclockwise
directions in consideration of seismic combination; for Seismic Grade I, if the
bending moments at both ends are hogging moments, the bending moment value
with smaller absolute value shall take zero.

158
11.4.2 For the bottom storey of the frame structure of Seismic Grade I, II, III and IV, the design
bending moment at the lower end of column shall multiply amplified coefficients of 1.7, 1.5, 1.3 and
1.2, respectively. The longitudinal steel reinforcement for the column at the bottom storey shall be
arranged in accordance with the more unfavorable situation between upper and lower ends of the
column.

Note: The bottom storey refers to the first storey above the foundation without the basement or above the basement.

11.4.3 The design shear force Vc of frame columns and columns supporting structural transfer
member shall be calculated according to the following expressions:

1 Frame structure of Seismic Grade I and frame of Seismic Grade I at Precaution Intensity 9

t
( M cua  M cua
b
)
Vc  1.2 (11.4.3-1)
Hn

2 Frame structure
Seismic Grade II

( M ct  M cb )
Vc  1.3 (11.4.3-2)
Hn

Seismic Grade III

( M ct  M cb )
Vc  1.2 (11.4.3-3)
Hn

Seismic Grade IV

( M ct  M cb )
Vc  1.1 (11.4.3-4)
Hn

3 Other conditions
Seismic Grade I

( M ct  M cb )
Vc  1.4 (11.4.3-5)
Hn

Seismic Grade II

( M ct  M cb )
Vc  1.2 (11.4.3-6)
Hn

Seismic Grade III and IV

( M ct  M cb )
Vc  1.1 (11.4.3-7)
Hn

159
 t b
Where M cua , M cua ——The bending moments at the upper and lower ends of the frame column
respectively corresponding to the seismic load-carrying capacity of normal
section, calculated in accordance with the cross-sectional area of actual
arranged steel reinforcement and the material characteristic strength in
consideration of the seismic adjustment coefficient of load-carrying
capacity;

M ct , M cb ——The design bending moments at the upper and lower ends of the frame
column respectively after adjustment in consideration of the seismic
combination;

Hn——The net height of column.

t b
In Expression (11.4.3-1), the sum of M cua and M cua shall be respectively calculated in clockwise
and counterclockwise directions, and the larger value shall be taken; N may take the design value of
the axial compressive force generated by the representative value of the gravity load.

In Expression (11.4.3-2)~Expression (11.4.3-5), the sum of M ct and M cb shall be respectively

calculated in clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and the larger value shall be taken. The
values of M ct and M cb shall meet the requirements of Article 11.4.1 and Article 11.4.2 of this code.

11.4.4 For columns supporting structural transfer member of Seismic Grade I and II, the additional
axial force caused by seismic action shall multiply amplified coefficients of 1.5 and 1.2, respectively;
in calculation of axial compression ratio, the amplified coefficient may not be considered.

11.4.5 For corner frame columns of all the seismic grades, the design values of bending moment and
shear force shall multiply the amplified coefficient of no less than 1.1 based on the adjustment
according to Article 11.4.1~Article 11.4.3 of this code.

11.4.6 For frame columns and columns supporting structural transfer member with rectangular
section in consideration of seismic combination, the shear section shall meet the following conditions:

Frame columns with shear span ratio λ larger than 2

1
Vc  (0.2  c f cbh0 ) (11.4.6-1)
 RE

Frame columns with shear span ratio λ no larger than 2 and columns supporting structural
transfer member

1
Vc  (0.15 c f cbh0 ) (11.4.6-2)
 RE

Where λ——The calculated shear span ratio of frame columns and columns supporting structural
transfer member, taken as M/(Vh0); M should take the larger design bending moment
at the upper and lower ends of columns in consideration of seismic combination, V
takes the design shear force corresponding to M, h0 represents the effective depth of
column section; if the inflection point of the frame column in the frame structure is
within the range of column storey height, it may be taken as λ=Hn/ (2h0), where Hn
160
 represents the net height of the column.

11.4.7 For frame columns and columns supporting structural transfer member with rectangular
section in consideration of seismic combination, the shear capacity of inclined section shall meet the
following requirement:

1  1.05 A 
Vc   f t bh0  f yv sv h0  0.056 N  (11.4.7)
 RE    1 s 

Where λ——The calculated shear span ratio of the frame column and columns supporting
structural transfer member; if less than 1.0, λ is taken as 1.0; if larger than 3.0, λ is
taken as 3.0;

N——The design value of axial compressive force of the frame column and columns
supporting structural transfer member in consideration of seismic combination, if
larger than 0.3fc A, N is taken as 0.3fc A.

11.4.8 For frame columns and columns supporting structural transfer member with rectangular
section in consideration of seismic combination, if tensile force is present, the seismic shear capacity
of the inclined section shall meet the following requirements:

1  1.05 A 
Vc   f t bh0  f yv sv h0  0.2 N  (11.4.8)
 RE    1 s 

Where N——The design value of axial tensile force for frame columns in consideration of seismic
combination.

Asv
If the calculated value in the bracket of the above expression is less than f yv h0 , it is taken as
s
Asv A
f yv h0 , and the value of f yv sv h0 shall not be less than 0.36ftbh0.
s s
11.4.9 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under two-way shear force in
consideration of seismic combination, the shear section shall meet the following conditions;

1
Vx  0.2  c f cbh0 cos  (11.4.9-1)
 RE

1
Vy  0.2  c f cbh0 sin  (11.4.9-2)
 RE

Where Vx——The design value of shear force along x axis direction, the corresponding effective
depth of section is h0, the section width is b;

Vy——The design value of shear force in the y axis direction, the corresponding effective
depth of section is b0, the section width is h;

θ——The included angle between the acting direction of inclined design shear force V and
x axis, taken as arctan (Vy/Vx).

161
11.4.10 For reinforced concrete frame columns with rectangular section under two-way shear force
in consideration of seismic combination, the shear capacity of inclined section shall meet the
following conditions:

Vux
Vx  (11.4.10-1)
2
 V tan  
1   ux 
 V 
 uy 

Vuy
Vy  (11.4.10-2)
2
 Vuy 
1   
V
 ux tan  

1  1.05 A 
Vux   f t bh0  f yv svx h0  0.056 N  (11.4.10-3)
 RE  x  1 sx 

1  1.05 Asvy 
Vuy   f t bh0  f yv b0  0.056 N  (11.4.10-4)
 RE  y  1 sy 

Where λx, λy——The calculated shear span ratios of the frame column respectively, determined
according the requirements of Article 6.3.12 of this code;

Asvx, Asvy——The total cross-sectional areas of legs of stirrups parallel to x axis and y axis
respectively arranged on the same section;

N——The design value of axial compressive force corresponding to the design value of
shear force V in inclined direction, if N is larger than 0.3fcA, it takes 0.3fcA; hereof,
A represents the cross-sectional area of members.

In calculation of sectional stirrup, it may approximately take Vux/Vuy=1 for the calculation in
Expression (11.4.10-1) and Expression (11.4.10-2).

11.4.11 The section dimension of frame column shall meet the following requirements:

1 For the column with rectangular section, if it is in the condition of Seismic Grade IV or the
number of floors are not larger than 2, the minimum section dimension should not be less than
300mm, if it is in the conditions of Seismic Grade I, II, III and the number of floors exceed 2, it
should not be less than 400mm; for the column with circular section, if it is in the condition of
Seismic Grade IV or the number of floors do not exceed 2, the section diameter should not be less
than 350mm, if it is in the condition of Seismic Grade I, II, III and the number of floors exceed 2, the
section diameter should not be less than 450mm.

2 The shear span ratio of the column should be larger than 2;

3 The aspect ratio of the column section should not be larger than 3.

11.4.12 The arrangement of steel reinforcement for frame columns and columns supporting
structural transfer member shall meet the following requirements:

1 The percentage of reinforcement of all the longitudinal load-carrying steel

162
reinforcement in frame columns and columns supporting structural transfer member shall not
be less than the value specified in Table 11.4.12-1, meanwhile, the percentage of reinforcement at
each side shall not be less than 0.2; for the high-rise buildings in site of Category IV, the
minimum percentage of reinforcement shall be increased by 0.1;

Table 11.4.12-1 Minimum Percentage of Reinforcement of all the Longitudinal Load-carrying Steel Reinforcement
of Columns (%)

Seismic grade
Column type
Grade I Grade II Grade III Grade IV

Middle column, side column 0.9 (1.0) 0.7 (0.8) 0.6 (0.7) 0.5 (0.6)

Corner column, columns supporting structural

1.1 0.9 0.8 0.7
transfer member
Note: 1 The value in the bracket of this table is used for the column of frame structure;

2 If longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement of Grade 335MPa and Grade 400MP are adopted, the values in the
table shall be increased by 0.1 and 0.05 respectively;

3 If the concrete strength grade is above C60, the value in the table shall be increased by 0.1.

2 The stirrup at the upper and lower ends of frame columns and columns supporting
structural transfer member shall be intensified; the largest spacing and the minimum diameter
of stirrup in intensified zone shall be in accordance with the requirements of Table 11.4.12-2;

Table 11.4.12-2 Detailing Requirements of Stirrup at Column End in Intensified Zone

The largest spacing of stirrups The minimum diameter of stirrups

Seismic grade
(mm) (mm)
The smaller value between 6 times of diameter of longitudinal steel
Grade I 10
reinforcement and 100
The smaller value between 8 times of diameter of longitudinal steel
Grade II 8
reinforcement and 100
The smaller value between 8 times of diameter of longitudinal steel
Grade III 8
reinforcement and 150 ( for column root, 100 )
The smaller value between 8 times of diameter of longitudinal steel
Grade IV 6 ( for column root, 8 )
reinforcement and 150 ( for column root, 100 )
Note: The column root refers to the range of intensified zone of stirrup at the lower end of bottom storey column.

3 For columns supporting structural transfer member and frame columns with shear
span ratio no larger than 2, stirrups shall be intensified within the range of full height of
columns and the stirrup spacing shall meet the requirements of Seismic Grade I specified in
Clause 2 of this Article;

4 On the condition that the diameter of stirrups in frame columns of Seismic Grade I is
larger than 12mm and the spacing of stirrup legs is not larger than 150mm, or the diameter of
frame columns of Seismic Grade II is not less than 10mm and the spacing of stirrup legs is not
larger than 200mm, the stirrup spacing shall be allowed to adopt 150mm except the lower end
of bottom storey columns; if the shear span ratio of frame columns of Seismic Grade IV is not
larger than 2, the diameter of stirrup shall not be less than 8mm.

11.4.13 If the side columns and corner columns of frame as well as the end columns of shear wall
163
are in small eccentric tension under the seismic combination, the gross cross-sectional area of longitudinal
load-carrying steel reinforcement in column shall be increased by 25% than calculated value.

The ratio of reinforcement of all the longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement in frame
columns and columns supporting structural transfer member shall not be greater than 5%. The
longitudinal steel reinforcement of column should be in symmetrical arrangement. For the columns
with section dimension larger than 400mm, the spacing of longitudinal steel reinforcement should not
be larger than 200mm. If it is designed according to Seismic Grade I and the shear span ratio of
column is not larger than 2, the ratio of reinforcement of longitudinal steel reinforcement at each side
of column should not be larger than 1.2%.

11.4.14 The length in intensified zone of stirrup of frame columns shall take the maximum value
among the long side dimension of the column section (or diameter for circular section) and 1/6 of the
column net height and 500mm; for the corner columns of Seismic Grade I and II, the stirrups shall be
intensified along the full height of column. The length in intensified zone of stirrup of column root at
bottom storey shall take the value no less than 1/3 of the net height of column at this storey; if the
ground is rigid, besides the intensified zone of stirrup at column end, the stirrups shall also be
intensified within the range of 500mm height from upper and lower of the rigid ground.

11.4.15 For the spacing of stirrup legs within the range of intensified zone of column stirrups: it
should not be larger than 200mm at Seismic Grade I; it should not be larger than the larger value
between 250mm and 20 times of the diameter of stirrup at Seismic Grade II and III; it should not be
larger than 300mm at Seismic Grade IV. Every other longitudinal steel reinforcement should be
restrained in two directions with the stirrups or tie bars; if tie bars are adopted and there are bindings
between stirrups and longitudinal steel reinforcement, the tie bars should be abut against longitudinal
steel reinforcement and hooked with stirrups.

11.4.16 For every kind of structural frame columns and columns supporting structural transfer
member of Seismic Grade I, II, III and IV, the axial compression ratio should not be larger than the
limit value specified in Table 11.4.16. For the high-rise buildings in site of Category IV, the limit
value of axial compression ratio of columns shall be properly reduced.

Table 11.4.16 Limit Value of Axial Compression Ratio of Column

Seismic grade
Structural system
Grade I Grade II Grade III Grade IV

Frame structure 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.90

Frame-shear wall structure, tube structure 0.75 0.85 0.90 0.95

Partial frame-supported shear wall structure 0.60 0.70 —

Note: 1 The axial compression ratio refers to the ratio of the design value of axial compressive force on the column under seismic
action combination to the product of the total sectional area of column and the design value of concrete axial compressive
strength ;

2 If the concrete strength grade is C65 and C70, the limit value of axial compression ratio should be reduced by 0.05
according to those values specified in this Table; if the concrete strength grade is C75 and C80, the limit value of axial
compression ratio should be reduced by 0.10 according to those values specified in this Table;

3 The limit value in this Table is applicable to columns with shear span ratio larger than 2 and concrete strength no greater
than C60; for columns with shear span ratio no larger than 2, the limit value of axial compression ratio shall be reduced by
0.05; for columns with shear span ratio less than 1.5, the limit value of axial compression ratio shall be specially studied and
164
 special detailing measures shall be taken;

4 On the condition that cross combined stirrup is adopted along full height of column, and spacing of stirrup is not larger than
100mm, spacing of stirrup legs is not larger than 200mm, diameter is not less than 12mm, or combined spiral stirrup is
adopted along full height of column, and thread pitch is not larger than 100mm, spacing of stirrup legs is not larger than
200mm, diameter is not less than 12mm; or continuous combined rectangular spiral stirrup is adopted along full height of
column, and spiral clear distance is not larger than 80mm, spacing of stirrup legs is not larger than 200mm, diameter is not
less than 10mm, the limit value of axial compression ratio may all be increased by 0.10 according to the values in this Table;

5 If the core column formed by additional longitudinal steel reinforcement is arranged in column section central part and the
gross cross-sectional area of additional longitudinal steel reinforcement is not less than 0.8% of the column cross-sectional
area, the limit value of axial compression ratio may be increased by 0.05 according to those values specified in this Table; if
this measure is adopted with the measure of Note 4 at the same time, the limit value of axial compression ratio may be
increased by 0.15 according to those values specified in this Table, but the stirrup characteristic value λv of stirrup shall also
be determined in accordance with the requirements of increasing 0.10 for axial compression ratio;

6 The adjusted limit value of axial compression ratio shall not be greater than 1.05.

11.4.17 The reinforcement ratio per unit volume of stirrups in stirrup intensified zone shall meet the
following requirements:

1 The ratio of volumetric reinforcement for stirrups in intensified zone of column stirrup shall
meet the following requirement:

fc
 v  v (11.4.17)
f yv

Where ρv——The ratio of volumetric reinforcement in intensified zone of column stirrup,

calculated according to the requirements of Article 6.6.3 of this code, the stirrup
volume in overlap section shall be subtracted in calculation;

fyv——The design value of tensile strength of stirrup;

fc——The design value of axial compressive strength of concrete; if the strength grade is
less than C35, the value is taken as C35;

λv——The minimum stirrup characteristic value, adopted according to the requirements

specified in Table 11.4.17;.

Table 11.4.17 Minimum Stirrup Characteristic Value λv of Stirrup in Intensified Zone of Column Stirrup

Axial compression ratio

Seismic grade Stirrup type
≤0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.05

Ordinary stirrup, combined stirrup 0.10 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.23 — —
Grade I Spiral stirrup, combined or continuous
0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.21 — —
combined rectangular spiral stirrup

Ordinary stirrup, combined stirrup 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.19 0.22 0.24
Grade II Spiral stirrup, combined or continuous
0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.22
combined rectangular spiral stirrup

Grade III, IV Ordinary stirrup, combined stirrup 0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.22

165
 Spiral stirrup, combined or continuous
0.05 0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20
combined rectangular spiral stirrup
Note: 1 The ordinary stirrup refers to a single rectangular stirrup or a single round stirrup; the spiral stirrup refers to a single spiral
stirrup; the combined stirrup refers to the stirrups composed of rectangular, polygon, round stirrups or tie bars; combined
spiral stirrup refers to the stirrups composed of spiral stirrups and rectangular, polygon, round stirrups or tie bars;
continuous combined rectangular spiral stirrup refers to the stirrup in which all the spiral stirrups are processed by the same
steel reinforcement;

2 In calculation of ratio of volumetric reinforcement for the combined spiral stirrup, the volume of non-spiral stirrup shall be
multiplied by coefficient 0.8;

3 If the concrete strength grade is greater than C60, the stirrup should adopt combined stirrup, combined spiral stirrup or
continuous-combined-rectangular-spiral stirrup. Meanwhile, if the axial compression ratio is not larger than 0.6, the
minimum stirrup characteristic value in the intensified zone should be increased by 0.02 on the basis of the values in this
Table; otherwise it,should be increased by 0.03 instead..

2 For columns of Seismic Grade I, II, III and IV, the ratio of volumetric reinforcement for
stirrups in intensified zone shall not be less than 0.8%, 0.6%, 0.4% and 0.4% respectively;

3 Columns supporting structural transfer member should adopt combined spiral stirrups or cross
combined stirrups, and the minimum stirrup characteristic values shall be increased by 0.02 on the
basis of the values in Table 11.4.17 and the ratio of volumetric reinforcement shall not be less than
1.5%;

4 If the shear span ratio λ is not larger than 2, combined spiral stirrups or cross combined
stirrups should be adopted, and the ratio of volumetric reinforcement for stirrups shall not be less than
1.2%; at Precaution Intensity 9 and Seismic Grade I, the ratio of volumetric reinforcement shall not be
less than 1.5%.

11.4.18 Outside of the intensified zone of stirrup, the ratio of volumetric reinforcement for stirrups
should not be less than half of the ratio of reinforcement in intensified zone; for Seismic Grade I and
II, the stirrup spacing shall not be larger than 10d; for Seismic Grade III and IV, the stirrup spacing
shall not be larger than 15d, where d represents the diameter of longitudinal steel reinforcement.

11.5 Columns of Hinged Bent

11.5.1 The longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement and stirrups of columns for hinged bent
shall be determined by calculation according to the design value of bending moment and design value
of shear force under seismic combination as well as the relevant requirements of Section 11.4 of this
code; the detailing shall not only meet the relevant requirements of this section but also meet the
relevant requirements of Chapter 8, Chapter 9, Section 11.1 and Section 11.2 of this code.

11.5.2 The stirrup intensified zone of columns of hinged bent shall meet the following requirements:

1 Length of stirrup intensified zone:

1) For the column top sector, it shall take 500mm below the column top and shall not be
less than the depth of section at the column top;

2) For the crane girder sector, it shall take 300mm above the upper column root to the top
surface of the crane girder;
166
 3) For the column root sector, it shall take 500mm above the foundation top to the indoor
ground;

4) For the bracket sector, it shall take the total height of bracket;

5) For connection joints of bracings and columns as well as the parts where the column
displacement is restrained, it shall take 300mm above and below the joint respectively.

2 In the stirrup intensified zone, the maximum spacing of stirrups shall be 100mm; the
diameter of stirrups shall be in accordance with Table 11.5.2.

Table 11.5.2 Minimum Diameter of Stirrup in Stirrup Intensified Zone of Columns of Hinged Bent (mm)

Seismic grade and site category

Grade I Grade II Grade II Grade III Grade III Grade IV

Sector in Intensified zone
All category Site Category Site Category Site Category Site Category All category
of sites III and IV I and II III and IV I and II of sites

Ordinary column top and column root sector 8 (10) 8 6

Corner column top 10 10 8

Crane girder and bracket sector

10 8 8
Column root sector with bracing
Column top sector with bracing
10 10 8
Part where the columnar deflection is restrained

Note: The value in the parentheses in this Table is used for the column root.

11.5.3 If the hinged bent is restrained laterally and the height from the restraining point to the
column top is not larger than 2 times of the column section depth in the lateral direction, while the
detailings of embedded steel plates and the stirrup Intensified zone at the column top shall also meet
the following requirements:

1 The length of embedded steel plates at the column top along the direction of the bent plane
should adopt the depth of section h of the column top, but in any case it shall not be less than h/2 or
300mm;

2 If the eccentricity e0 of the axial force on the column top in the bent plane is within range of
h/6~h/4, the ratio of volumetric reinforcement for stirrups in the stirrup intensified zone at the column
top should not be less than 1.2% for Seismic Grade I, should not be less than 1.0% for Seismic Grade
II and should not be less than 0.8% for Seismic Grade III and IV.

11.5.4 Under the action of vertical force and horizontal tensile force of seismic combination, the
calculation and reinforcement arrangement for column brackets that supporting roofing structures
such as roof beams and roof trusses for lower span of industrial buildings with unequal heights shall
not only be carried out according to the requirements of Section 9.3 of this code but also meet the
following requirements:

1 Anchor bars sustaining horizontal tensile force shall not be less than two steel rebars in
diameter of 16mm for Seismic Grade I, not be less than two steel rebars in diameter of 14mm for
Seismic Grade II, and not be less than two steel rebars in diameter of 12mm for Seismic Grade III and
IV;

2 The anchoring measures and anchorage length of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement and
167
anchor bars in the bracket shall meet the relevant requirements of Article 9.3.12 of this code, whereas
the anchorage length la of tensile steel reinforcement shall be replaced by laE;

3 The minimum diameter of horizontal stirrup of the bracket shall be 8mm and the maximum
spacing shall be 100mm.

11.5.5 The straight anchor bars in embedded parts at the column top of hinged bent shall not only
meet the requirements of Article 11.1.9 of this code but also meet the following requirements:

1 Under the condition of Seismic Grade I, it shall not be less than four straight anchor bars in
diameter of 16mm;

2 Under the condition of Seismic Grade II, it shall not be less than four straight anchor bars in
diameter of 14mm;

3 For columns with bracings, the embedded parts at the column top shall be incorporated with
shear steel plates.

11.6 Joints of Frame

11.6.1 The analysis of the seismic shear capacity in the core zone of joints and joints of frame of
Seismic Grade IV may not be calculated but shall meet the requirements of details of seismic design.
The analysis method of seismic shear capacity and details of seismic design on the joints of
intermediate storey of storey supporting structural transfer member are the same as that on joints of
middle storey of frames.

11.6.2 The design value of shear force Vj in the joint core zone of frame of Seismic Grade I, II and
III shall be calculated according to the following requirements:

1 Intermediate joints and end joints at top storey

1) Frame structures of Seismic Grade I and frame of Seismic Grade I at Precaution

Intensity 9:

1.15M bua
Vj  (11.6.2-1)
hb0  as

2) Other conditions:

 jb M b
Vj  (11.6.2-2)
hb 0  as

2 Intermediate joints and end joints at other storey

1) Frame structures of Seismic Grade I and frame of Seismic Grade I at Precaution

Intensity 9:

1.15M bua  hb0  as 

Vj  1   (11.6.2-3)
hb0  as  H c  hb 

2) Other conditions:

168
  jb M b  h  a 
Vj  1  b0 s  (11.6.2-4)
hb0  as  H c  hb 

Where ΣMbua——The sum of bending moment values corresponding to the actual arranged normal
section seismic flexural capacity in counterclockwise or clockwise directions of
the beam end at left and right sides of joints; it may be determined according to
the actual arranged area of steel reinforcement (including longitudinal compressive
steel reinforcement) and the characteristic value of material strength;

ΣMb——The sum of combined bending moment design values in counterclockwise or

clockwise directions of the beam end at left and right sides of joints; the bending
moment with smaller absolute value shall take zero where the beam end at left
and right sides of joints of Seismic Grade I frames are all hogging moment;

ηjb——The amplified coefficient of the shear force on the joint, for the frame structure,
it shall take 1.50 for Grade 1, 1.35 for Grade 2 and 1.20 for Grade 3; for frames
in other structures, it shall take 1.35 for Grade 1, 1.20 for Grade 2 and 1.10 for
Grade 3;

hb0, hb——The effective depth of section and the depth of section for beams, if the beam
depth at both sides of joints are different, the mean value shall be taken;

Hc——The distance between inflection points of upper columns and lower columns of
joints;

as ——The distance from the resultant force of longitudinal compressive steel
reinforcement to nearer edge of the section.

11.6.3 The horizontal shear section in core zone of joints of frame shall meet the following
conditions:

1
Vj  (0.3 j  c f cb j h j ) (11.6.3)
 RE

Where hj——The depth of section in joint core zone of frames, which may be taken as the column
section depth hc in the checking direction;

bj——The effective analysis width of the section in joint core zone of frames, where bb is
not less than bc/2, it may be taken as bc; where bb is less than bc/2, it may be taken as
the smaller value between (bb+0.5hc) and bc; if the center lines of beams and columns
are not in the same line and the eccentricity e0 is not larger than bc/4, it may be taken
as the smallest value among (bb+0.5hc), (0.5bb+0.5bc+0.25hc － e0) and bc, where bb is
the section width of beams in the analysis direction; bc is the section width of the
column at this direction;

ηj——The restrained influence coefficient of orthogonal beams for joints: if the floor slab
is cast-in-situ, the center lines of beams and columns are coincident, the section
widths of four beams around the joint are not less than 1/2 of the section width of
column at this side, and the depth of beam in orthogonal directions is not less than
3/4 of the height of higher frame beams, ηj may be taken as 1.50, but ηj should be
169
 taken as 1.25 at Precaution Intensity 9; ηj shall be taken as 1.00 if above-mentioned
conditions are not met.

11.6.4 The seismic shear capacity of frame beam-column joints shall meet the following
requirements:

1 Frame of Seismic Grade I at Precaution Intensity 9

1  h  a 
Vj   0.9 j f t b j h j  f yv Asvj b0 s  (11.6.4-1)
 RE  s 

2 Other conditions

1  b h  a 
Vj  1.1 j f t b j h j  0.05 j N j  f yv Asvj b0 s  (11.6.4-2)
 RE  bc s 

Where N——The design value of axial force on the bottom of upper columns of joints corresponding
to the design value of shear force in consideration of seismic combination; if N is
compressive, it shall be taken as the smaller value of the design values of axial
compressive force, and if N is larger than 0.5fcbchc, it shall be taken as 0.5fcbchc; if N is
tensile, it shall be taken as 0;

Asvj——The total cross-sectional area of stirrups in the same direction of section analysis
within the range of effective analysis width in core zone;

hb0——The effective depth of section of frame beams, taken as the mean value if the section
depths of beams at two sides of the joint are unequal.

11.6.5 For beam-column joints of circular column frames, if the center lines of beam and column are
coincident, the horizontal shear section shall meet the following condition:

1
Vj  (0.3 j  c f c A j ) (11.6.5)
 RE

Where Aj——The effective cross-sectional area in joint core zone: if the beam width bb≥0.5D,
Aj=0.8D2; if 0.4D≤bb<0.5D, Aj=0.8D (bb+0.5D);

D——The diameter of circular column section;

bb——The section width of beams;

ηj——The restrained influence coefficient of orthogonal beams for joints, which may be
adopted according to Article 11.6.3 of this code.

11.6.6 For beam-column joints with circular column frames, if the center lines of beam and column
are coincident, the seismic shear capacity shall meet the following requirements:

1 Frame of Seismic Grade I at Precaution Intensity 9

170
 1  h  a h  a 
Vj  1.2 j f t A j  1.57 f yv Ash b0 s  f yv Asvj b0 s  (11.6.6-1)
 RE  s s 

2 Other conditions

1  N h  a h  a 
Vj  1.5 j f t A j  0.05 j 2 A j  1.57 f yv Ash b0 s  f yv Asvj b 0 s  (11.6.6-2)
 RE  D s s 

Where hb0——The effective depth of beam section;

Ash——The cross-sectional area of single circular stirrup;

Asvj——The total cross-sectional area of tie bars and non-circular stirrups in the same
direction of section analysis.

11.6.7 The anchorage and lap splice for longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement of frame
beams and frame columns in frame joint zone shall meet the following requirements:

1 At intermediate joint of middle storey of frames, the upper longitudinal steel reinforcement of
frame beams shall be penetrated into the intermediate joints. For all types of frames at Precaution
Intensity 9 and frame structures of Seismic Grade 1, the diameter of each longitudinal steel
reinforcement of beams penetrated central columns should meet the following requirements: if
columns are in rectangular section, it should not be larger than 1/25 of the sectional dimension of the
columns in this direction, and if columns are in circular section, it should not be larger than 1/25 of
the chord length of the column section where the longitudinal steel reinforcement is located; under the
condition of Seismic Grade I, II and III, if columns are in rectangular section, it should not be larger
than 1/20 of the sectional dimension of the columns in this direction, and for circular column section,
it should not be larger than 1/20 of the chord length of the column section where the longitudinal steel
reinforcement is located.

2 For intermediate joints at intermediate storey of frames, end joints at intermediate storey,
intermediate joints at top storey and end joints at top storey, the anchorage and lap splice of
longitudinal steel reinforcement in beams and columns at joint parts shall meet relevant detailing
requirements of Figure 11.6.7. llE in the figure shall be adopted according to the requirements of
Article 11.1.7 of this code and labE shall be adopted according to the following expression:

labE=ζaElab (11.6.7)

Where ζaE——The correction coefficient of anchorage length of longitudinal tensile steel reinfor-
cements, adopted according to the requirements of Article 11.1.7.

11.6.8 The maximum spacing and minimum diameter of the stirrups in the frame joint zone should
be adopted according to Table 11.4.12-2 of this code. For the frame joint core zone of Seismic Grade I,
II and III, the stirrup characteristic value λv should not be less than 0.12, 0.10 and 0.08 respectively
and the ratio of volumetric reinforcement for stirrups should not be less than 0.6%, 0.5% and 0.4%
respectively. If the shear span ratio for the frame columns is not larger than 2, the volumetric stirrup
ratio in the joint core zone should not be less than the larger value of the volumetric stirrup ratio at
upper and lower column ends in the core zone.

171
 (a) Anchorage of beam reinforcement at end joint in (b) 90° bending anchorage of beam reinforcement at end joint
intermediate storey plus anchor head (anchor slab) in intermediate storey

(c) Straight anchorage of beam reinforcement at intermediate (d) Lap splice of beam reinforcement at intermediate joint in
joint in intermediate storey inside joints intermediate storey outside joints

(e) 90° bending anchorage of column reinforcement at (f) Anchorage of column reinforcement at intermediate joint at
intermediate joint at top storey top storey plus Anchor head (anchor slab)

(g) Bending lap splice of steel reinforcement at outer side of (h) Linear lap splice of steel reinforcement at outer side of end
end joint at top storey and at top of beam end joint at top storey

Figure 11.6.7 Anchorage and Lap splice of Longitudinal Load-carrying steel Reinforcement of Beams and Columns
in Joint Zone

11.7 Shear Walls and Coupling Beams

11.7.1 For the design value of bending moment at each coupling wall-column section on the shear
wall of Seismic Grade I in consideration of seismic combination, it shall be adopted according to the
design value of bending moment in seismic combination at coupling wall-column section for bottom
reinforced part and it shall be adopted by using the design value of bending moment in seismic
combination at coupling wall-column section multiplying the amplified coefficient for the part above
the bottom reinforced part and the value may be taken as 1.2; the design value of shear force shall be
172
adjusted correspondingly.

11.7.2 The design value of shear force Vw in consideration of the shear wall shall be calculated
according to the following requirements:

1 Bottom reinforced part

1) Shear wall of Seismic Grade I at Precaution Intensity 9

M wua
Vw  1.1 V (11.7.2-1)
M
2) Other conditions

Seismic Grade I

Vw=1.6V (11.7.2-2)

Seismic Grade II

Vw=1.4V (11.7.2-3)

Seismic Grade III

Vw=1.2V (11.7.2-4)

The design value of shear force under seismic combination shall be taken for Seismic Grade IV.

2 Other positions

Vw=V (11.7.2-5)

Where Mwua——The bending moment of the bottom section of the shear wall, which is corresponding
to the seismic load-carrying capacity of normal section and is calculated
according to the cross-sectional area of actual arranged steel reinforcement and the
characteristic value of material strength in consideration of seismic adjustment
coefficient of load- bearing capacity; if any wing wall is built, the longitudinal
steel reinforcement within the range of one times of the wing wall thickness at
both sides of the wall shall be included;

M——The design value of bending moment at bottom section on the shear wall in
consideration of seismic combination;

V——The design value of shear force on the shear wall in consideration of seismic
combination.

In Expression (11.7.2-1), the Mwua value may be determined by adopting related and same
method for calculating the Mcua value at frame column end specified in Article 11.4.3 of this code
according to the requirements of Article 6.2.19 of this code, but the γRE value shall take the seismic
adjustment coefficient of normal section load-carrying capacity of the shear wall.

11.7.3 The shear section of the shear wall shall meet the following requirements:

If the shear span ratio is larger than 2.5

173
 1
Vw  (0.2  c f cbh0 ) (11.7.3-1)
 RE

If the shear span ratio is not larger than 2.5

1
Vw  (0.15 c f cbh0 ) (11.7.3-2)
 RE

Where Vw——The design value of shear force on the shear wall in consideration of seismic
combination.

11.7.4 The seismic shear capacity of inclined section on the shear wall in eccentric compression shall
meet the following requirements:

1  1  A  A 
Vw    0.4 f t bh0  0.1N w   0.8 f yv sh h0  (11.7.4)
 RE    0.5  A s 

Where N——The smaller one of the design values of axial compressive force on the shear wall in
consideration of seismic combination; where N is larger than 0.2fcbh, it shall take
0.2fcbh;

λ——The shear span ratio at calculated section, taking λ=M/(Vh0); where λ is less than 1.5,
it shall take 1.5; where λ is larger than 2.2, it shall take 2.2; hereof, M is the design
value of bending moment corresponding to the design shear force value V; if the
distance between the calculated section and the wall bottom is less than h0/2, it shall
be calculated according to the design value of shear force and design value of
bending moment at the place where is h0/2 away from the wall bottom.

11.7.5 The seismic shear capacity of inclined section on the shear wall in eccentric tension shall
meet the following requirements:

1  1  A  A 
Vw    0.4 f t bh0  0.1N w   0.8 f yv sh h0  (11.7.5)
 RE    0.5  A s 

Where N——The larger one of the design values of axial tensile force on the shear wall in
consideration of seismic combination.

If the calculated value in the right square brackets of Expression (11.7.5) is less than
Ash A
0.8 f yv h0 , it shall be taken as equivalent to 0.8 f yv sh h0 .
s s
11.7.6 For shear walls of Seismic Grade I, the shear capacity at horizontal construction joint shall
meet the following requirement:

1
Vw  (0.6 f y As  0.8 N ) (11.7.6)
 RE

Where N——The design value of axial force at horizontal construction joint in consideration of
174
 seismic combination, the positive value shall be adopted for compression, and the
negative value shall be adopted for tension;

As——The cross-sectional area of all vertical steel reinforcement at horizontal construction

joint of the shear wall, including the gross cross-sectional area of vertically
distributed steel reinforcement, additional vertical inserted steel bars and longitudinal
steel reinforcement in boundary members (excluding wing walls at both sides).

11.7.7 For coupling beams in tube and shear wall opening, if the symmetric reinforcement is
adopted, the normal section flexural load-carrying capacity shall meet the following requirements:

1
Mb  [ f y As (h0  as )  f yd Asd zsd cos  ] (11.7.7)
 RE

Where Mb——The design value of bending moment at coupling beam end on the shear wall in
consideration of seismic combination;

fy——The design value of tensile strength of longitudinal steel reinforcement;

fyd——The design value of tensile strength of diagonal bars;

As——The cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel reinforcement in single-side tension;

Asd——The cross-sectional area of single-direction diagonal bars, which shall be taken as 0

if there is no diagonal bars;

zsd——The distance from the diagonal bars at calculated section to the point for resultant
forces of section in compression zone;

α——The included angle of diagonal bars and beam longitudinal axis;

h0——The effective depth of coupling beam section.

11.7.8 The design value of shear force Vwb of the coupling beam at the tube and shear wall opening
shall be calculated according to the following requirements:

1 Frame of Seismic Grade I at Precaution Intensity 9

l
M bua  M bua
r
Vwb  1.1  VGb (11.7.8-1)
ln

2 Other conditions

M bl  M br
Vwb   vb  VGb (11.7.8-2)
ln

l r
Where M bua , M bua ——The bending moment values corresponding to actual arranged flexural
load-carrying capacity in clockwise or counterclockwise direction at left
and right ends of coupling beam respectively, which shall be calculated
according to actual arranged area of steel reinforcement (including
compressive steel reinforcement) and the characteristic value of material
175
 strength and in consi- deration of seismic adjustment coefficient of
load-carrying capacity;

M bl , M br ——The design values of bending moment at left and right coupling beam end of
the shear wall and tube respectively in consideration of seismic combination.
The sum of M bl and M br shall be calculated according to clockwise and
counterclockwise directions respectively and the larger value shall be taken.
For Seismic Grade I, if the bending moment at both end are all hogging
moment, the bending moment value with smaller absolute value shall be
taken as zero;

ln——The clear span of coupling beam;

VGb——The design value of shear force caused by the representative value of gravity
load in consideration of seismic combination, which may be determined by
calculating according to simple-supported beams;

ηvb——The amplified coefficient of the shear force on coupling beam. For coupling
beams with ordinary stirrups, it shall be taken as 1.3 at Seismic Grade I, 1.2
at Seismic Grade II, 1.1 at Seismic Grade III and 1.0 at Seismic Grade IV;
ηvb of coupling beam arranged with diagonal bars shall be taken as 1.0.

11.7.9 For the coupling beam of the shear wall and tube opening at any seismic grade, if it is
arranged with ordinary stirrups, the section limit condition and shear capacity of inclined section shall
meet the following requirements:

1 If span-depth ratio is larger than 2.5

1) The shear section shall meet the following requirement:

1
Vwb  (0.20  c f cbh0 ) (11.7.9-1)
 RE

2) The shear capacity of inclined section on coupling beams shall meet the following
requirement:

1  A 
Vwb   0.42 f t bh0  sv f yv h0  (11.7.9-2)
 RE  s 

2 If the span-depth ratio is not larger than 2.5,

1) The shear section shall meet the following requirement:

1
Vwb  (0.15 c f cbh0 ) (11.7.9-3)
 RE

2) The shear capacity of inclined section on coupling beams shall meet the following
requirement:

176
 1  A 
Vwb   0.38 f t bh0  0.9 sv f yv h0  (11.7.9-4)
 RE  s 

Where ft——The design value of concrete tensile strength;

fyv——The design value of tensile strength of stirrups;

Asv——The cross-sectional area of stirrups arranged in the same section.

11.7.10 For the coupling beam of Seismic Grade I and II, if the span-depth ratio is not larger than
2.5, besides ordinary stirrups, the intersecting steel reinforcement in inclined direction should be
arranged additionally and the section limit condition and shear capacity of inclined section may be
calculated according to the following requirements:

1 If the section width of coupling beam of the opening is not less than 250mm, the intersecting
diagonal bars may be adopted (Figure 11.7.10-1); the section limit condition and shear capacity of
inclined section shall meet the following requirements:

1) The shear section shall meet the following requirement:

1
Vwb  (0.25 c f cbh0 ) (11.7.10-1)
 RE

2) The shear capacity of inclined section shall meet the following requirements:

1
Vwb  [0.4 f t bh0  (2.0 sin   0.6 ) f yd Asd ] (11.7.10-2)
 RE

  ( fsv Asv h0 )/(sf yd Ayd ) (11.7.10-3)

Where η——The reinforcement strength ratio of stirrups and diagonal bars, it shall be taken as 0.6
where it is less than 0.6 and it shall be taken as 1.2 where it is larger than 1.2;.

α——The included angle between longitudinal axes of diagonal bars and beam;

fyd——The design tensile strength of diagonal bars;

Asd——The cross-sectional area of single-direction diagonal bars;

Asv——The total cross-sectional area of each leg of stirrups arranged in the same section.

177
 Figure 11.7.10-1 Coupling beam with Intersecting Diagonal Bars
1—diagonal bar; 2—segmented reinforcement; 3—longitudinal steel reinforcement

2 If the section width of coupling beam is not less than 400mm, the intensive diagonal
reinforcement (Figure 11.7.10-2) or diagonal concealed bracing reinforcement (Figure 11.7.10-3) may
be adopted, the section limit condition and shear capacity of inclined section shall meet the following
requirements:

1) The shear section shall meet the requirements of Expression (11.7.10-1).

2) The shear capacity of inclined section shall meet the following requirement:

2
Vwb  f yd Asd sin  (11.7.10-4)
 RE

Figure 11.7.10-2 Coupling beam with Intensive Diagonal Reinforcement

1—diagonal bars; 2—tie bar

178
 Figure 11.7.10-3 Coupling beam with Diagonal Concealed Bracing Reinforcement
1—diagonal concealed bracing

11.7.11 The detailing of longitudinal steel reinforcement, diagonal bars and stirrups for coupling beams
on the shear wall and tube opening shall meet the following requirements:

1 The minimum ratio of reinforcement of single-side longitudinal steel reinforcement on

coupling beams along upper and lower edge shall not be less than 0.15%, and the reinforcement
should not be less than 2ø12; the single-direction diagonal bars on coupling beams with intersecting
diagonal reinforcement should not be less than 2ø12, while the cross-sectional area of single group
segmented reinforcement may be taken as half of the cross-sectional area of single-direction diagonal
bars, and the diameter should not be less than 12mm; each group of diagonal bars on coupling beams
with intensive diagonal reinforcement and coupling beams with diagonal concealed bracing shall be at
least composed of 4 wires of steel reinforcement with diameters no less than 14mm.

2 The diagonal bars of coupling beams with intersecting diagonal reinforcement shall be
arranged with no less than 3 wires of tie bars at beam end part, while the spacing of tie bars shall not
be larger than the smaller value of coupling beam width and 200mm and the diameter shall not be less
than 6mm; the coupling beam with intensive diagonal reinforcement shall be arranged with two-way
tie bars along horizontal direction and vertical direction within the beam section, where the tie bar
shall be hooked with outer longitudinal steel reinforcements, while the spacing shall not be larger than
200mm and the diameter shall not be less than 8mm; in coupling beams with diagonal concealed
bracing reinforcement, the outer-edge of concealed bracing stirrups along direction of the beam
section width should not be less than half of beam width and it should not be less than 1/5 of beam
width in the other direction; the spacing of stirrups for the diagonal concealed bracing restrains should
not be larger than 6 times of diameter of steel reinforcement with concealed bracing, while it may be
taken as 100mm when the calculated spacing is less than 100mm and the spacing of stirrup legs shall
not be larger than 350mm.

Except coupling beams with intensive diagonal reinforcement, the steel mesh reinforcement
formed by horizontal steel reinforcement and stirrups of the other coupling beams shall be tied by tie
bars. The diameter of the tie bar should not be less than 6mm and the spacing should not be larger
than 400mm.

3 The detailing of stirrups along the full length of coupling beams should be adopted according
to detailing requirements of stirrups in frame beam end intensified zone specified in Article 11.3.6 and
Article 11.3.8 of this code; for coupling beams with diagonal concealed bracing reinforcement, the
spacing of stirrups along the full length of coupling beams may be taken as twice of specified value in

179
Table 11.3.6-2 of this code.

4 The anchorage length of longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement and intersecting

diagonal bars of coupling beams extended into the wall shall not be less than laE and shall not be less
than 600mm; within the range of length for longitudinal steel reinforcement of coupling beams at top
storey extended into the wall, the constructional stirrup with spacing no larger than 150mm shall be
arranged, the diameter of stirrup shall be the same as the diameter of stirrup of this coupling beam.

5 The horizontally distributed steel reinforcement of the shear wall may be adopted as the
longitudinal constructional steel reinforcement of coupling beams to penetrate within range of
coupling beams. If the depth of beam web hw is not less than 450mm, the diameter of longitudinal
constructional steel reinforcement arranged along the beam depth range at both sides shall not be less
than 10mm, and the spacing shall not be larger than 200mm; for coupling beams with span-depth ratio
no larger than 2.5, the area ratio of reinforcement for longitudinal constructional steel reinforcement at
both sides of beams shall also not be less than 0.3%.

11.7.12 The section thickness of coupling wall-column on the shear wall shall meet the following
requirements:

1 Shear wall structure: at Seismic Grade I and II, at general position, it shall not be less than
160mm and should not be less than storey height or 1/20 of non-support part length; at Seismic Grade
III and IV, it shall not be less than 140mm and should not be less than storey height or 1/25 of non-
support part length. At bottom reinforced part of Seismic Grade I and II, it shall not be less than
200mm and should not be less than storey height or 1/16 of non-support part length, if there are no
end columns or wing walls at wall end, the wall thickness should not be less than storey height or 1/12
of non-support part length.

2 Frame-shear wall structure: at general position, it shall not be less than 160mm and should
not be less than storey height or 1/20 of non-support part length; at bottom reinforced part, it shall not
be less than 200mm and should not be less than storey height or 1/16 of non-support part length.

3 Frame-core tube structure and tube-in-tube structure: at general position, it shall not be less
than 160mm and should not be less than storey height or 1/20 of non-support part length; at bottom
reinforced part, it shall not be less than 200mm and should not be less than storey height or 1/16 of
non-support part length. The wall thickness should not be changed for the bottom reinforced part of
the tube and its upper one storey.

11.7.13 if the shear wall thickness is larger than 140mm, the steel reinforcement distributed in
vertical and horizontal directions shall be arranged at least in two rows.

11.7.14 The horizontal and vertical distributing steel reinforcement in the shear wall shall
meet the following requirements:

1 The ratio of reinforcement for horizontal and vertical distributing steel reinforcement
in the shear wall of Seismic Grade I, II and III all shall not be less than 0.25%; it shall not be
less than 0.2% for the shear wall of Seismic Grade IV;

2 For the bottom reinforced part of the shear wall partially supporting structural transfer
member, the ratio of reinforcement for horizontal and vertical distributing steel reinforcement
shall not be less than 0.3%.

Note: For the shear wall of Seismic Grade IV with height less than 24m and very small shear compressive ratio, the minimum
180
 ratio of reinforcement for vertical distributing reinforcement shall be allowed to adopt as 0.15%.

11.7.15 The spacing of horizontal and vertical distributing steel reinforcement in the shear wall
should not be larger than 300mm, while the diameter should not be larger than 1/10 of wall thickness
and shall not be less than 8mm; the diameter of vertical distributing steel reinforcement should not be
less than 10mm.

For the bottom reinforced part of the shear wall partially supporting structural transfer member,
the spacing of horizontal and vertical distributing steel reinforcement in the shear wall should not be
larger than 200mm.

11.7.16 For the shear wall of Seismic Grade I, II and III, the axial compression ratio of coupling
wall-column at bottom reinforced part should not exceed the limit value specified in Table 11.7.16.

Table 11.7.16 Limit Value of Axial Compression Ratio on Shear Wall

Seismic grade (precaution intensity) Grade I (Intensity 9) Grade I (Intensity 7 and 8) Grade II and III

Limit value of axial compression ratio 0.4 0.5 0.6

Note: The axial compression ratio of coupling wall-column in shear wall refers to the ratio of the design value of the wall axial
pressure under the action of the representative value of the gravity load to the product of the total cross-sectional area of the
wall and the design value of axial compressive strength of concrete.

11.7.17 The boundary members shall be arranged at both ends of the shear wall and both sides of the
opening and should meet the following requirements:

1 For the shear wall of Seismic Grade I, II and III, under the action of the representative value
of the gravity load, if the axial compression ratio at bottom section of the coupling wall-column is
larger than Table 11.7.17, the restraining boundary members shall be arranged according to the
requirements of Article 11.7.18 of this code for the coupling wall-column at bottom reinforced part
and its upper one storey; if the axial compression ratio of the coupling wall-column is not larger than
those specified in Table 11.7.17, the constructional boundary members may be arranged according to
the requirements of Article 11.7.19 of this code;

Table 11.7.17 Maximum Axial Compression Ratio of Constructional Boundary Members Arranged for Shear Walls

Seismic grade (precaution intensity) Grade 1 (Intensity 9) Grade 1 (Intensity 7 and 8) Grade 2 and 3

Axial compression ratio 0.1 0.2 0.3

2 In the shear wall partially supporting structural transfer member, at bottom reinforced part of
the shear wall linked with the ground at Seismic Grade I, II and III and both ends of the coupling
wall-column at its upper one storey, the wing walls or end columns should be arranged and the
restraining boundary members shall be arranged according to the requirements of Article 11.7.18 of
this code; for the shear wall not linked with the ground, the restraining boundary members shall be
arranged at bottom reinforced part and both ends of coupling wall-column of the shear wall at the
upper one storey;

3 The shear wall at general position for the shear wall of Seismic Grade I, II and III as well as
the shear wall of Seismic Grade 4 shall be arranged with constructional boundary members according
to Article 11.7.19 of this code;

4 For the frame-core-tube structure, the boundary members for the core tube corner wall of
Seismic Grade I, II and III shall also be strengthened according to the following requirements: at
181
bottom reinforced part, the length of restraining boundary members for the coupling wall-column
should take 1/4 of depth of section at coupling wall-column and the stirrup should be adopted
completely within range of restraining boundary members; above the bottom reinforced part, the
restraining boundary members should be arranged according to the requirements of Figure 11.7.18 of
this code.

11.7.18 The restraining boundary members (embedded columns, end columns, wing walls and corner
walls) arranged at the shear wall end shall meet the following requirements (Figure 11.7.18):

1 The length lc of restraining boundary members along the coupling wall-column and the
stirrup characteristic value λv should meet Table 11.7.18. The arranged range of stirrups and the area
of corresponding stirrup characteristic value λv and λv/2 are as shown in Figure 11.7.18 and the ratio of
volumetric reinforcement ρv shall meet the following requirement:

fc
 v  v (11.7.18)
f yv

Where λv——The stirrup characteristic value, which may be included in tie bar in calculation.

Table 11.7.18 Length lc along Coupling Wall-column and its Stirrup Characteristic Value λv for Restraining Boundary
Members

Seismic grade (precaution intensity) Grade I (Intensity 9) Grade I (Intensity 7 and 8) Grade II and III

Axial compression ratio ≤0.2 >0.2 ≤0.3 >0.3 ≤0.4 >0.4

λv 0.12 0.20 0.12 0.20 0.12 0.20

Embedded column 0.20hw 0.25hw 0.15hw 0.20hw 0.15hw 0.20hw

lc (mm)
End column, wing wall or corner wall 0.15hw 0.20hw 0.10hw 0.15hw 0.10hw 0.15hw

Note: 1 If the length of the wing wall at both sides is less than 3 times of the thickness, it shall be deemed as the shear wall without
wing walls; if the side length of the end column section is less than 2 times of wall thickness, it shall be deemed as the shear
wall without end columns;

2 The length lc along coupling wall-column of restraining boundary members shall not only meet Table 11.7.18, but also
should not be less than the wall thickness and 400mm; if there are end columns, wing walls or corner walls, it shall also not be
less than the wing wall thickness or the depth of section at the end column along the coupling wall-column direction plus
300mm;

3 hw is the depth of section at coupling wall-column of the shear wall.

(a) Embedded column (b) End column

182
 (c) Wing wall (d) Corner wall

Figure 11.7.18 Restraining Boundary Members of Shear Wall

Note: The dimensional unit in this Figure is mm.
1—area where the stirrup characteristic value is λv; 2—area where the stirrup characteristic value is λv/2

When calculating the volumetric stirrup ratio, the cross-sectional area of horizontal distributing
steel reinforcement meeting detailing requirements and with reliable anchorage at wall end may be
properly included.

2 The cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel reinforcement in restraining boundary members

of the shear wall of Seismic Grade I, II and III for the embedded columns, end columns, wing walls
and corner walls shown in Figure 11.7.18 shall not be less than 1.2%, 1.0% and 1.0% of shaded area
in this figure respectively.

3 For the vertical spacing of stirrups or tie bars in restraining boundary members, it should not
be larger than 100mm for Seismic Grade I; it should not be larger than 150mm for Seismic Grade II
and III.

11.7.19 The range of constructional boundary members (embedded columns, end columns, wing
walls and corner walls) arranged at the shear wall end shall be determined according to Figure 11.7.19,
the longitudinal steel reinforcement in constructional boundary members shall not only meet the
calculation requirements but also shall be in accordance with Table 11.7.19.

(and ≥400)

(and 2bw, ≥bf)

(a) Embedded column (b) End column (c) Wing wall (d) Corner wall

Figure 11.7.19 Detailing Boundary Members of Shear Wall

Note: The dimensional unit in this Figure is mm.

Table 11.7.19 Detailing Reinforcement Requirements for Constructional Boundary Members

Bottom reinforced part Other parts

Minimum reinforcement Stirrup and tie bar Minimum reinforcement Stirrup and tie bar
Seismic
amount of longitudinal steel Minimum Maximum amount of longitudinal steel Minimum Maximum
grade
reinforcement (taking the diameter spacing reinforcement (taking the diameter spacing
larger value) (mm) (mm) larger value) (mm) (mm)
183
 I 0.01Ac, 6 16 8 100 0.008Ac, 6 14 8 150

II 0.008Ac, 6 14 8 150 0.006Ac, 6 12 8 200

III 0.006Ac, 6 12 6 150 0.005Ac, 4 12 6 200

IV 0.005Ac, 4 12 6 200 0.004Ac, 4 12 6 250

Note: 1 Ac is the shaded area as shown in Figure 11.7.19;

2 For other parts, the spacing of horizontal tie bars shall not be greater than twice of spacing of longitudinal steel
reinforcement and the stirrups should be arranged at corner;

3 If the end column is under concentrated load, it shall meet the reinforcement requirements for the frame column.

11.8 Prestressed Concrete Structural Members

11.8.1 Prestressed concrete structures may be used in zones of Seismic Precaution Intensity 6, 7 and
8. When prestressed concrete structures are required to be used in the Intensity 9 zone, the sufficient
criteria shall be provided and reliable measures shall be taken..

The seismic design of unbonded prestressed concrete structure shall meet specialized requirements.

11.8.2 In the seismic design, bonded prestressing tendons should be adopted for post-tensioned
prestressed frames, portals and transfer girders in transfer storey, While unbonded prestressing tendons
shall be adopted for prestressed tension members of load-carrying structures and prestressed frame of
Seismic Grade I.

11.8.3 The seismic calculation for prestressed concrete structures shall meet the following
requirements:

1 The damping ratio of prestressed concrete frame structures should take 0.03; in frame- shear
wall structures, frame-core-tube structures and slab column-shear wall structures, if only the prestressed
concrete beams or slabs are adopted, the damping ratio shall take 0.05;

2 In the section seismic analysis of prestressed concrete structural members, in seismic

combination, for the partial coefficient of prestress action, if the prestress action effect is favorable for
the load-carrying capacity of the member, it shall take 1.0, if not, it shall take 1.2;

3 If prestressing tendons are crossing the core zone of joint of frame, the analysis of the section
seismic shear capacity of joint core zone shall be carried out according to the relevant requirements of
Section 11.6 of this code, and the favorable influence of effective jacking force may be considered.

11.8.4 The seismic detailing of prestressed concrete frames shall not only meet the requirements of
reinforced concrete structures but also shall meet the following requirements:

1 For the end section of prestressed concrete frame beams, the depth of concrete compression
zone included in longitudinal compressive steel reinforcement shall meet the requirements of Article
11.3.1 of this code; the ratio of reinforcement for all longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement converted
according to the design tensile strength of steel rebars should not be larger than 2.5%.

2 In prestressed concrete frame beams, the combined reinforcement mode of prestressing

tendons and steel rebars shall be adopted; the reinforcement at the beam end section should meet the
following requirement:

184
 1  f py hp 
As   Ap (11.8.4)
3  f y hs 

Note: For post-tensioned bonded prestressed concrete frames in frame-shear wall and frame-core-tube structures of Seismic Grade II
and III, the coefficient 1/3 in right items of Expression (11.8.4) may be changed to 1/4.

3 The cross-sectional area ratio of the bottom longitudinal steel rebars to the top longitudinal
load-carrying steel reinforcement at the beam end section of prestressed concrete frame beams shall
meet the requirements of Clause 2 of Article 11.3.6 in this code. If the cross-sectional area of the top
longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement is calculated, the prestressing tendons shall be
converted to the cross-sectional area of steel rebars according to the design value of tensile strength.

The ratio of reinforcement for longitudinal steel rebars at bottom surface of the frame beam end
shall also not be less than 0.2%.

4 If the axial compression ratio of prestressed concrete frame columns is calculated, the design
value of axial compressive force shall take the design value of axial compressive force on the column
combination plus the design value of effective jacking force on prestressing tendons, the axial
compression ratio shall meet corresponding requirements of Article 11.4.16 in this code.

5 The stirrups of prestressed concrete frame columns should be intensified in full height. The
large-span frame side column may be adopted with non-symmetric reinforcement mode in which the
combined reinforcement of prestressing tendons and steel rebars are arranged at one side where the
section tension is larger and steel rebars are arranged only at the other side).

11.8.5 For post-tensioning prestressed concrete slab column-shear wall structures, the end section of
the column strips on the slab column shall meet the requirements of the depth of compression zone
specified in Article 11.8.4 of this code and the requirements of section reinforcement stated in
Expression (11.8.4).

The slab-column joints shall meet the requirements of Section 11.9 of this code.

11.8.6 The anchorage and connector of post-tensioning prestressing tendons should not be arranged
in the core zone of beam-column joints.

11.9 Slab-column Joints

11.9.1 For slab-column joints of Seismic Grade I, II and III, the analysis of seismic punching shear
capacity shall be carried out according to Article 11.9.3 and Appendix F of this code.

11.9.2 In the condition of Precaution Intensity 8, the slab-column joints with supporting plates or
column caps should be adopted and the profile and dimension of column caps and supporting plates
shall meet the requirements of Article 9.1.10 of this code. Meanwhile, the root thickness (including
plate thickness) of supporting plates or column caps shall not be less than 16 times of the diameter of
column longitudinal steel reinforcement of column, while the side length of supporting plates or
column caps shall not be less than the sum of 4 times of plate thickness and the corresponding side
length of column sections.

11.9.3 Under seismic combination, if the shear stress on the critical section of slab-column joints
transferring unbalanced bending moment is considered, the design value Fl,eq of equivalent concentrated

185
reaction in consideration of seismic grade may be calculated according to the requirements of Appendix
F of this code, here, Fl is the design value of vertical force carried by the critical section of
slab-column joints. The design value of equivalent concentrated reaction caused by the unbalanced
bending moment of seismic combination at slab-column joints shall multiply the amplified coefficient,
for joints in slab-column structures of Seismic Grade I, II and III. The amplified coefficient may be
taken as 1.7, 1.5 and 1.3 respectively.

11.9.4 Under seismic combination, for the slab-column joints arranged with stirrups or studs, the
punching shear section and punching shear capacity shall meet the following requirements:

1 Punching shear section

1
Fl , eq  (1.2 f tum h0 ) (11.9.4-1)
 RE

2 Punching shear capacity

1
Fl , eq  [(0.3 f t  0.15 pc, m )um h0  0.8 f yv Asvu ] (11.9.4-2)
 RE

3 For sections outside the punching failure cone arranged with punching resistant steel
reinforcement, the analysis of punching shear capacity shall also be carried out according to the
following expression:

1
Fl , eq  (0.42 f t  0.15 pc, m )um h0 (11.9.4-3)
 RE

Where um——The perimeter of critical sections, um in Expression (11.9.4-1) and Expression

(11.9.4-2) shall be adopted according to the requirements of Article 6.5.1 of this
code; um in Expression (11.9.4-3) shall take the most unfavorable perimeter where is
0.5h0 outside the periphery of the punching resistant steel reinforcement in the
outmost row.

11.9.5 The constructional concealed beams should be arranged in the column strip for flat slabs
without column caps, the concealed beam width may be taken as the column width plus no larger than
1.5 times of slab thickness at both sides of columns respectively. The upper longitudinal steel
reinforcement on the lug support of concealed beams shall not be less than 1/2 of the cross-sectional
area of longitudinal steel reinforcement on the column strip; the lower longitudinal steel
reinforcement in concealed beams should not be less than 1/2 of the cross-sectional area of upper
longitudinal steel reinforcement.

The diameter of stirrups in concealed beams shall not be less than 8mm, the spacing should not
be larger than 3/4 times of slab thickness and the spacing of stirrup legs should not be larger than 2
times of slab thickness; the length of stirrup intensified zone for concealed beams at lug support shall
not be less than 3 times of slab thickness, the stirrup spacing should not be larger than 100mm, and
the spacing of stirrup legs should not be larger than 250mm.

11.9.6 The continuous prestressing tendons and longitudinal steel rebars at slab bottom penetrating
the joint column section along two principal axis directions shall meet the following requirements:
186
 1 The gross cross-sectional area of continuous steel reinforcement penetrating the joint column
section along two principal axis directions shall meet the requirements of the following expression:

f py Ap  f y As  N G (11.9.6)

Where As——The cross-sectional area of longitudinal steel rebars at slab bottom penetrating the
column section; for steel rebars that one end is in stretch-bending anchorage at the
opposite side of the column section, the cross-sectional area shall be halved;

Ap——The cross-sectional area of continuous prestressing tendons penetrating the column

section; for prestressing tendon that one end is anchored at the opposite side of the
column section, it shall be calculated as half of the cross-sectional area;

fpy——The design tensile strength of prestressing tendons, for unbonded prestressing

tendons, it shall adopt the design stress value σpu of unbonded prestressing tendons
according to Article 10.1.14 of this code;

NG——The design value of axial compressive force in the column, under the action of the
representative value of the gravity load from the floor of this storey.

2 The continuous prestressing tendons shall be arranged in the upper part of slab-column joints
and extended into the slab concavely.

3 The splice positions of longitudinal steel rebars at the slab bottom should be outside the
larger distance between laE and 2 times of slab thickness away from the column surface and shall
avoid the tension zone of the slab bottom.

187
 Appendix A Nominal Diameter, Cross-sectional area and Theoretical

Self-weight of Steel Reinforcement

Table A.0.1 Nominal Diameter, Cross-sectional area and Theoretical Self-weight of Steel Reinforcement

Nominal Nominal cross-sectional area of various number of steel reinforcement (mm2) Theoretical self-weight of
diameter single steel reinforcement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(mm) (kg/m)
6 28.3 57 85 113 142 170 198 226 255 0.222
8 50.3 101 151 201 252 302 352 402 453 0.395
10 78.5 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 0.617
12 113.1 226 339 452 565 678 791 904 1017 0.888
14 153.9 308 461 615 769 923 1077 1231 1385 1.21
16 201.1 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1809 1.58
18 254.5 509 763 1017 1272 1527 1781 2036 2290 2.00 (2.11)
20 314.2 628 942 1256 1570 1884 2199 2513 2827 2.47
22 380.1 760 1140 1520 1900 2281 2661 3041 3421 2.98
25 490.9 982 1473 1964 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 3.85 (4.10)
28 615.8 1232 1847 2463 3079 3695 4310 4926 5542 4.83
32 804.2 1609 2413 3217 4021 4826 5630 6434 7238 6.31 (6.65)
36 1017.9 2036 3054 4072 5089 6107 7125 8143 9161 7.99
40 1256.6 2513 3770 5027 6283 7540 8796 10053 11310 9.87 (10.34)
50 1963.5 3928 5892 7856 9820 11784 13748 15712 17676 15.42 (16.28)
Note: Figures in parentheses are the values of prestressed deformed steel reinforcement.

Table A.0.2 Nominal Diameter, Cross-sectional area and Theoretical Self-weight of Steel Strands

Type Nominal diameter (mm) Nominal cross-sectional area (mm2) Theoretical self-weight (kg/m)

8.6 37.7 0.296

1×3 10.8 58.9 0.462

12.9 84.8 0.666

9.5 54.8 0.430

12.7 98.7 0.775

1×7
15.2 140 1.101
Standard type
17.8 191 1.500

21.6 285 2.237

Table A.0.3 Nominal Diameter, Cross-sectional area and Theoretical Self-weight of Steel Wires

Nominal diameter (mm) Nominal cross-sectional area (mm2) Theoretical self-weight (kg/m)

5.0 19.63 0.154

7.0 38.48 0.302

9.0 63.62 0.499

188
Appendix B Approximate Coefficient Method for Second Order Effect of

Sway Structure

B.0.1 In frame structures, shear wall structures, frame-shear wall structures and tube structures, if
the amplified coefficient method is adopted for the approximate calculation of the second order effect
(P-Δ effect) of structure due to sway, then the bending moment at the end of column and wall column,
the bending moment at the beam end and the storey drift, obtained from the first order elastic analysis
without consideration of P-Δ effect, shall be multiplied respectively by the amplified coefficient ηs
according to Expression (B.0.1-1) and Expression (B.0.1-2):

M  M ns  s M s (B.0.1-1)

   s 1 (B.0.1-2)

Where Ms——The design value of first order bending moment at the end of the member, induced by
loads or actions that result in the sway of structure and calculated by elastic
analysis;

Mns——The design value of first order bending moment at the end of the member, induced
by loads not causing the sway of structure and calculated by elastic analysis ;

Δl——The storey drift in first order elastic analysis;

ηs——The amplified coefficient of P-Δ effect, which shall be determined in accordance

with Article B.0.2 or Article B.0.3 of this code, therein, ηs at beam end shall be
taken as the mean value of ηs for the upper and lower column ends or upper and
lower wall column ends at the corresponding joint.

B.0.2 In frame structures, ηs of columns in the calculated storey may be calculated according to the
following expression:

1
s  (B.0.2)
N j
1
DH 0

Where D——The lateral stiffness of the calculated storey. When calculating the amplified coefficients
for bending moment of structural members and for displacement of structures, the
stiffness of structural members shall be adopted respectively in accordance with
Article B.0.5 of this code;

Nj——The design value of axial force of the jth row columns at the calculated storey;

H0——The storey height of the calculated storey.

B.0.3 ηs in shear wall structures, frame-shear wall structures and tube structures may be calculated
according to the following expression:

189
 1
s  (B.0.3)
H 2 G
1  0.14
Ec J d

Where ΣG——The sum of design values of the gravity loads of all storeys;

EcJd——The flexural stiffness of the vertical uniform cantilever flexural member that is
equivalent to the designed structure, which may be calculated according to the
principle that the top displacement of this cantilever flexural member under the
action of horizontal loads distributed in inverted triangle is same as that of the
designed structure. When calculating the amplified coefficients for bending moment
of structural members and for displacement of structures, the stiffness of the
structural members shall be adopted respectively in accordance with Article B.0.5
of this code;

H——The total height of structure.

B.0.4 The design value of bending moment of the bent structural columns, in consideration of
second order effect, may be calculated according to the following expressions:

M  s M 0 (B.0.4-1)

2
1  l0 
s  1    c (B.0.4-2)
1500ei / h0  h 

0.5 f c A
c  (B.0.4-3)
N

ei  e0  ea (B.0.4-4)

Where ζc——The correction coefficient for section curvature; ζ=1.0 if ζ >1.0;

ei——The initial eccentricity;

M0——The design value of bending moment at column end in first order elastic analysis;

e0——The eccentricity of axial compressive force to centroid of section, and e0=M0/N;

en——The additional eccentricity, which is determined according to Article 6.2.5 of this

code;

l0——The effective length of bent frame column, which is adopted in accordance with
Table 6.2.20-1 of this code;

h, h0——Respectively the depth of section and effective depth of section of the column in the
considered bending direction respectively;

A——The cross-sectional area of column. For I-shaped section: A  bh  2(bf  b)hf .

B.0.5 Where the amplified coefficient ηs for bending moment in various structures is calculated by
adopting with Article B.0.2 and Article B.0.3 of this code, the elastic flexural stiffness EcI of members
should be multiplied by the reduction coefficient; for beams, the reduction coefficient shall be 0.4; for
columns, the reduction coefficient shall be 0.6; and for shear wall columns and corewall columns, the
190
reduction coefficient shall 0.45; in the calculation of the amplified coefficient ηs for displacement in
various structures, the stiffness may not be reduced.
Note: Where the checking shows that the control sections of shear wall column or corewall column do not crack, the stiffness
reduction coefficient may be taken as 0.7 for the calculation of amplified coefficient ηs for bending moment.

191
Appendix C Constitutive Relations for Steel Reinforcement and Concrete

and the Rule of Multi-axial Strength for Concrete

C.1 Constitutive Relation of Steel Reinforcement

C.1.1 The mean values fym and fstm of yield strength and ultimate strength of steel rebars may be
calculated according to the following expressions:

f ym  f yk /(1  1.645 s ) (C.1.1-1)

f stm  f stk /(1  1.645 s ) (C.1.1-2)

Where fyk, fym——The characteristic value and mean value of yield strength of steel reinforcement
respectively;

fstk, fstm——The characteristic value and mean value of ultimate strength of steel
reinforcement respectively;

δs——The variation coefficient for strength of steel reinforcement, which should be

determined in accordance with the experimental statistics.

C.1.2 The stress-strain constitutive relation curve of steel reinforcement under monotonic loading
(Figure C.1.2) may be determined according to the following requirements.

(a) Steel reinforcement with yield point (b) Steel reinforcement without yield point

Figure C.1.2 Stress-strain Constitutive Relation Curve of Steel Reinforcement under Monotonic Loading

1 Steel reinforcement with yield point

 Es s s   y

 f y, r  y   s   uy
s   (C.1.2-1)
 f y, r  k ( s   uy )  uy   s   u
0 s  u

2 Steel reinforcement without yield point

1
  Es s s   y

 p   f y, r  k ( s   y )  y  s  u (C.1.2-2)

0 s  u

Where Es——The elastic modulus of steel reinforcement;

σs——The stress of steel reinforcement;

εs——The strain of steel reinforcement;

fy, r——The representative value of yield strength of steel reinforcement, its value may be
taken as fy, fyk or fym respectively in accordance with the requirement of actual
structural analysis.

fst, r——The representative value of ultimate strength of steel reinforcement, its value may be
taken as fst, fstk or fstm respectively in accordance with the requirement of actual
structural analysis;

εy——The yield strain of steel reinforcement corresponding to fy, r, which may be fy, r/Es;

εuy——The strain at hardening starting point of steel reinforcement;

εu——The peak strain of steel reinforcement corresponding to fst, r;

k——The slope of the hardening segment of steel reinforcement, k=(fst, r－fy, r)/(εu－εuy).

C.1.3 The stress-strain constitutive relation curve of steel reinforcement under repeated loading
(Figure C.1.3) should be determined according to the following expression or may be expressed by
adopting simplified dashed line form.

p
   
 s  Es ( s   a )   s a  [ Es ( b   a )   b ] (C.1.3-1)
 b  a 

Figure C.1.3 Stress-strain Curve of Steel Reinforcement undr Repeated Loading

( Es  k )( b   a )
p (C.1.3-2)
Es ( b   a )   b

Where εa——The strain corresponding to the starting point of reloading route;

2
 σb, εb——The stress and strain corresponding to the end point of reloading route respectively.
If the steel reinforcement in the reloading direction has not yet yielded, then σb and εb
shall be taken as the stress and strain at the initial yield point of steel reinforcement.
If the steel reinforcement in the reloading direction has already yielded, then εb shall
be taken as the maximum historical strain of steel reinforcement in this direction.

C.2 Constitutive Relation of Concrete

C.2.1 The mean values fcm and ftm of compressive strength and tensile strength of concrete may be
calculated according to the following expressions:

f cm  f ck /(1  1.645 c ) (C.2.1-1)

f tm  f tk /(1  1.645 c ) (C.2.1-2)

Where fcm, fck——The mean value and characteristic value of the compressive strength of concrete
respectively;

ftm, ftk——The mean value and characteristic value of the tensile strength of concrete
respectively;

δc——The variation coefficient for concrete strength, which should be determined in

accordance with the experimental statistics.

C.2.2 The concrete constitutive model specified in this section shall be applicable to the following
conditions:

1 Concrete strength grade: C20~C80;

2 Mass density of concrete: 2200kg/m3~2400kg/m3;

3 Environment with normal temperature and humidity;

4 Normal loading rate.

C.2.3 The stress-strain curve of concrete under uniaxial tension (Figure C.2.3) may be determined
according to the following expressions:

  (1  d t ) Ec (C.2.3-1)

 1   t [1.2  0.2 x 5 ] x 1

dt   t (C.2.3-2)
1   ( x  1)1.7  x x 1
 t


x (C.2.3-3)
 t, r

f t, r
t  (C.2.3-4)
Ec t, r
3
Where αt——The parameter value for the descending segment of stress-strain curve of concrete
under uniaxial tension, which shall be adopted in accordance with Table C.2.3;

ft, r——The representative value of uniaxial tensile strength of concrete, its value may be
taken as ft, ftk or ftm respectively in accordance with the requirement of actual
structural analysis;

εt, r——The peak tension strain of concrete corresponding to the representative value of
uniaxial tensile strength ft, r, which shall be adopted in accordance with Table C.2.3;

dt——The parameter of concrete damage evolution under uniaxial tension.

Table C.2.3 Values of the Stress-strain Curve Parameters of Concrete under Uniaxial Tension

ft, r (N/mm2) 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0

－6
εt, r (10 ) 65 81 95 107 118 128 137

α1 0.31 0.70 1.25 1.95 2.81 3.82 5.00

Figure C.2.3 Uniaxial Stress-strain Curve of Concrete

Note: The schematic diagrams of the stress-strain curve of concrete under tension and compression are drawn in one same coordinate
system but in different scales. The signs shall be “positive for concrete under tension and negative for concrete under compression”.

C.2.4 The stress-strain curve of concrete under uniaxial compression (Figure C.2.3) may be determined
according to the following expressions:

  (1  d c ) Ec (C.2.4-1)

 cn
 1  n  1  x n x 1
dc   (C.2.4-2)
1 
c
x 1
  c ( x  1) 2  x

f c, r
c  (C.2.4-3)
Ec c, r

Ec c, r
n (C.2.4-4)
Ec c, r  f c, r
4
 
x (C.2.4-5)
 c, r

Where αc——The parameter value for the descending segment of stress-strain curve of concrete
under uniaxial compression, which shall be adopted in accordance with Table C.2.4;

fc, r——The representative value of uniaxial compressive strength of concrete, its value may
be taken as fc, ftk or fcm respectively in accordance with the requirement of actual
structural analysis;

εc, r——The peak compression strain of concrete corresponding to the uniaxial compressive
strength fc, r, which shall be adopted in accordance with Table C.2.4;

dc——The parameter of concrete damage evolution under uniaxial compression.

Table C.2.4 Values of the Stress-strain Curve Parameters of Concrete under Uniaxial Compression

fc, r (N/mm2) 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
－6
εc, r (10 ) 1470 1560 1640 1720 1790 1850 1920 1980 2030 2080 2130 2190 2240

ac 0.74 1.06 1.36 1.65 1.94 2.21 2.48 2.74 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 3.99

εcu/εc, r 3.0 2.6 2.3 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.6

Note: εcu is the compression strain of concrete when the stress in the descending segment of stress-strain curve equals to 0.5fc,r.

C.2.5 Under the action of repeated load, the unloading and reloading stress routes (Figure C.2.5) of
concrete under compression may be determined according to the following expressions:

  Er (   z ) (C.2.5-1)

 un
Er  (C.2.5-2)
 un   z

 ( un   ca ) un 
 z   un    (C.2.5-3)
  un  Ec ca 

 c 0.09 un 
 ca  max  ,   (C.2.5-4)
  c   un  c  c un

Where σ——The compressive stress of concrete under compression;

ε——The compression strain of concrete under compression;

εz——The residual strain when the concrete under compression is unloaded to the zero
stress point;

Er——The deformation modulus of the unloading/reloading of concrete under compression;

σun, εun——The stress and strain respectively when the concrete under compression is unloaded
starting from the skeleton line;

5
 εca——The additional strain;

εc——The strain of concrete corresponding to the peak compressive stress.

Figure C.2.5 Stress-strain Curve of Concrete under the Action of Repeated Loading

C.2.6 The constitutive relation of concrete under the conditions of biaxial loading and unloading
may be adopted with damage model or elastoplastic model. The elastoplastic constitutive relation may
be adopted with constitutive theory of elastoplastic increment and the damage constitutive relation
may be determined according to the following expressions:

1 Biaxial tension zone ( 1  0,2  0)

1) Loading equation

 1   1 
   (1  d t )  (C.2.6-1)
 2   2 

1
 t, e   [( 1 ) 2  ( 2 ) 2  2v 1 2 ] (C.2.6-2)
1 v 2

 1  Ec 1 v   1 
  v 1   (C.2.6-3)
 2  1  v
2
  2 

Where dt——The parameter of tension damage evolution, which may be calculated according to
 t, e
Expression (C.2.3-2), therein, x  ;
t
εt, e——The equivalent strain of tension energy;

 1,  2 ——The effective stress;

v——The Poisson’s ratio of concrete, which may be taken from 0.18~0.22.

2) Unloading equation

 1   un, 1  Ec 1 v   1   un, 1 
   (1  d t )   (C.2.6-4)
 2   un, 2  1  v 2 v 1  2   un, 2 

Where σun, 1, σun, 2, εun, 1, εun, 2——The stress and strain at the two-dimensional unloading points.
6
 In the loading equation, the parameter of damage evolution shall be calculated by adopting the
equivalent strain of energy that is converted from the instantaneous strain; in the unloading equation,
the parameter of damage evolution shall be calculated by adopting the equivalent strain of energy that
is converted from the strain at unloading point and shall remain constant during the whole process of
unloading and reloading.

2 Biaxial compression zone (  1  0,  2  0 )

1) Loading equation

 1   1 
   (1  d c )  (C.2.6-5)
 2   2 

1
 c, e  [ s (1  v )( 1   2 )
(1  v )(1   s )
2

 ( 1  v 2 ) 2  ( 2  v 1 ) 2  ( 1  v 2 )( 2  v 1 ) ] (C.2.6-6)

r 1
s  (C.2.6-7)
2r  1
Where dc——The parameter of compression damage evolution, which may be calculated according
 c, e
to Expression (C.2.4-2), therein, x  ;
c
εc, e——The equivalent strain of compression energy;

αs——The shear yielding parameter;

r——The improvement coefficient for biaxial compressive strength, which may be taken
from 1.15~1.30 and may be determined in accordance with experimental data, and
may be taken as 1.2 if the experimental data are insufficient.

2) Unloading equation

 1   un, 1  Ec 1 v   1   un, 1 
   (1   d d c ) v 1     (C.2.6-8)
 2   un, 2  1 v2    2 un, 2 

 c, e
d  (C.2.6-9)
 c, e   ca

Where ηd——The plastic factor;

εca——The additional strain, which shall be calculated according to Expression (C.2.5-4).

3 Biaxial tension-compression zone (  1 <0,  2 ≥0) or (  1 ≥0,  2 <0)

1) Loading equation

7
  1  (1  d t ) 0   1 
    (C.2.6-10)
 2  0 (1  d c )  2 

1
 t, e    1 ( 1   2 ) (C.2.6-11)
(1  v 2 )

Where dt——The parameter of tension damage evolution, which may be calculated according to
 t, e
Expression (C.2.3-2), therein, x  ;
t
dc——The parameter of compression damage evolution, which may be calculated according
 c, e
to Expression (C.2.4-2), therein, x  ;
c
εt, e, εc, e——The equivalent strain of energy, therein, εc, e shall be calculated according to
Expression (C.2.6-6) and εt, e may be calculated according to Expression (C.2.6-11).

2) Unloading equation

 1   un, 1  Ec  1  dt )
（ (1  d t )v  1   un, 1 
     (C.2.6-12)
 2   un, 2  1  v (1  d d c )v (1  d d c )   2   un, 2 
2

Where ηd——The plastic factor.

C.3 Bond-slip Constitutive Relations Between Steel Reinforcement and Concrete

C.3.1 The constitutive bond stress-slip (τ － s) relation curve between concrete and hot rolled ribbed
steel rebar (Figure C.3.1) may be determined according to the following requirements, and the parameter
values at the characteristic points of this curve may be selected in accordance with Table C.3.1.

Figure C .3.1 Bond Stress-slip Curve Between Concrete and Steel Reinforcement

Linear segment

  k1s 0  s  scr (C.3.1-1)

Split segment
8
  cr  k2 (s  scr ) scr  s  su (C.3.1-2)

Descending segment

 u  k3(s  su ) su  s  sr (C.3.1-3)

Residual segment

  r s  sr (C.3.1-4)

Unloading segment

 un  k1(s  sun) (C.3.1-5)

Where τ——The bond stress between concrete and hot rolled ribbed steel rebar (N/mm2);

s——The relative slip between concrete and hot rolled ribbed steel rebar (mm);

k1——The slope of linear segment, τcr/scr;

k2——The slope of split segment, (τu－τcr)/(su－scr);

k3——The slope of descending segment, (τr－τu)/(sr－su);

τun——The bond stress at unloading point (N/mm2);

sun——The relative slip of unloading point (mm).

Table C.3.1 Values of Parameters of Bond Stress-slip Curve Between Concrete and Steel Reinforcement

Characteristic point Split (cr) Peak (u) Residual (r)

Bond stress (N/mm2) τcr 2.5ft,r τu 3ft,r τr ft, r

Relative slip (mm) scr 0.025d su 0.04d sr 0.55d

Note: In this Table, d is diameter of steel reinforcement (mm); ft, r is the characteristic value of concrete tensile strength (N/mm2).

C.3.2 Except for the hot rolled ribbed steel rebars, the parameter values of constitutive bond stress-
slip relation curve of other types of steel reinforcement may be determined in accordance with tests.

C.4 Concrete Strength Criterion

C.4.1 When the calculation of load-carrying capacity is carried out by adopting with multi-axial
strength criterion for concrete, the value of material strength parameter and the calculation of resistance
shall meet the following principles:

1 When the action effect is determined by adopting elastic-plastic method, the concrete
strength index should take the mean value;

2 When the calculation of load-carrying capacity of members is carried out by adopting with
the analysis results by elastic method or elastic-plastic method, the concrete strength index may taken
the design value (fc or ft) or characteristic value (fck or ftk) of strength as required;

3 After obtaining the stress distribution and principal stress of concrete through elastic analysis
9
or elastic-plastic analysis, the analysis of multi-axial strength of concrete shall meet the following
requirement:

i  fi (i 1, 2,3) (C.4.1)

Where σi——The value of the principal stress of concrete, which is negative if the concrete is
under tension and is positive if the concrete is under compression, and σ1≥σ2≥σ3;

fi——The value of the multi-axial strength of concrete, which is negative if the concrete is
under tension and is positive if the concrete is under compression, and f1≥f2≥f3.

C.4.2 Under the condition of biaxial stresses, the biaxial strength of concrete shall be determined by
the closed curve (Figure C.4.2) that is formed by the following four curves or may also be adopted by
interpolation method based on the values listed in Table C.4.2-1, Table C.4.2-2 and Table C.4.2-3.

The envelope curve equation of strength shall meet the following expressions:

Figure C.4.2 Strength Envelope Diagram of Concrete Under Biaxial Stresses

 L1 : f12  f 22  2vf 1 f 2  ( f t, r ) 2

 L2 : f12  f 22  f1 f 2   s ( f1  f 2 )  (1   s ) f c, r

 f2 f
 L3 :  1 1 (C.4.2)
 f c, r f t, r
 f1 f
 L4 :  2 1
 f c, r f t, r

Where αs——The shear yielding parameter, which shall be determined by Expression (C.2.6-7).

Table C.4.2-1 Tensile Strength of Concrete under Biaxial Tension-compressive stresses

f2/ft, r 0 －0.1 －0.2 －0.3 －0.4 －0.5 －0.6 －0.7 －0.8 －0.9 －1.0

f1/fc, r 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.30 0.20 0.10 0

10
 Table C.4.2-2 Tensile Strength of Concrete under Biaxial Compression

f1/fc, r 1.0 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.29 1.25 1.20 1.16

f2/fc, r 0 0.074 0.16 0.25 0.36 0.50 0.88 1.03 1.11 1.16

Table C.4.2-3 Tensile Strength of Concrete under Biaxial Tension

f1/ft, r －0.79 －0.7 －0.6 －0.5 －0.4 －0.3 －0.2 －0.1 0

f2/ft, r －0.79 －0.86 －0.93 －0.97 －1.00 －1.02 －1.02 －1.02 －1.00

C.4.3 The strength of concrete under triaxial stresses may be determined according to the following
requirements:

1 Under the state of triaxial tension (tension-tension-tension) stresses, the triaxial tensile
strength of concrete may be taken as 0.9 times of the uniaxial tensile strength;

2 The triaxial compressive strength f1 of concrete under the triaxial tension-compression (tension-
tension-compression, tension-compression-compression) stresses may be determined according to
Figure C.4.3-1 based on the stress ratio σ3/σ1 and σ2/σ1, or may be adopted by interpolation method
based on Table C.4.3-1, and the maximum strength should not exceed 1.2 times of the uniaxial
compressive strength;

Table C.4.3-1 Adjustment Coefficient (f1/fc, r) for Compressive Strength of Concrete under Triaxial
Tension-compression

σ2/σ1
－0.75 －0.50 －0.25 －0.10 －0.05 0 0.25 0.35 0.36 0.50 0.70 0.75 1.00
σ3/σ1

－1.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

－0.75 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05

－0.50 — 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10

－0.25 — — 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20

－0.12 — — — 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30

－0.10 — — — 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40

－0.08 — — — — 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50

－0.05 — — — — 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60

－0.04 — — — — — 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70

－0.02 — — — — — 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80

－0.01 — — — — — 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90

0 — — — — — 1.00 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20

Note: Positive sign represents compression and negative sign represents tension.

3 The triaxial compressive strength f1 of concrete under the triaxial compression (compression-
compression-compression) stresses may be determined according to Figure C.4.3-2 based on the
stress ratio σ3/σ1 and σ2/σ1, or may be adopted by interpolation method based on Table C.4.3-2, and the
maximum strength should not exceed 5 times of the uniaxial compressive strength;

11
 Figure C.4.3-1 Triaxial Compressive Strength of Concrete Under Triaxial Tension-compressive stresses

Table C.4.3-2 Improvement Coefficient (f1/fc, r) for Compressive Strength of Concrete under Triaxial Compression

σ2/σ1
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00
σ3/σ1
0 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20

0.05 — 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40

0.08 — — 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64

0.10 — — 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80

0.12 — — — 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00

0.15 — — — 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30

0.18 — — — — 2.72 2.72 2.72 2.72 2.72 2.72 2.72

0.20 — — — — 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00

Figure C.4.3-2 Triaxial Compressive Strength of Concrete under Triaxial Compression

12
 Appendix D Design of Plain Concrete Structural Members

D.1 General Requirements

D.1.1 Plain concrete members are mainly used as compression members. Plain concrete flexural
members are only allowed to be used when horizontally located on the base and not carrying any live
loads.

D.1.2 Plain concrete structural members shall be carried out with the calculation of normal section
load-carrying capacity; and the positions carrying local loads shall also be carried out with the
calculation of local bearing capacity.

D.1.3 The effective length l0 of plain concrete walls and columns may be adopted according to the
following requirements:

1 l0=H if both ends of the wall or column are supported on rigid horizontal structures;

2 l0=1.25H~1.50H if the wall or column has elastic mobile supports;

3 l0=2H for free standing walls and columns.

Hereof, H is the height of the wall or column and is measured by the storey height.

D.1.4 The maximum spacing of the expansion joints of plain concrete structures may be selected
according to Table D.1.4.

As for the entire piece of plain concrete wall structures, the expansion joints should be built into
through type to disconnect the foundation.

Table D.1.4 Maximum Spacing Between Expansion Joints of Plain Concrete Structures (m)

Structural type Indoor or in soil In the open air

Precast structure 40 30
Cast-in-situ structure (with constructional steel reinforcement) 30 20
Cast-in-situ structure (without constructional steel reinforcement) 20 10

D.2 Compression Members

D.2.1 As for the plain concrete compression members, if the calculation is done in accordance with
the compression load-carrying capacity, the action of concrete in the tension zone is not considered
and the normal stress shape in the compression zone is assumed to be rectangular, while the stress
value shall be taken as the design value of axial compressive strength of plain concrete, in this case,
the acting point of axial force is superposed with the point of concrete resultant force in the
compression zone.

The compression load-carrying capacity of plain concrete compression member shall meet the
following requirements:

1 Section that is symmetric to the action plane of bending moment

13
 N  f cc Ac (D.2.1-1)

The depth of compression zone (x) shall be determined according to the following conditions:

ec=e0 (D.2.1-2)

Here, the distance e0 between the acting point of axial force and the centroid of section shall
meet the following requirement:

e0  0.9 y0 (D.2.1-3)

2 Rectangular section (Figure D.2.1)

N≤φfccb(h－2e0) (D.2.1-4)

Where N——The design value of axial compressive force;

φ——The stability coefficient of plain concrete members, which shall be adopted according
to Table D.2.1;

fcc——The design value of axial compressive strength of plain concrete, which shall be
adopted according to the design value of axial compressive strength of concrete (fc)
as specified in Table 4.1.4-1 of this code multiplied by the coefficient of 0.85;

Ac ——The area of the concrete compression zone;

ec——The distance between the point of resultant force of concrete in compression zone
and the centroid of section;

y0 ——The distance between the centroid of section and the edge of compression zone;
b——The width of section;

h——The depth of section.

Figure D.2.1 Calculation of Compression Load-carrying Capacity of the Plain Concrete Compression Members
with Rectangular Section
1—Gravity center; 2—Gravity center line

If the compression load-carrying capacity is calculated according to Expression (D.2.1-1) or

Expression (D.2.1-4), the concrete tension zone shall be distributed with constructional steel
reinforcement in relation to the compression members with e0 no less than 0.45 y0 . The ratio of
14
reinforcement shall not be less than 0.05% of the cross-sectional area of member. However, if the
conditions of Expression (D.2.2-1) or Expression (D.2.2-2) in this code are met, the member may not
be applied with the constructional steel reinforcement stated in this Item.

Table D.2.1 Stability Coefficient φ of Plain Concrete Member

l0/b <4 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

l0/i <14 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 76 83 90 97 104

φ 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.91 0.86 0.82 0.77 0.72 0.68 0.63 0.59 0.55 0.51 0.47 0.44

Note: To calculate l0/b, the value of b shall use the depth of section of the acting plane of bending moment for eccentric compression
members, or use the short side size of the section for axial compression members.

D.2.2 For plain concrete compression members that are not allowed to crack (for instance, the
compression members and parapet walls under liquid pressure, etc.), if e0 is not less than 0.45 y0 , the
compression load-carrying capacity shall be calculated according to the following expressions:

1 Section that is symmetric to the acting plane of bending moment

f ct A
N  (D.2.2-1)
e0 A
1
W
2 Rectangular section
f ct bh
N  (D.2.2-2)
6e0
1
h
Where fct——The design value of axial tensile strength of plain concrete, which shall be adopted
according to the design value of axial tensile strength of concrete (ft) as specified in
Table 4.1.4-2 of this code multiplied by the coefficient of 0.55;

γ——The plastic influence coefficient for the section modulus, which shall be adopted in
accordance with Article 7.2.4 of this code;

W——The elastic section modulus;

A——The cross-sectional area.

D.2.3 Plain concrete eccentric compression members not only shall be calculated with the
compression load-carrying capacity of the acting plane of bending moment, but also shall be checked
with the compression load-carrying capacity perpendicular to the acting plane of bending moment in
accordance with axial compression members. Here, the action of bending moment shall not be
considered, but the influence of stability coefficient φ shall be considered.

D.3 Flexural Members

D.3.1 The flexural capacity of plain concrete flexural members shall meet the following requirements:

1 Section that is symmetric to the acting plane of bending moment

M≤γfctW (D.3.1-1)

2 Rectangular section

15
 f ct bh 2
M (D.3.1-2)
6
Where M——The design value of bending moment.

D.4 Local Constructional Steel Reinforcement

D.4.1 The plain concrete structures shall be distributed with local constructional steel reinforcement
at the following positions:

1 Position where the sectional dimension of the member changes abruptly;

2 Position where the wall height varies (steel reinforcement shall be arranged at least in the
range of 1m);

3 Around the opening in concrete wall.

Note: After local constructional steel reinforcement is arranged, the spacing of expansion joints shall also be adopted in accordance with
the cast-in-situ structures without constructional steel reinforcement as stated in Table D.1.4 of this code.

D.5 Local Bearing

D.5.1 The local bearing capacity of plain concrete members shall meet the following requirements:

1 Local bearing area only withstanding localised force

Fl≤ωβlfccAl (D.5.1-1)

2 Local bearing area also withstanding nonlocalised force

Fl≤ωβl(fcc－σ)Al (D.5.1-2)

Where Fl——The design value of the localised force acting on the local bearing area;

Al——The local bearing area;

ω——The influence coefficient of load distribution: if the loads on the local bearing area are
distributed uniformly, ω=1; if the localised loads are nonuniformly distributed (such
as the end supporting area of beam and lintel), ω=0.75;

σ——The concrete compressive stress produced by the design value of nonlocalised force;

βl——The strength improvement coefficient of concrete under local bearing, which shall
be calculated in accordance with Expression (6.6.1-2) of this code.

16
 Appendix E Calculation for Flexual and Axial Capacity of Circular,

Annular and Arbitrary Cross Sections

E.0.1 For reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete members with arbitrary section, the
load-carrying capacity of normal section may be calculated according to the following methods:

1 The section is divided into multiple finite concrete units, longitudinal steel reinforcement
units and prestressing tendon units (Figure E.0.1a). The internal strain and stress of the units is
regarded as being of uniform distribution approximately, and the point of the resultant force is
adopted at the gravity center of the unit;

2 The strain of each unit is determined by the following expressions in accordance with the
assumption of section-strain retention plane specified in Article 6.2.1 of this code (Figure E.0.1b):

εci= u [(xcisinθ+ycicosθ)－r] (E.0.1-1)

εsj=－ u [(xsjsinθ+ysjcosθ)－r] (E.0.1-2)

εpk=－ u [(xpksinθ+ypkcosθ)－r]+εp0k (E.0.1-3)

3 The ultimate curvature u of the section when reaching the ultimate limit state shall be

determined in accordance with the following two kinds of conditions:

1) When the compression strain εc of concrete on the outer edge of the compression zone of
section reaches the ultimate compression strain εcu of concrete and the strain εsl of the
outermost row of steel reinforcement in the tension zone is less than 0.01, shall be
calculated according to the following expression:

 cu
u  (E.0.1-4)
xn

2) When the strain εsl of the outermost row of steel reinforcement in the tension zone of
section reaches 0.01 and the compression strain εc of concrete on the outer edge of
compression zone is less than the ultimate compression strain εcu of concrete, shall be
calculated according to the following expression:

0.01
u  (E.0.1-5)
h01  xn

4 The compressive stress of concrete unit and the stress of steel rebar unit and prestressing
tendon unit shall be determined in accordance with the fundamental assumption stated in Article 6.2.1
of this code;

5 The normal section load-carrying capacity of members shall be calculated according to the

17
following expressions (Figure E.0.1):

l m n
N    ci Aci    sj Asj    pk Apk (E.0.1-6)
i 1 j 1 k 1

l m n
M x    ci Aci xci    sj Asj xsj    pk Apk xpk (E.0.1-7)
i 1 j 1 k 1

l m n
M y    ci Aci yci    sj Asj ysj    pk Apk ypk (E.0.1-8)
i 1 j 1 k 1

Where N——The design value of axial force, N adopts positive value if the force is compressive
and adopts negative value if the force is tensile;

Mx, My——Te design values of bending moment in directions of x axis and y axis of the section
respectively for eccentrically loaded members: if the members are under eccentric
compression, the additional bending moment caused by additional eccentricity shall
be considered; My adopts positive value if the axial compressive force acts on the
upside of x axis and Mx adopts negative value if the axial compressive force acts on
the right side of y axis; if the members are under eccentric tension, the influence of
additional eccentricity shall not be considered;

εci, σci——The strain and stress of the ith concrete unit respectively: if the concrete unit is under
compression, both εci and σci adopt positive values; if the concrete unit is under
tension, the stress σci=0; the serial number i is 1, 2,…, l, hereof, l is the number of
concrete units;

Aci——The area of the ith concrete unit;

xci, yci——The distances from the gravity center of the ith concrete unit to y axis and x axis
respectively, which shall adopt positive values if xci is on the right side of y axis and
yci is on the upside of x axis;

εsj, σsj——The strain and stress of the jth steel rebar unit respectively, which adopt positive
values if the steel rebar unit is under tension, the stress σsi shall meet the condition of
Expression (6.2.1-6) in this code; and the serial number j is 1, 2,…, m, hereof, m is
the number of steel rebar units;

Asj——The area of the jth steel rebar unit;

xsj, ysj——The distances from the gravity center of the jth steel rebar unit to y axis and x axis
respectively, which shall adopt positive values if xsj is on the right side of y axis and
ysj is on the upside of x axis;

εpk, σpk——The strain and stress of the kth prestressing tendon unit respectively, which adopt
positive values if the unit is under tension, and stress σpk shall meet the condition of
Expression (6.2.1-7) in this code, the serial number k is 1, 2, …, n, hereof, n is the
number of prestressing tendon units;

εp0k——The strain of the kth prestressing tendon unit at the gravity center if the normal stress
18
 of concrete is equal to zero, its value shall be σp0k divided by the elastic modulus of
prestressing tendon and shall adopt positive value if the unit is under tension; and σp0k
shall be calculated according to Expression (10.1.6-3) or Expression (10.1.6-6) of this
code;

Apk——The area of the kth prestressing tendon unit;

xpk, ypk——The distances from the gravity center of the kth prestressing tendon unit to y axis and
x axis respectively, which shall adopt positive values if xpk is on the right side of y
axis and ypk is on the upside of x axis;

x, y——The two coordinate axes of the rectangular coordinate system with the centroid of
section as origin respectively;

r——The distance between centroid and neutral axis of section;

h01——The distance, perpendicular to the neutral axis, between the outer edge of the comp-
ression zone of section and the outermost row steel rebars of the tension zone;

θ——The included angle between x axis and neutral axis, which adopts positive value in
clockwise direction;

xn——The distance between the neutral axis and the outermost edge of compression zone.

(a) Sections, reinforcement and (b) Strain distribution (c) Stress distribution
the division of their units

Figure E.0.1 Calculation of the Normal Section Load-carrying Capacity of Members with Arbitrary Sections

E.0.2 The normal section flexural capacity of flexural members with annular or circular sections
shall be calculated in accordance with Article E.0.3 and Article E.0.4 of this code. However, in
calculation, Expression (E.0.3-1), Expression (E.0.3-3) and Expression (E.0.4-1) shall take the equal
sign and the design value of axial force N=0; meanwhile, Nei in Expression (E.0.3-2), Expression
(E.0.3-4) and Expression (E.0.4-2) shall be replaced by the design value of bending moment M.

E.0.3 For eccentric compression members with annular section and uniformly arranged with
longitudinal steel reinforcement along its periphery (Figure E.0.3), the normal section compression
load-carrying capacity should meet the following requirements:

1 Reinforced concrete members

N  1 f c A  (   t ) f y As (E.0.3-1)

19
 sin  (sin   sin  t )
Nei  1 f c A(r1  r2 )  f y As rs (E.0.3-2)
2 
2 Prestressed concrete members

N  1 f c A   p0 Ap  f py Ap   t ( f py   p0 ) Ap (E.0.3-3)

sin  sin  sin  t

Nei  1 f c A( r1  r2 )  f py Ap rp  ( f py   p0 ) Ap rp (E.0.3-4)
2  
The coefficient and eccentricity in the above-mentioned expressions shall be calculated
according to the following expressions:

αt=1－1.5α (E.0.3-5)

ei=e0+ea (E.0.3-6)

Where A——The cross-sectional area of annular section;

As——The cross-sectional area of all the longitudinal steel rebars;

Ap——The cross-sectional area of all the longitudinal prestressing tendons;

r1, r2——The inside and outside radii of the annular section respectively;

rs——The radius of the circle in which the gravity center of longitudinal steel rebars
located;

rp——The radius of the circle in which the gravity center of longitudinal prestressing
tendons located;

e0——The eccentricity of axial compressive force to centroid of section;

ea——The additional eccentricity, determined according to Article 6.2.5 of this code;

α——The ratio of the concrete cross-sectional area of compression zone to the total
cross-sectional area;

αt——The ratio of the cross-sectional area of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement to the
cross-sectional area of all the longitudinal steel reinforcement, and αt shall be taken
as 0 if α is larger than 2/3.

 2r 
3 If α is less than arccos  1
 / , eccentric compression members with annular section

 1 r2 
r
may be calculated according to the expression for normal section compression load-carrying capacity
of eccentric compression member with circular section stated in Article E.0.4 of this code.

Note: This Article is applicable to the condition that the amount of longitudinal steel reinforcement in the section is not less than 6 and
r1/r2 is not less than 0.5.

20
 Figure E.0.3 Annular Section with Reinforcement Uniformly Distributed Along the Periphery

E.0.4 For reinforced concrete eccentric compression members with circular section and uniformly
arranged with longitudinal steel rebars along its periphery (Figure E.0.4), the normal section
compression load-carrying capacity should meet the following requirements:

 sin 2 
N  1 f c A1    (   t ) f y As (E.0.4-1)
 2 

2 sin 3  sin   sin  1

Nei  1 f c Ar  f y As rs (E.0.4-2)
3  

αt=1.25－2α (E.0.4-3)

ei=e0+ea (E.0.4-4)

Where A——The cross-sectional area of circular section;

As——The cross-sectional area of all the longitudinal steel rebars;

r——The radius of circular section;

rs——The radius of the circle in which the gravity center of longitudinal steel rebars
located;

e0——The eccentricity of axial pressure to centroid of section;

ea——The additional eccentricity, determined according to Article 6.2.5 of this code;

α——The ratio of the central angle (rad) corresponding to the concrete cross-sectional area
in compression zone to 2π;

αt——The ratio of the cross-sectional area of longitudinal tensile steel rebars to the
cross-sectional area of all the longitudinal steel rebars, and at shall be taken as 0 if a
is larger than 0.625.

Note: This Article is applicable to the condition that the amount of longitudinal steel rebars allocated in the section is not less than 6.

21
 Figure E.0.4 Circular Section with Reinforcement Uniformly Distributed Along the Periphery

E.0.5 For eccentric tension members with annular or circular section and uniformly arranged with
longitudinal steel reinforcement along the periphery, the normal section tension load-carrying capacity
shall meet the requirements of Expression (6.2.25-1) of this code, the design value of normal section
flexural capacity Mu in this expression may be calculated according to Article E.0.2 of this code, but
this expression shall use equal sign and Nei shall be replaced by Mu.

22
 Appendix F Design Value of Equivalent Concentrated Reaction Used for

Calculation of Slab-column Joints

F.0.1 For slab-column joints under the actions of vertical load and horizontal load, the design value
of equivalent concentrated reaction (Fl, eq) used for the calculation of punching shear capacity may be
determined in accordance with the following conditions:

1 For slab-column joints transferring unidirectional unbalanced bending moment:

When the acting plane of the unbalanced bending moment coincides with one of the two axial
lines of the rectangular section of column, Fl, eq may be calculated in accordance with the following
two conditions:

1) For the unidirectional unbalanced bending moment α0Munb transferred by the joint under
shear force, if its acting direction points to the AB edge in Figure F.0.1, the design value
of the equivalent concentrated reaction may be calculated according to the following
expressions:

 0 M unb aCD
Fl , eq  Fl  um h0 (F.0.1-1)
Ic

Munb=Munb, c－Fleg (F.0.1-2)

2) For the unidirectional unbalanced bending moment a0Munb transferred by the joint under
shear force, if its acting direction points to the CD edge in Figure F.0.1, the design value
of the equivalent concentrated reaction may be calculated according to the following
expressions:

 0 M unb aCD
Fl , eq  Fl  um h0 (F.0.1-3)
Ic

Munb=Munb, c+Fleg (F.0.1-4)

Where Fl——The storey difference of the design value of axial compressive force endured by
column minus the design value of loads endured by slab within the scope of punching
failure cone at column top, under the action of vertical loads and horizontal loads;

α0——The calculation coefficient, which shall be calculated in accordance with Article

F.0.2 of this code;

Munb——The design value of unbalanced bending moment caused by vertical load and
horizontal load to the gravity axis (axial line 2 as shown in Figure F.0.1) of the
perimeter of critical section;

Munb, c——The design value of unbalanced bending moment caused by vertical load and
horizontal load to the gravity axis (axial line 1 as shown in Figure F.0.1) of the
column section;

aAB, aCD——The distances from the perimeter gravity axis of critical section to the AB and CD
23
 edges respectively;

Ic——The similar polar moment of inertia calculated in accordance with critical section,
which shall be calculated in accordance with Article F.0.2 of this code;

eg——The distance from the gravity axis of column section in the acting plane of bending
moment to the perimeter gravity axis of critical section, which shall be calculated in
accordance with Article F.0.2 of this code; for section of central column section as
well as the section of side column with the acting plane of bending moment parallel
to the free edge, eg=0.

Figure F.0.1 Geometric Parameters for Rectangular Column and for Calculation of Punching Shear capacity
(a) Section of Central Column; (b) Section of side column (the acting plane of bending moment is perpendicular to the free edge)
(c) Section of side column (acting plane of bending moment is parallel to the free edge); (d) Section of corner column
1—axial line of the gravity center G of column section; 2—axial line of the perimeter gravity center g of critical section;
3—acting plane of unbalanced bending moment; 4—free edge

2 For slab-column joints transferring bidirectional unbalanced bending moment:

When the unbalanced bending moment transferred by the joint under shear force to the two
directions of the perimeter of critical section are α0xMunb, x and α0yMunb, y, the design value of equivalent
concentrated reaction may be calculated according to the following expressions:

Fl , eq  Fl   unb, max um h0 (F.0.1-5)

24
 0x M unb, x ax 0y M unb, y y
 unb, max   (F.0.1-6)
I cx I cy

Where τunb, max——The design value of maximum shear stress produced on the critical section by the
bidirectional unbalanced bending moment that is transferred due to shear force;

Munb, x, Munb, y——The design value of the bending moment at the perimeter gravity center of critical
section respectively in directions of x axis and y axis caused by vertical load and
horizontal load, which shall be determined according to the same method as
Expression (F.0.1-2) or Expression (F.0.1-4);

α0x, α0y——The calculation coefficients for x axis and y axis respectively, which shall be
determined in accordance with Article F.0.2 and Article F.0.3 of this code;

Icx, Icy——The similar polar moment of inertia for x axis and y axis as calculated in
accordance with critical section respectively, which shall be calculated in
accordance with Article F.0.2 and Article F.0.3 of this code;

ax, ay——The distances from the action point of maximum shear stress τmax to the x axis and
y axis respectively.

3 Where different load combinations are considered, the larger value therein shall be taken as
the design value of equivalent concentrated reaction to be used for the calculation of the punching
shear capacity of slab-column joint.

F.0.2 In the calculation of the punching shear capacity of slab-column joints with consideration of the
unidirectional unbalanced bending moment transferred due to shear force, the parameters related to
the design value of equivalent concentrated reaction (Fl, eq) and the geometric dimensions as shown in
Figure F.0.1 of this appendix may be calculated according to the following expression:

1 The similar polar moment of inertia, geometric dimensions and calculation coefficient of the
critical section at central column may be calculated according to the following expressions (Figure
F.0.1a):

2
h a3 a 
I c  0 t  2h0 am  t  (F.0.2-1)
6 2

at
aAB  aCD  (F.0.2-2)
2

eg  0 (F.0.2-3)

1
0  1  (F.0.2-4)
2 hc  h0
1
3 bc  h0

2 The similar polar moment of inertia, geometric dimensions and calculation coefficient of the
critical section at side column may be calculated according to the following expressions:

25
 1) The acting plane of bending moment is perpendicular to the free edge (Figure F.0.1b)

2
h0 at3 a 
Ic   h0 am aAB
2
 2h0 at  t  aAB  (F.0.2-5)
6 2 

at2
aAB  (F.0.2-6)
am  2at

aCD  at  aAB (F.0.2-7)

hc
eg  aCD  (F.0.2-8)
2

1
0  1  (F.0.2-9)
2 hc  h0 / 2
1
3 bc  h0

2) The acting plane of bending moment is parallel to the free edge (Figure F.0.1c)

2
h0 at3 a 
Ic   2h0 am  t  (F.0.2-10)
12 2

at
aAB  aCD  (F.0.2-11)
2

eg  0 (F.0.2-12)

1
0  1  (F.0.2-13)
2 hc  h0
1
3 bc  h0 / 2

3 The similar polar moment of inertia, geometric dimensions and calculation coefficient of the
critical section at corner column may be calculated according to the following expressions (Figure
F.0.1d):

2
h a3 a 
I c  0 t  h0 am aAB
2
 h0 at  t  aAB  (F.0.2-14)
12 2 

at2
aAB  (F.0.2-15)
2(am  at )

aCD  at  aAB (F.0.2-16)

hc
eg  aCD  (F.0.2-17)
2
26
 1
0  1  (F.0.2-18)
2 hc  h0 / 2
1
3 bc  h0 / 2

F.0.3 In the calculation of the punching shear capacity of slab-column joints in accordance with
Expression (F.0.1-5) and Expression (F.0.1-6) of this appendix with consideration of transferring the
bidirectional unbalanced bending moment, if Article F.0.2 of this Appendix are regarded as the similar
polar moment of inertia, geometric dimensions and calculation coefficient of x axis (or y axis), then
the corresponding similar polar moment of inertia, geometric dimensions and calculation coefficient of
y axis (or x axis) may be determined by replacing the relevant aforementioned parameters of x axis (or y
axis).

F.0.4 When cantilever slabs are set at the positions of side column and corner column, the perimeter
of critical section may be counted till the slab end that is perpendicular to the free edge, and the
perimeter of critical section that is calculated based on this shall be compared with the perimeter of
critical section that is calculated in accordance with central column, and the smaller value between
them shall be taken. On this basis, the relevant parameters for the design value of equivalent
concentrated reaction (Fl, eq) that is used for the calculation of the punching shear capacity of
slab-column joints with consideration of transferring unbalanced bending moment due to shear force
shall be determined according to the principles stated in Article F.0.2 and Article F.0.3 of this code.

27
 Appendix G Deep Flexural Members

G.0.1 The section design of simply-supported reinforced concrete single-span deep beams may be
carried out by adopting the internal force calculated with common method; the section design of
reinforced concrete multi-span continuous deep beams may be carried out by adopting the internal
force calculated through two-dimensional elastic analysis.

G.0.2 The normal section flexural capacity of reinforced concrete deep flexural members shall meet
the following requirements:

M≤fyAsz (G.0.2-1)

z=αd(h0－0.5x) (G.0.2-2)

l0
 d  0.80  0.04 (G.0.2-3)
h
If l0<h, the internal force arm z=0.6l0.

Where x——The depth of the compression zone of section, which shall be calculated in accordance
with Section 6.2 of this code; if x<0.2h0, x=0.2h0;

h0——The effective depth of section: h0=h － as, therein, h is the depth of section; if l0/h≤ 2,
as of mid-span section will be 0.1h and as of support section will be 0.2h; if l0/h>2, as
shall be taken in accordance with the actual distance from the centroid of the section
of longitudinal steel reinforcement in tension zone to the extreme fiber in tension
zone.

G.0.3 The shear section of reinforced concrete deep flexural members shall meet the following
conditions:

If hw/b≤4

1
V (10  l0 / h)  c f cbh0 (G.0.3-1)
60
If hw/b≥6

1
V (7  l0 / h)  c f cbh0 (G.0.3-2)
60
If 4<hw/b<6, V shall be calculated according to linear interpolation method.

Where V——The design value of shear force;

l0——The calculated span, if l0<2h, then l0=2h;

b——The width of rectangular section as well as the web thickness of T-shaped or I-shaped
section;

H, h0——The depth and the effective depth of section respectively;

hw——The web depth of section: for rectangular section, hw will be the effective depth h0;
for T-section, hw will be the effective depth minus the flange height; for I-shaped

28
 section and box section, hw will be the net depth of web;

βc——The influence coefficient of concrete strength, which shall be taken in accordance

with Article 6.3.1 of this code.

G.0.4 For deep flexural members with rectangular, T-shaped or I-shaped section under the action of
uniformly distributed loads, if arranged with vertically and horizontally distributed steel
reinforcement, the shear capacity of the inclined section shall meet the following requirements:

(8  l0 / h) (l / h  2) A (5  l0 / h) A
V  0.7 f t bh0  0 f yv sv h0  f yh sh h0 (G.0.4-1)
3 3 sh 6 sv

For deep flexural members under the action of concentrated loads (including the case that
diversified loads act and the shear force produced by concentrated load therein to the support section
accounts for over 75% of the total shear force), the shear capacity of the inclined section shall meet
the following requirements:

1.75 (l / h  2) A (5  l0 / h) A
V f t bh0  0 f yv sv h0  f yh sh h0 (G.0.4-2)
 1 3 sh 6 sv

Where λ——The calculated shear span ratio: if l0/h is not larger than 2.0, λ=0.25; if l0/h is larger
than 2 and is less than 5, λ=a/h0, therein, a is the horizontal distance from the
concentrated load to the support of deep flexural member; the upper limit value of λ
is (0.92l0/h－1.58) and the lower limit value of λ is (0.42l0/h－0.58);

l0/h——The span-depth ratio, l0/h=2.0 if l0/h<2.

G.0.5 Reinforced concrete deep beams that are generally not allowed to have inclined cracks shall
meet the following condition:

Vk  0.5 f tk bh0 (G.0.5)

Where Vk——The shear force value calculated according to the standard combination of load
effects.

In this case, the calculation of shear capacity of inclined section may not be required, however,
the distribution steel reinforcement shall be configured in accordance with Article G.0.10 and Article
G.0.12 of this code.

G.0.6 For positions of reinforced concrete deep beam withstanding the action of support reaction or
concentrated load, the calculation of local bearing capacity shall be carried out in accordance with
Section 6.6 of this code.

G.0.7 The section width of deep beams shall not be less than 140mm. If l0/h is not less than 1, h/b
should not be larger than 25; if l0/h is less than 1, l0/b should not be larger than 25. The concrete
strength grade of deep beams shall not be less than C20. When deep beams are supported on the
reinforced concrete columns, the columns shall be extended to the top of the deep beams. The top of
the deep beams shall be connected reliably with such horizontal members as floor slabs.

G.0.8 The longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement of reinforced concrete deep beams should adopt

29
smaller diameter and should be arranged according to the following requirements:

1 The lower longitudinal steel reinforcement of single-span deep beams and continuous deep
beams should be uniformly arranged in the scope above the lower edge of beams by 0.2h (Figure
G.0.8-1 and Figure G.0.8-2).

Figure G.0.8-1 Arrangement of Steel Reinforcement for Single-span Deep Beam

1—lower longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement and bent anchorage; 2—horizontally and vertically distributed steel reinforcement; 3—tie
bar; 4—intensified zone of tie bars

2 The longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement in the section of the intermediate support of
continuous deep beam should be uniformly arranged in the corresponding altitude range according to
the altitude range and ratio of reinforcement specified in Figure G.0.8-3. As for the continuous deep
beams with l0/h less than 1, the ratio of reinforcement of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcements in
the altitude range above the bottom surface of intermediate support by 0.2l0~0.6l0 should also not be
less than 0.5%. The horizontally distributed steel reinforcements may be used for upper longitudinal
tensile steel reinforcements at the position of support, and the part with insufficient horizontally
distributed steel reinforcements may be supplemented with additional horizontal steel reinforcements,
and the extending length of additional horizontal steel reinforcements from the support to the midspan
should not be less than 0.4l0 (Figure G.0.8-2)

Figure G.0.8-2 Arrangement of Steel Reinforcement for Continuous Deep Beam

1—lower longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement; 2—horizontally distributed steel reinforcement;

30
 3—vertically distributed steel reinforcement; 4—tie bar; 5—intensified zone of tie bars;
6—additional horizontal steel reinforcement at upper part of support section

Figure G.0.8-3 Distribution Ratio of Longitudinal Tensile steel Reinforcement in Different Altitude Ranges in the
Section of Intermediate Support of Continuous Deep Beam

G.0.9 The lower longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement of deep beam shall all be extended into the
support and shall not be bent up or cut off at the midspan. At the support of simply-supported
single-span deep beam and the simply-supported support at the bend of continuous deep beam, the
longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement shall be bent and anchored along the horizontal direction
(Figure G.0.8-1), the anchorage length shall be adopted in accordance with the anchorage length la of
tensile steel reinforcements specified in Article 8.3.1 of this code multiplied by a coefficient 1.1;
where the above-mentioned requirements on anchorage length cannot be met, the effective anchoring
measures, such as welding anchorage steel plate on the steel reinforcement or welding the end of steel
reinforcement into closed type, shall be taken. The lower longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement of
continuous deep beam all shall be passed through the center line of intermediate support, and the
anchorage length starting from the edge of support shall not be less than la.

G.0.10 The deep beam shall be arranged with double-row steel mesh reinforcement, the diameter of
both the horizontally and vertically distributed steel reinforcement shall not be less than 8mm and the
spacing shall not be larger than 200mm.

Where columns are built along the vertical edge at end of deep beam, the horizontally distributed
steel reinforcement shall be anchored into the column. At the upper and lower edges of deep beam, the
vertically distributed steel reinforcement should be made into closed type.

Tie bars shall be arranged between the double-row steel reinforcement of deep beam, and the
spacing of tie bars along both the vertical and horizontal directions should not be larger than 600mm,
and the amount of tie bars shall also be increased appropriately in the scope with height of 0.4h in the
support zone and width of 0.4h extruding out of the support (the dotted portion in Figure G.0.8-1 and
Figure G.0.8-2).

G.0.11 Where deep beams are loaded by uniformly distributed loads along the full span, the
additional vertical steel hangers shall be uniformly arranged along the full span of beams, and the
spacing of steel hangers should not be larger than 200mm.

If there is concentrated load acting within 3/4 altitude range at the lower part of deep beam, this
concentrated load all shall be carried by the additional steel hangers, and the steel hangers shall adopt
31
the vertical steel hanger or inclined steel hanger. The horizontal distribution length s of vertical steel
hangers shall be determined according to the following formulae (Figure G.0.11a):

If h1≤hb/2

s=bb+hb (G.0.11-1)

If h1>hb/2

s=bb+2h1 (G.0.11-2)

Where bb——The section width of the member that transfers the concentrated load;

hb——The section depth of the member that transfers the concentrated load;

h1——The height from the lower edge of deep beam to the bottom edge of the member that
transfers the concentrated load.

The vertical steel hangers shall be distributed along both sides of the beam and shall reach the
beam top from the beam bottom and shall be made into closed type at the beam top and beam bottom.

The gross cross-sectional area Asv of additional steel hangers shall be calculated in accordance
with Section 9.2 of this code, however, the design strength fyv of steel hangers shall be multiplied by
the additional coefficient 0.8 that is used for the calculation of load-carrying capacity.

(a) Vertical steel hangers (b) Inclined steel hangers

Figure G.0.11 Additional Steel Hangers When the Deep Beam Withstanding the Action of Concentrated Load
Note: Dimensional unit in the Figure is mm.

 As 
G.0.12 For the deep beam, the ratio of reinforcement      of longitudinal tensile steel
 bh 

 A 
reinforcement, the ratio of reinforcement  sh   sh  sh  of horizontally distributed steel reinforcement
 bsv 
(sv is the spacing of horizontally distributed steel reinforcement) and the ratio of reinforcement
 Asv 
 sv   sv   of vertically distributed steel reinforcement (sh is the spacing of vertically distributed
 bsh 
steel reinforcement) should not be less than the values specified in Table G.0.12.

G.0.13 For deep flexural members except for deep beams, the detailing requirements of the
longitudinal load-carrying steel reinforcement, stirrups and longitudinal constructional steel
32
reinforcement are the same as those of common beams, however, the longitudinal constructional steel
reinforcement distributed within a range of 1/2 depth at the lower part of the section and those
distributed within a range of 1/2 depth at the upper portion of intermediate support should be
reinforced appropriately by comparing with the common beams.

Table G.0.12 Minimum Percentage of Reinforcement in Deep Beam (%)

Longitudinal tensile steel Horizontally distributed Vertically distributed steel

Type of steel reinforcement
reinforcement steel reinforcement reinforcement

HPB300 0.25 0.25 0.20

HRB400, HRBF400, RRB400, HRB335, HRBF335 0.20 0.20 0.15

HRB500, HRBF500 0.15 0.15 0.10

Note: Where the concentrated load acts within the range of 1/4 depth at the upper portion of continuous deep beam and l0/h is larger
than 1.5, the minimum percentage of reinforcement of the vertically distributed steel reinforcement shall be increased by 0.05.

33
 Appendix H Composite Beam and Slab Without Shores

H.0.1 For composite flexural members (beam and slab) without shores during the construction stage,
the internal force shall be calculated respectively in accordance with the following two phases.

1 First phase: The phase before the post-cast concrete of composite layers reaching the design
value of strength. The loads are carried by the precast members, the precast members shall be
calculated in accordance with simply-supported members; the loads include the self-weight of precast
members, the self-weight of precast floor slabs, the self-weight of composite layers and the live
construction loads of this stage.

2 Second phase: The phase after the concrete of composite layers reaching the strength value
specified in the deign. The composite members shall be calculated in accordance with integral
structure; and the load shall be taken as the larger value by considering the following two conditions:

Construction stage: The self-weight of composite members, precast floor slabs, surface layer and
suspended ceiling as well as the live construction loads in this stage shall be taken into consideration;

Service stage: The self-weight of composite members, precast floor slabs, surface layer and
suspended ceiling as well as the variable loads in service stage shall be taken into consideration;

H.0.2 The normal section flexural load-carrying capacity of the precast members and composite
members shall be calculated in accordance with Section 6.2 of this code, therein, the design value of
bending moment shall be taken according to the following requirements:

Precast member

M1=M1G+M1Q (H.0.2-1)

Positive bending moment segment of composite member

M=M1G+M2G+M2Q (H.0.2-2)

Negative bending moment segment of composite member

M=M2G+M2Q (H.0.2-3)

Where M1G——The design value of the bending moment produced in the calculated section by the
self-weight of precast members, precast floor slabs and composite layers;

M2G——The design value of the bending moment produced in the calculated section by the
self-weight of surface layer, suspended ceiling and others during the second phase;

M1Q——The design value of the bending moment produced in the calculated section by the
live construction loads during the first phase;

M2Q——The design value of the bending moment produced in the calculated section by the
variable loads during the second phase, which shall be taken as the larger value
between the design values of bending moment produced in the calculated section
by the live construction loads during this stage and the variable loads during the
service stage.

In the calculation, the concrete strength grade of positive bending moment segment shall be

34
taken in accordance with the composite layer; the concrete strength grade of negative bending
moment segment shall be taken in accordance with the actual conditions of the compression zone of
calculated section.

H.0.3 The inclined section shear capacity of precast members and composite members shall be
calculated in accordance with Section 6.3 of this code. Therein, the design value of shear force shall
be taken according to the following requirements:

Precast member

V1=V1G+V1Q (H.0.3-1)

Composite member

V=V1G+V2G+V2Q (H.0.3-2)

Where V1G——The design value of the shear force produced in the calculated section by the
self-weight of precast members, precast floor slabs and composite layers;

V2G——The design value of the shear force produced in the calculated section by the
self-weight of surface layer, suspended ceiling and others during the second phase;

V1Q——The design value of the shear force produced in the calculated section by the live
construction loads during the first phase;

V2Q——The design value of the shear force produced by the variable loads during the
second phase, which shall be taken as the larger value between the design values of
shear force produced in the calculated section by the live construction loads during
this stage and the variable loads during the service stage.

In the calculation, the design value of shear capacity Vcs of the concrete and stirrups on the
inclined section of composite member shall be calculated by adopting with the lower concrete
strength grade among the composite layer and precast members and shall not be less than the design
value of shear capacity of precast members; as for the prestressed concrete composite member, Vp=0,
without considering the favorable influence of prestress on the shear capacity.

H.0.4 Where the composite beam meets the detailing requirements of beam as stated in Section 9.2
of this code, the shear capacity of its composite surface shall meet the following requirements:

Asv
V  1.2 f t bh0  0.85 f yv h0 (H.0.4-1)
s
Where, the design value of concrete tensile strength ft shall be taken as the smaller value between
the composite layer and precast member.

For composite slabs without stirrups, if it meets the detailing requirements on the roughness of
composite interface stated in this code, the shear strength of the composite surface shall meet the
requirements of the following expression:

V
 0.4 (N/mm2) (H.0.4-2)
bh0

H.0.5 For prestressed concrete composite flexural members, the precast members and composite
members shall be carried out with the crack resistance analysis of normal section. In this case, in
35
relation to the characteristic combination of loads, the tensile stress of edge concrete for the crack
resistance analysis shall not be larger than the characteristic value of concrete tensile strength ftk of the
precast members. The normal stress of edge concrete for crack resistance analysis shall be calculated
according to the following expressions:

Precast members

M 1k
 ck  (H.0.5-1)
W01

Composite members

M 1Gk M 2k
 ck   (H.0.5-2)
W01 W0

Where M1Gk——The bending moment value produced in the calculated section by the self-weight
of precast members, the self-weight of precast floor slabs and the characteristic
value of self-weight of composite layers;

M1k——The bending moment value produced in the calculated section under the characteristic
combination of loads during the first phase, M1k=M1Gk+M1Qk, and herein, M1Qk is
the bending moment produced in the calculated section by the characteristic value
of live construction loads during the first phase;

M2k——The bending moment value produced in the calculated section by characteristic

combination of loads during the second phase, M2k=M2Gk+M2Qk, and herein, M2Gk
is the bending moment value produced in the calculated section by the
characteristic values of the self-weight of surface layer, suspended ceiling and
others; M2Qk is the bending moment value produced in the calculated section by
the characteristic value of the variable loads during the service stage;

W01——The moment of elastic resistance at the extreme fiber in tension zone of the
transformed section of precast member;

W0——The moment of elastic resistance at the extreme fiber in tension zone of the
transformed section of composite member, here, the cross-sectional area of
concrete at the composite layer shall be converted to the cross-sectional area of
concrete of precast member in accordance with elastic modulus ratio.

H.0.6 The prestressed concrete composite members shall be carried out with crack resistance
analysis of inclined section in accordance with Article 7.1.5 of this code; the principal tensile stress and
principal compressive stress of concrete shall be calculated in accordance with Article 7.1.6 of this
code by considering with the loading-bearing characteristics of composite members.

H.0.7 Under the quasi-permanent combination of loads, the stress σsq of longitudinal tensile steel
reinforcement for reinforced concrete composite flexural members shall meet the following
requirements:

σsq≤0.9fy (H.0.7-1)

σsq=σs1k+σs2q (H.0.7-2)
36
 Under the action of bending moment M1Gk, the stress σslk of longitudinal tensile steel
reinforcement for precast members may be calculated according to the following expression:

M 1Gk
 s1k  (H.0.7-3)
0.87 As h01

Where h01——The effective depth of section of precast member.

Under the action of bending moment M2q corresponding to the quasi-permanent combination of
loads, the increment σs2q of the stress of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement for composite
members may be calculated according to the following expression:

 h 
0.5 1  1  M 2 q
 h
 s2q  (H.0.7-4)
0.87 As h0

 h1 
If M1Gk<0.35M1u, the value of 0.5 1   in Expression (H.0.7-4) shall be equal to 1.0; here,
 h
M1u is the design value of the normal section flexural capacity of precast members and shall be
calculated in accordance with Section 6.2 of this code, however, the expression shall take the equal
sign and M shall be replaced by M1u.

H.0.8 For concrete composite members, the analysis of crack width shall be carried out, and the
maximum crack width ωmax calculated in accordance with the quasi-permanent combination or
characteristic combination of loads and considering the influence of long-term action shall not exceed
the limit for maximum crack width as specified in Section 3.4 of this code. The maximum crack width
ωmax, in accordance with the quasi-permanent combination or characteristic combination of loads and
considering the influence of long-term action, may be calculated according to the following
expressions:

Reinforced concrete members

 ( s1k   s2q )  d eq 
max  2 1.9c  0.08  (H.0.8-1)
Es   te1 

0.65 f tkl
  1.1  (H.0.8-2)
 tel s1k   te s2q

Prestressed concrete members

 ( s1k   s2k )  d eq 
max  1.6 1.9c  0.08  (H.0.8-3)
Es   te1 

0.65 f tk1
  1.1  (H.0.8-4)
 te1 s1k   te s2k

37
Where deq——The equivalent diameter of longitudinal steel reinforcement in tension zone, which
shall be calculated in accordance with Article 7.1.2 of this code;

ρte1, ρte——The ratio of reinforcement of longitudinal tensile steel reinforcement calculated in

accordance with the area of effective tension concrete section of precast member
and composite members, which shall be calculated in accordance with Article 7.1.2
of this code;

ftk1——The characteristic value of concrete tensile strength of precast members.

H.0.9 The composite members shall be carried out with the deflection analysis at serviceability limit
states in accordance with Article 7.2.1 of this code. Therein, the stiffness composite flexural members,
in accordance with the quasi-permanent combination or characteristic combination of loads and
considering the influence of long-term action, may be calculated according to the following
expressions:

Reinforced concrete members

Mq
B Bs2 (H.0.9-1)
 Bs2 
  1 M 1Gk  M q
 Bs1 

Prestressed concrete members

Mk
B Bs2 (H.0.9-2)
 Bs2 
  1 M 1Gk  (  1) M q  M k
 Bs1 

Mk=M1Gk+M2k (H.0.9-3)
Mq=M1Gk+M2Gk+ qM2Qk (H.0.9-4)

Where θ——The influence coefficient for deflection increment by considering long-term action of
loads, which shall be taken according to Article 7.2.5 of this code;

Mk——The bending moment value of composite member that is calculated in accordance

with the characteristic combination of loads;

Mq——The bending moment value of composite member that is calculated in accordance

with the quasi-permanent combination of loads;

Bs1——The short-term stiffness of precast member, which shall be taken in accordance with
Article H.0.10 of this code;

Bs2——The short-term stiffness of composite member during the second phase, which shall
be taken in accordance with Article H.0.10 of this code;

 q——The coefficient of quasi-permanent value of variable loads during the second phase.
H.0.10 Under the action of the quasi-permanent combination or characteristic combination of loads,
the short-term stiffness of composite flexural member in its positive bending moment segment may be
calculated according to the following requirements.

38
 1 Reinforced concrete composite member

1) The short-term stiffness Bs1 of precast members may be calculated in accordance with
Expression (7.2.3-1) in this code.

2) The short-term stiffness of composite members during the second phase may be
calculated according to the following expression:

Es Ash02
Bs2  (H.0.10-1)
h 45 E 
0.7  0.6 1 
h 1  3.5 f

Where αE——The ratio of the elastic modulus of steel reinforcement to the elastic modulus of
concrete of the composite layer: αE=Es/Ec2.

2 Prestressed concrete composite members

1) The short-term stiffness Bs1 of precast members may be calculated in accordance with
Expression (7.2.3-2) in this code.

2) The short-term stiffness of composite members during the second phase may be
calculated according to the following expression:

Bs2=0.7Ec1I0 (H.0.10-2)

Where Ec1——The elastic modulus of concrete of precast members;

I0——The inertia moment of the transformed section of composite members, here, the
cross-sectional area of concrete at the composite layers shall be converted to the
cross-sectional area of concrete of precast members in accordance with elastic
modulus ratio.

H.0.11 Under the action of quasi-permanent combination or characteristic combination of loads, the
short-term stiffness Bs2 during the second phase in the negative bending moment segment of
composite flexural members may be calculated according to Expression (7.2.3-1) in this code, therein,
the ratio of elastic modulus shall be αE=Es/Ec1.

H.0.12 The inverted camber value of the prestress for prestressed concrete composite members
during the service stage may be calculated according to the stiffness of precast members by structural
mechanics. In the calculation, the stress of prestressing tendons shall be deducted by all the prestress
losses; with consideration of the long term effect of prestress, the calculated inverted camber value of
prestress shall be multiplied by an amplification coefficient 1.75.

39
 Appendix J Prestress losses of Curved Post-tensioned-Tendons Due to

Anchorage Seating and Tendon Shortening

J.0.1 In post-tensioned members, the prestress losses of curved prestressing tendon due to
anchorage deformation and tendon shortening shall be calculated.

1 The influence length lf (mm) (Figure J.0.1) of reverse friction may be calculated according to
the following expressions:

a  Ep
lf  (J.0.1-1)
 d

0 l
 d  (J.0.1-2)
l
Where a——The value of the deformation of tensioning end anchorage and the shortening of
prestressing tendons (mm), which shall be adopted in accordance with Table 10.2.2
of this code;

Δσd——The prestress loss in unit length caused by the friction of ducts (MPa/mm);

σ0——The control stress under the anchorage at the jacking end, which shall be adopted
according to those specified in Article 10.1.3 of this code;

σl——The stress at the anchoring end of prestressing tendon after excluding the friction loss
along the line;

l——The distance from the jacking end to anchoring end (mm).

2 If lf≤l, the prestress loss σl1 of prestressing tendons, after considering the reverse friction, at
the position where is x away from the jack end may be calculated according to the following
expressions:

lf  x
 l1   (J.0.1-3)
lf

  2 d lf (J.0.1-4)

Where Δσ——The prestress loss value of prestressing tendons under the anchorage at the jack end
after considering the reverse friction.

3 If lf>l, the prestress loss  l1 of prestressing tendons, after considering the reverse friction, at
the position where is x' away from the jack end may be calculated according to the following
expression:

 l1     2 x d (J.0.1-5)

Where Δσ'——The prestress loss value of prestressing tendons under the anchorage at the jack end
40
 after considering the reverse friction, which may be obtained according to the
following method: In Figure J.0.1, it is supposed that the area of “ca'bd” isosceles
trapezoid A=a·Ep, and the cd value may be calculated, then Δσ'=cd.

Jack end Anchoring end

Figure J.0.1 Calculation of Prestress Loss After Considering the Reverse Friction

Note: 1 caa' means the stress distribution line of prestressing tendons after deducting the positive friction loss of pipe;

2 eaa' means the stress distribution line of prestressing tendons after deducting the loss due to positive friction and shortening
(considering the reverse friction) of pipe if lf≤l;

3 db means the stress distribution line of prestressing tendons after deducting the loss due to positive friction and shortening
(considering the reverse friction) of pipe if lf>l.

J.0.2 Where the loss influence length of tensioning at both ends (tensioning in several times or
simultaneously) is overlapped with the that of reverse friction, then the stress of prestressing tendons
in one same section within the overlapped scope after deducting the loss of positive friction and
rebounding reverse friction may be taken as: the larger value, which is obtained from the control
stress under the anchorage at the jack end minus the above-mentioned stress calculation results, by
respectively tensioning and anchoring both ends and calculating the loss of positive friction and
rebound reverse friction.

J.0.3 As for the curved post-tensioned prestressing tendons or segmented prestressing tendons of the
common tendon shapes, the prestress loss σl1 within the scope of reverse friction influence length lf
due to the anchorage deformation and the shortening of prestressing tendons may be calculated
according to the following expression:

1 The prestressing tendons of parabolic shape may be considered approximately according to

the curved prestressing tendons of circular arc shape (Figure J.0.3-1). Where the corresponding central
angle θ≤45° (θ≤90° for the unbonded prestressing tendons), the value of prestress loss σl1 may be
calculated according to the following expression:

  x
 l1  2 conlf    1   (J.0.3-1)
 rc  lf 

The influence length lf (m) of reverse friction may be calculated according to the following
expression:

41
 aEs
lf  (J.0.3-2)
1000 con (  / rc   )

Where rc——The curvature radius of the curved prestressing tendons of circular arc shape (m);

μ——The friction coefficient between the prestressing tendons and duct walls, which shall
be adopted in accordance with Table 10.2.4 of this code;

κ——The friction coefficient in consideration of partial deviation in each meter length of

the duct, which shall be adopted in accordance with Table 10.2.4 of this code;

x——The distance from the tensioning end to the calculated section (m);

a——The value of the deformation of tensioning end anchorage and the shortening of
prestressing tendons (mm), which shall be adopted in accordance with Table 10.2.2
of this code;

Es——The elastic modulus of prestressing tendons.

Figure J.0.3-1 Prestress loss σl1 of the Curved Prestressing Tendons of Circular Arc Shape

2 As for the prestressing tendons (Figure J.0.3-2) with straight lines at ends (the length of
straight line is l0) and composed of two circular curves subsequently (corresponding to the circular arc,
the central angle θ≤45°, and θ≤90° for the unbonded prestressing tendons), the value of its prestress
loss σl1 may be calculated according to the following expressions:

If x≤l0

σl1=2i1(l1－l0)+2i2(lf－l1) (J.0.3-3)

If l0<x≤l1

σl1=2i1(l1－x)+2i2(lf－l1) (J.0.3-4)

If l1<x≤lf

σl1=2i2(lf－x) (J.0.3-5)

The influence length lf (m) of reverse friction may be calculated according to the following
expressions:

42
 aEs i (l 2  l 2 )
lf   1 1 0  l12 (J.0.3-6)
1000i2 i2

i1   a (   / rc1 ) (J.0.3-7)

i2   b (   / rc2 ) (J.0.3-8)

Where l1——The horizontal projection length from the starting point of the jack end of
prestressing tendons to the inflection point;

i1, i2——The slopes of the approximate variation straight line of stress in the first and second
segments of circular curved prestressing tendons respectively;

rc1, rc2——The curvature radii of the first and second segments of circular curved prestressing
tendons respectively t;

σa, σb——The stresses of prestressing tendons at Point a and b respectively.

Figure J.0.3-2 Prestress loss σl1 of the Prestressing Tendons Composed of Two Circular Curves

3 Where the anchorage loss of broken-line prestressing tendons disappears outside the break
point c (Figure J.0.3-3), the value of prestress loss σl1 may be calculated according to the following
expressions:

If x≤l0

σl1=2σ1+2i1(l1－l0)+2σ2+2i2(lf－l1) (J.0.3-9)

If l0<x≤l1

σl1=2i1(l1－x)+2σ2+2i2(lf－l1) (J.0.3-10)

If l1<x≤lf

σl1=2i2(lf－x) (J.0.3-11)

43
 Figure J.0.3-3 Prestress loss σl1 of the Segmented Prestressing Tendons

The influence length lf (m) of reverse friction may be calculated according to the following
expressions:

aEs i (l  l ) 2  2i1l0 (l1  l0 )  2 1l0  2 2l1 2

lf   1 1 0  l1 (J.0.3-12)
1000i2 i2

i1=σcon(1－μθ)κ (J.0.3-13)

i2=σcon[1－κ(l1－l0)](1－μθ)2κ (J.0.3-14)

σ1=σconμθ (J.0.3-15)

σ2=σcon[1－κ(l1－l0)](1－μθ)μθ (J.0.3-16)

Where i1——The slope of the approximate variation straight line of stress in bc segment of
prestressing tendons;

i2——The slope of the approximate variation straight line of stress outside the break point c
of prestressing tendons;

l1——The horizontal projection length from the starting point of the jack end to the break
point c of prestressing tendons.

44
 Appendix K Time-dependent Losses of Prestress

K.0.1 The ultimate value of the prestress losses of prestressing tendons caused by concrete
shrinkage and creep may be calculated as following:

1 The ultimate value σl5 of prestress loss of longitudinal prestressing tendons in tension zone

0.9 p pc  Es 

 l5  (K.0.1-1)
1  15 

Where σpc——The normal compressive stress of concrete produced at the point of resultant force
of prestressing tendons in tension zone due to the jacking force (excluding the
prestress loss of the corresponding stage) and the self-weight of beam, its value
shall not be larger than 0.5 f cu ; for the simple-supported beam, σpc may take the
mean value of the mid-span section and the section at 1/4 span; as for continuous
beam and frame, σpc may take the mean value of several representative sections;

φ∞——The ultimate value of the creep coefficient of concrete;

ε∞——The ultimate value of the shrinkage strain of concrete;

Es——The elastic modulus of prestressing tendons;

αp——The ratio of the elastic modulus of prestressing tendons to the elastic modulus of
concrete;

ρ——The ratio of reinforcement of prestressing tendons and steel rebars in the tension
zone: as for the pretensioned members, ρ=(Ap+As)/A0; as for post-tensioned
members, ρ=(Ap+As)/An; as for the members symmetrically distributed with prestressing
tendons and steel rebars, the ratio of reinforcement ρ shall be one half of the gross
cross-sectional area of steel reinforcement.

If there is no reliable information available, the values of φ∞ and ε∞ may be adopted in

accordance with Table K.0.1-1 and Table K.0.1-2. If the structure is in such environment where the
annual average relative humidity is less than 40%, the values listed in these two tables shall be
increased by 30%.

Table K.0.1-1 Ultimate Value of the Shrinkage Strain of Concrete ε∞ (×10 4)

－

Annual average relative humidity RH 40%≤RH<70% 70%≤RH≤99%

Theoretical thickness 2A/u (mm) 100 200 300 ≥600 100 200 300 ≥600

3 4.83 4.09 3.57 3.09 3.47 2.95 2.60 2.26

7 4.35 3.89 3.44 3.01 3.12 2.80 2.49 2.18

10 4.06 3.77 3.37 2.96 2.91 2.70 2.42 2.14

Concrete age under
14 2.73 3.62 3.27 2.91 2.67 2.59 2.35 2.10
prestress t0 (d)
28 2.90 3.20 3.01 2.77 2.07 2.28 2.15 1.98

60 1.92 2.54 2.58 2.54 1.37 1.80 1.82 1.80

≥90 1.45 2.12 2.27 2.38 1.03 1.50 1.60 1.68

Table K.0.1-2 Ultimate Value of the Creep Coefficient of Concrete φ∞

45
 Annual average relative humidity RH 40%≤RH<70% 70%≤RH≤99%

Theoretical thickness 2A/u (mm) 100 200 300 ≥600 100 200 300 ≥600

3 3.51 3.14 2.94 2.63 2.78 2.55 2.43 2.23

7 3.00 2.68 2.51 2.25 2.37 2.18 2.08 1.91

10 2.80 2.51 2.35 2.10 2.22 2.04 1.94 1.78

Concrete age under
14 2.63 2.35 2.21 1.97 2.08 1.91 1.82 1.67
prestress t0 (d)
28 2.31 2.06 1.93 1.73 1.82 1.68 1.60 1.47

60 1.99 1.78 1.67 1.49 1.58 1.45 1.38 1.27

≥90 1.85 1.65 1.55 1.38 1.46 1.34 1.28 1.17

Note: 1 The concrete age under prestress may be taken between 3d~7d for pretensioned members and between 7d~28d for post-
tensioned members;

2 A is the cross-sectional area of member, u is the peripheral length of this section contacting with the atmosphere; if the
member is of variable section, both A and u may be taken as their mean values;

3 This Table is applicable to the concrete prepared with common Portland cement or rapid hardening cement; the values in the

32.4
above table are calculated according to the concrete with strength grade of C40, and they shall be multiplied by in
f ck

relation to the concrete of or above C50, therein, fck is the characteristic value of axial compressive strength of concrete
(MPa);

4 This Table is applicable to the cases that the seasonal mean temperature change is between －20℃~+40℃;

5 Where the theoretical thickness of actual member and the concrete age under prestress are the medium values of those values
listed in the table, they may be determined according to linear interpolation method.

2 The ultimate value  l5 of prestress loss of the longitudinal prestressing tendons in
compression zone

0.9 p pc
   Es 
 l5  (K.0.1-2)
1  15  

Where  pc ——The normal compressive stress of concrete produced at the point of resultant force
of prestressing tendons in compression zone due to the jacking force (excluding
the prestress loss of corresponding stage) and the self-weight of beam, and its
 =0 if  pc
value shall not be larger than 0.5 f cu , and  pc  is tensile stress;

ρ'——The ratio of reinforcement of prestressing tendons and steel rebars in the

compression zone: as for pretensioned members,    ( Ap  As ) /A0 ; as for post-
tensioned members,    ( Ap  As ) /An .

Note: As for the member, arranged with prestressing tendons Ap and steel rebar As in the compression zone, σpc and  pc in

Expression (K.0.1-1) and Expression (K.0.1-2) shall be calculated according to the gross jacking force of the section.

K.0.2 The value of prestressing losses due to concrete shrinkage and creep with consideration of the
time influence may be determined by the ultimate values σl5 and  l5 calculated in Article K.0.1
multiplied by the corresponding coefficient in Table K.0.2.

46
 The value of prestressing losses due to stress relaxation of prestressing tendons with
consideration of the time influence may be determined by the prestress loss value σl4 calculated in
Article 10.2.1 of this code multiplied by the corresponding coefficient in Table K.0.2.

Table K.0.2 Coefficient of Time-dependent Losses of Prestress

Time (d) Coefficient of loss due to relaxation Coefficient of loss due to shrinkage and creep

2 0.50 —

10 0.77 0.33

20 0.88 0.37

30 0.95 0.40

40 0.43

60 0.50

90 0.60
1.00
180 0.75

365 0.85

1095 1.00

Note: 1 For the pretension prestressed concrete members, the time of relaxation loss shall be calculated starting from the completion
of tensioning and the time of shrinkage and creep loss shall be calculated starting from the completion of extension;

2 For the post-tensioned prestressed concrete members, the time of both the relaxation loss and the shrinkage and creep loss
shall be calculated starting from the completion of tensioning.

47
 Explanation of Wording in This Code

1 Words used for different degrees of strictness are explained as follows in order to mark the
differences in executing the requirements in this code:

1) Words denoting a very strict or mandatory requirement:

“Must” is used for affirmation, “must not” for negation;

2) Words denoting a strict requirement under normal conditions:

“Shall” is used for affirmation, “shall not” for negation.

3) Words denoting a permission of a slight choice or an indication of the most suitable

choice if conditions permit:

“Should” is used for affirmation, “should not” for negation;

4) “May” is used to express the option available, sometimes with the conditional permit.

2 “Shall comply with……” or “shall meet the requirements of……” is used in this code to
indicate that it is necessary to comply with the requirements stipulated in other relative standards and
codes.

48
 List of Quoted Standards

1 “Unified Standard for Reliability Design of Engineering Structures” GB 50153

2 “Unified Standard Reliability Design of Building Structures” GB 50068

3 “Load Code for the Design of Building Structures” GB 50009

4 “Code for Seismic Design of Buildings” GB 50011

5 “Steel for the Reinforcement of Concrete” GB 1499

6 “Steel Wires for the Prestressing of Concrete” GB/T 5223

7 “Steel Strand for Prestressed Concrete” GB/T 5224

8 “Standard for Evaluation of Concrete Compressive Strength” GB/T 50107

9 “Code for Construction of Concrete Structures” GB 50666

10 “Code for Acceptance of Constructional Quality of Concrete Structures” GB 50204

49